Agenda packet — Lakeport City Council, January 6, 2026 (part 1 of 2)

If you cannot attend in person, and would like to speak on an agenda item, you can access the Zoom meeting remotely:

Join from a PC, Mac, iPad, iPhone or Android device:

Please click this URL to join. https://zoom.us/j/97368201787?pwd=a2NvVnN6MEFjQ2Exc2pTZkpIdU1sQT09 Passcode: 477973
Or join by phone:

Dial (for higher quality, dial a number based on your current location):

US: +1 669 900 9128 or +1 346 248 7799 or +1 253 215 8782 or +1 646 558 8656 or +1 301 715 8592 or +1 312 626 6799 Webinar ID: 973 6820 1787
Passcode: 477973
International numbers available: https://zoom.us/u/abNyiaqY1I The City wants you to know that you can also submit your comments by email to [email protected].

To give the City Clerk adequate time to print out your comments for consideration at the meeting, please submit your written comments prior to 3:30 p.m. on Tuesday, January 6, 2026.

Please indicate in the email Subject Line "FOR PUBLIC COMMENT" and list the item number you wish to comment on.

Comments that you want read to the Council will be subject to the three minute time limitation (approximately 350 words).

Written comments that are only to be provided to Council and not read at the meeting will be distributed to the Council prior to the meeting.

AGENDA

REGULAR MEETING OF THE LAKEPORT CITY COUNCIL
(ALSO MEETS AS THE CITY OF LAKEPORT MUNICIPAL SEWER DISTRICT, THE LAKEPORT INDUSTRIAL

DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY, THE MUNICIPAL FINANCING AGENCY OF LAKEPORT, THE LAKEPORT GROUNDWATER SUSTAINABLITY AGENCY and THE SUCCESSOR AGENCY TO THE FORMER LAKEPORT

REDEVELOPMENT AGENCY)
Tuesday, January 06, 2026 6:00 p.m.

City Council Chambers, 225 Park Street, Lakeport, California 95453 See Teleconferencing Instructions Below
City Council Agenda of January 06, 2026 Page 2
AGENDA

REGULAR MEETING OF THE LAKEPORT CITY COUNCIL
(ALSO MEETS AS THE CITY OF LAKEPORT MUNICIPAL SEWER DISTRICT, THE

LAKEPORT INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY, THE MUNICIPAL FINANCING

AGENCY OF LAKEPORT, LAKEPORT GROUNDWATER SUSTAINABILITY AUTHORITY and THE SUCCESSOR AGENCY TO THE FORMER LAKEPORT REDEVELOPMENT AGENCY)*
Tuesday, January 06, 2026, 6:00 p.m.

City Council Chambers, 225 Park Street, Lakeport, California 95453 *All references to “City Council” include those other agencies which are listed above The City Council may discuss and/or take action on any or all of the items listed on the agenda irrespective of how the agenda items are described. The council may establish and make appointments to a Council committee (made up of two Councilmembers) with respect to any item appearing on this agenda.

I. CALL TO ORDER & ROLL CALL: 6:00 p.m.

II. PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE:

III. ACCEPTANCE OF AGENDA/ URGENCY
ITEMS:

Move to accept agenda as posted or move to add or delete items.

To add item, Council is required to make a majority decision that an urgency exists (as defined in the Brown Act) and a 2/3rds determination that the need to take action arose subsequent to the agenda being posted.

IV. CONSENT AGENDA: The following Consent Agenda items are expected to be routine and noncontroversial. They will be acted upon by the Council at one time without any discussion. Any Council Member may request that any item be removed from the Consent Agenda for discussion under the regular Agenda. Removed items will be considered following the Consent Calendar portion of this agenda.

A. Ordinances: Waive reading except by title, of any ordinances under consideration at this meeting for either introduction or passage per Government Code Section 36934.

B. Minutes: Approve minutes of the City Council regular meeting of December 16, 2025.

C. Application 2026-003: Approve application 2026-003, with staff recommendations, for the Lake County Point in Time (PIT) count.

V. PUBLIC PRESENTATIONS/REQUESTS:

A. Public Input: Any person may speak for 3 minutes about any subject within the authority of the City Council, provided that the subject is not already on tonight’s agenda. Per Government Code §54954.3(a), the City Council cannot take action or express a consensus of approval or disapproval on any public comments regarding matters which do not appear on the printed agenda.

VI. COUNCIL BUSINESS:

A. City Manager

1. Council Liaison
Appointments:

Adopt a resolution appointing representatives to represent and vote on behalf of the City at the League of California Cities, Redwood Empire Division Business meetings and represent the City and vote at Division Legislative Committee meetings.

B. Utilities Director

1. Sodium Hypochlorite
Upgrade Project:

Approve the plans, specifications and working details and award a construction contract to Piazza Construction for the Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project and authorize the City Manager to execute the construction contract for the not-toexceed amount of $970,200.00.

VII. CITY COUNCIL COMMUNICATIONS:

A. Travel, Calendar, and
Miscellaneous Reports, if any:

City Council Agenda of January 06, 2026 Page 3
VIII. ADJOURNMENT:

Materials related to an item on this Agenda submitted to the Council after distribution of the agenda packet are available for public inspection in the City Clerk’s Office at 225 Park Street, Lakeport, California, during normal business hours. Such documents are also available on the City of Lakeport’s website, www.cityoflakeport.com, subject to staff’s ability to post the documents before the meeting.

The City of Lakeport, in complying with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), requests individuals who require special accommodations to access, attend and/or participate in the City meeting due to disability, to please contact the City Clerk’s Office, (707) 263-5615, 72 hours prior to the scheduled meeting to ensure reasonable accommodations are provided.
_______________________________________
Hilary Britton, Deputy City Clerk
City Council Agenda of December 16, 2025 Page 2

MINUTES

REGULAR MEETING OF THE LAKEPORT CITY COUNCIL
(ALSO MEETS AS THE CITY OF LAKEPORT MUNICIPAL SEWER DISTRICT, THE

LAKEPORT INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT AUTHORITY, THE MUNICIPAL FINANCING

AGENCY OF LAKEPORT, LAKEPORT GROUNDWATER SUSTAINABILITY AUTHORITY and THE SUCCESSOR AGENCY TO THE FORMER LAKEPORT REDEVELOPMENT AGENCY)*
Tuesday, December 16, 2025, 6:00 p.m.

I. CALL TO ORDER & ROLL CALL: Mayor Costa called the meeting to order at 6:00 p.m. with Council Members Disney, Mattina, and Parlet present. Council member Price was absent.

II. PLEDGE OF ALLEGIANCE: The Pledge of Allegiance was led by the Coach Carrie Bridges and the Westshore Pee Wee Cardinals football and cheer teams.

III. ACCEPTANCE OF AGENDA/ URGENCY
ITEMS:

A motion was made by Council Member Mattina, seconded by Council Member Disney, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to accept the agenda as posted.

A. Ordinances: Waive reading except by title, of any ordinances under consideration at this meeting for either introduction or passage per Government Code Section 36934.

B. Minutes: Approve the minutes of the City Council Regular Meeting of December 02, 2025.

C. Warrants: Approve the warrant register of December 03, 2025.

D. Application 2026-001: Approve application 2026-001, with staff recommendations for the 2026 Children’s Festival.

E. Application 2026-002: Approve application 2026-002, with staff recommendations for the 2026 Cinco de Mayo Fiesta.

F. 2025 Building Code Adoption: Adopt a proposed Ordinance amending Section 15.04.010 of the Lakeport Municipal Code to incorporate and adopt by reference the 2025 California Building Codes effective January 1, 2026.

G. NHA Contract Amendment: Authorize the City Manager to execute the attached amendment to the professional services agreement with NHA Advisors LLC.

VOTE: A motion was made by Council Member Disney, seconded by Council Member Parlet, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to approve the Consent Agenda, items A-G.

V. PUBLIC PRESENTATIONS/REQUESTS:

A. Public Input: District Four Supervisor Brad Rasmussen spoke about the increase in activity at Xabatin Park and that he is committing District 4 discretionary funds of $15,000 to help outfit the snack bar.

City Council Agenda of December 16, 2025 Page 3
Michael Green thanked the City Council, City Leadership and Supervisor Rasmussen for their leadership.

Dennis Rollins thanked the volunteers that have been maintaining the dog park.

There has been an incredible amount of brush cleared.

VI PUBLIC HEARINGS:

VII. COUNCIL BUSINESS:

A. City Clerk

1. City Council Reorganization: City Clerk Buendia asked for nominations for Mayor. Council Member Mattina nominated Council Member Disney who accepted the nomination and was unanimously elected 4-0-1-0 to serve as Mayor for a period of one year.

City Clerk Buendia asked for nominations for Mayor Pro Tem. Council Member Disney nominated Council Member Mattina who accepted the nomination and was unanimously elected 4-0-1-0 to serve as Mayor Pro Tem for a period of one year.

B. Community Development Director

1. Adams Ashby Contract
Amendment:

The staff report was presented by Community Development Director Hejnowicz.

A motion was made by Council Member Costa, seconded by Council Member Parlet, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to approve Amendment No. 1 to the Professional Services Agreement between the City of Lakeport and Adams Ashby Group, LLC for CDBG consulting services, extending the agreement term to September 30, 2027, updating the scope of services to include the CDBG MIT-RIP program, and establishing a total not-to-exceed contract amount of $300,000; and authorize the City Manager to execute the amendment on behalf of the City.

C. Public Works Director

1. Utilities Easement: The staff report was presented by Public Works Director Ladd.

A motion was made by Council Member Mattina, seconded by Council Member Costa, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to adopt four resolutions approving and authorizing the City Manager to execute contracts, and all other necessary documents, for the acquisition of right of way and drainage easements from property owners Savings Bank of Mendocino County, H&S Energy, LLC., Metaxas, and Lakeport Unified School District.

2. Stormwater Resources Plan
Adoption:

The staff report was presented by Public Works Director Ladd.

A motion was made by Council Member Parlet, seconded by Council Member Mattina, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to adopt a resolution approving the 2025 Lake County Stormwater Resources Plan (SWRP); authorizing staff to forward the adopted plan to the State Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB) and applicable Clean Water Program partner agencies; and directing staff to use the SWRP to guide future stormwater and watershed planning, project development, and grant application activities.

D. City Manager
City Council Agenda of December 16, 2025 Page 4

1. Westside Park CLMSD
License Agreement:

The staff report was presented by City Manager Ingram.

Dennis Rollins of the Westside Park provided an update on the insurance. Carol Thorn and Phil Rooney from the Westside Board of Directors were also present.

Sitting as the Board of Directors of the City of Lakeport Municipal Sewer District (CLMSD), a motion was made by Director Parlet, seconded by Director Mattina, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to approve the License Agreement with Westside Community Park for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Lakeport Equestrian and Trail Park on CLMSD property and authorize the Board Chair to execute the agreement on behalf of the CLMSD Board.

2. City Lands Committee: The staff report was presented by City Manager Ingram.

A motion was made by Council Member Mattina, seconded by Council Member Parlet, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to adopt the Resolution establishing the City Lands Advisory Committee as a permanent standing committee to advise on the use, lease, and disposition of City-owned lands.

E. Utilities Director:

1. Contract Award: Slipline
Project:

The staff report was presented by Utilities Director Harris.

A motion was made by Council Member Costa, seconded by Council Member Parlet, and unanimously carried by voice vote 4-0-1-0 to authorize the City Manager to execute a purchase order/contract agreement with Miksis Services for 200’ of slip line in the amount of $26,360.

VIII. CITY COUNCIL COMMUNICATIONS:

A. Travel, Calendar, and Miscellaneous
Reports, if any:

Community Development Director Hejnowicz had no report.

Police Chief Stoebe had no report.

Finance Director Dizon was absent.

Utilities Director Harris had no report.

Administrative Services Director Buendia had no report.

Public Works Director Ladd had no report.

Planning Services Manager Fernandez had no report.

Assistant City Attorney Anderson had no report.

City Manager Ingram will be reaching out to Mayor Disney regarding Committee appointments.

Council Member Costa thanked the Council for the opportunity to serve as Mayor over the past year. Unable to attend the staff appreciation party but wished staff a Happy Holidays. She attended the Wreaths Across America event which she found very moving and meaningful. She mentioned excitement about the Splash in coming in June.

Council Member Parlet thanked Council member Costa for her service as Mayor and wished everyone a happy holiday.

Council Member Price was absent.

Mayor Pro Tem Mattina reported that she has been appointed to the CalCities Housing, Community, and Economic Development committee and thanked outgoing Mayor Costa for her leadership in 2025.

City Council Agenda of December 16, 2025 Page 5
Mayor Disney also commended outgoing Mayor Costa for her work this year in increasing meeting participation at the City Council meetings. He also enjoyed the employee appreciation party on December 12, 2025 at the Silveira Community Center.

ADJOURNMENT: Mayor Disney adjourned the meeting at 7:11 p.m. _______________________________________
Brandon Disney, Mayor
Attest:
_________________________________
Kelly Buendia, City Clerk

!"

#$%&'
()*
+,'-.//
0 1'2-34
56789+,'-.//:1'2-34;&'2)*2&9<=>
?@)
ABAC0DA0AE
DDFAG
H@
"I.&-*
J-.)
5,7-.);2.*/&'K-926>

LMNOP
QRST

UVWXYTZ
[QRST\UVWXYTZ]^V_T`RaYbc`V\dRef
ghijP
URYkVcl
mT`TnoTW
pql
prps
trupv
wU
xNP
yV_T
zRaYbc
{|TW}~

T`RWkS
[no\{|TW}~T`RWkS]^V_T`RaYbc`V\dRef
g
hjP
u
w^}`VXRY
prprr
zRaYbc
R
yV_T

zRaYb

¡
¢£
¤¥

LMNOP
yV_T
zRaYbc
{|TW}~

T`RWkS
[¦§¨©ª«¬®¯°±¬²³´µ¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f
ghijP
ÀW}kVcl
mT`TnoTW
pl
prps
vus
wU
xNP
QRST

UVWXYTZ
[Á³µ¬©Â¸Ã»¬Ä¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f
g
hjP
ÀÅu
w^}`VXRY
prprr
zRaYbc
R
yV_T

zRaYb

ÆÇÈÉÉÊ
ËÊÌÈÉ
ÍÎÏÐÑÒ
ÓÔÕÑÖ×Ø
ÙÔÚÛÏÐÜÐÝÞ

ßßßàáâãäåæäçèééàêëì

íî
ïðïñòóòñôòðð
õòòð
ö÷ø

îïðïñòóòñôòðô
÷
ø

÷î
ïðïñòóñòóð

LMNOP
}^VWc
W}RY
[«§®³»¶²®¼½³¸¹¬³¼©²³¦f
ghijP
aTSkVcl
mT`TnoTW
pl
prps
up
U
xNP
wnVYkV
ÀWVZT^^
[
¬¸»©
®²«¬·¦¸»»¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f

QR|YY}T
y}YkSTc
[·¶¸¸¼¸»µ®¼©»¬¼f

y}SV
mVeTc
VbTS
[·´¸¿¬½§¸¼¬µ¶´§²¼¬¸¦©»¬¼f

yRW}
W}`T
[ ³®©!®²¬¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f

|TV_kTc
WT`}VkR
[!«¬¸¹´¬½©!¬²®¸´³¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f

RY
yVkk
[·¸´´¶²®¼½³¸¹¬³¼©²³¦f

yV_T
zRaYbc
{|TW}~

T`RWkS
[¦§¨©ª«¬®¯°±¬²³´µ¶·¸¹¬²³º»¼½²¸©¾³¿f

mV^T
{bRToT
[´µ¼³¬§¬¶·¸¹¬³¼³·®²¬©³¾f

"}`bRW
ÀTWYVYkTZ
[¿#¬»¸»´¬Ä¶²®¼½³¸¹¬³¼©²³¦f

Tb|VYc
URSS
[§¦³µµ¶²®¼½³¸¹¬³¼©²³¦f

$VXT
zVWTYbTW
%&'&('&)*
%&+,-
.//0
1 20¡
3
1 ¤0
4+''0¥¥'0'56'7'88898888882:;<=4=&5¡8 8 >&?=@9A8BCD%<)DD=<C.7>&?E@F88<AG¤EH88IDJ%'&

!"
#$
$
%
&

'$&(!)* +,- ). $
/

'$&0 1

#
$
%
&3
!456 *!7
8"$2
$
%
&9!:;!*).5<
&=
/
$
%
&9 +>;
1?>*&=& =
$
%
&-!
@55

$-!1A&8
$
%
&
BCDEFGHIJKLMK-NO3PO?? +!Q5
RSRTUSSV@5

)5W3!,(XM@5

)

Y55OZ*
55 [

(!A\
!:!+>!?? +!Q5
RSRTUSSVW5*)>(5
)
M 1@5

)W5*5
**] ^!
+511
)A_

`^5
,)5A
61 ))> AW5*@ )@5

+ !??*5]!!))>SabSTbRSRT@5

+ 1Q
<[A5?!A
>!]5
*+511
)A6!+,)516aRbVSbRSRc_

M>!
,5
W5*5
*
?
)[!
;!??;5 !Ad

efghijkifllmnopqp rstuvwxyvwxzs{|}~s{uts{y{ xyvw
|st{v
{|v{ssv
|st{vx

¡¢£¤¥¦§¨ ©

ª«¬®¯°±²²³´µ±¶·³¶°³¶·¸¸°¹¬³¶¸´º®¸¹¸¹³»®¸¼±½¾¿³µ±²¸¬¼À³´ÁÀÂ³°¸¸±¸¹³»¯®½±²¶®ÃÁÀ¯®°Ä³°±²·´ Å°¸Æ¶·´´Á°¹¬¼¸¹³²³½±²³À³´ÁÀÂ³°¸¸±µÁÀ¯®°·®´°¯±´Á²³Á¶¯³´´±¸¹³²º®´³³Ç³¬µ¸Á¶·³²¸¹³Å°¸È ÉÊËÌÍÎÏÐÑÒÓÔÒËÌÕÖ×ÒØÌÔÙÎÔÖØÖÚÛÐÔÜÖÔÝÑÖÑØËÎÌÞßàáßâãäåàáæçâæÞçèéçâêäâéëéìéëâí

îïïðñòóôñïóôôñõòñöóô
÷øøø÷ø

!
"###$%######&'()
)
ø #*+#*,ø-).%/#012÷(22)3(1",ø-4+.5##(/64
7##8

2 9 øø

!"

#$%&'(
)(*(
+,-(*(.'(/0/12(3045
678
9:9;<=9<9>
==?:@
A7
"B1'0C
D018
+E*018.21CF'(/032G5H
AG'8,'
I0'J(
+&('83K12E(G'88.'(28C2'34L5H
ME881(
N18,-(C
+OO./'0'0'8-138(5H
N1-'
&'L(C<D'(-
+,'L(C*'(-.,*2('G38(5H
N01
P012(
+01/.23'(32'3-5H
PE(',(C
P0(21',
+/E(',(C3/0(21',.'(28C2'34L5H
Q8
N',,
+0',,.21CF'(/032G5H
)E(01FFR-
&(/
+0(20,-.'(28C2'34L5H
S120
I(08'8,(J
+LF(08'8,(J.21CF'(/032G5H
D(E'8C
7--
+*G--.21CF'(/032G5H
T'1(
U'0/(8(0
+T'1(3U'0/(8(0.'(28C2'34L5H
T(C
D(8,1'
+*(8,1'.21CF'(/032G5H
'(/0F10(.'(/0F10(32G
+'(/0F10(.'(/0F10(32G5H
P'012
Q(1J
+/0(1J.'(/0F10(32G5H
M1G
T(88(,C
+O(88(,C.21CF'(/032G5H
N18,'
)*1(0'O
+-*1(0'O.21CF'(/032G5H
7'
B'0J4
+GE'0J4.21CF'(/032G5H
712E((
BG/E0(C
+GEG/E0(C.21CF'(/032G5H
QC'8
U(C
+02(C.'(/0/12(3045H
TC
Q'G-(C
+0'G-(C.21CF'(/032G5 VWX
YZ[\]X
^X_`abcXdb
W`e
dZ
\eefXe
g\bW
bW\e
XhXdbi

j\d]XaX[kl

mnopq
rq
srtoup
vwxyz{|}
~{y
yzw|}y}

¡
¢£
¡¤¡¡
¥£¦¡¤
£§
¨

¡¡
£

£¥©ª§
«£¬
£¥
£¦

£
¡£

¥£®

¦¡
¥¥¡®¡
¡
¡ ¤

¯¡£
°
±£¦
²§
¨

£

£¥
¥¡

£

£
¡¡
¥

§

³´µ¶·
¸¹º»¼½
¾¼¹¿ÀÁ
ÂÃÄ¼¹¿ÀÁÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎ ÏÐÑÒ·
ÓÔÊÕÖ»½×
ØÊÆÊÍÄÊ¼
ÙÚ×
ÙÛÙÜ
ÝÞÝÙ
ßà
áµ·
âÍ»ÁÖ»
ã¼»äÊºº
ÂØÊ»ÁÌå¹ÆÃÊºÍ»ÁÁÅº»ÉÊÆÀÔÁÇ½Æ»ÌæÀçÎè
éÀÃÁÁ¹Ê
ê¹ÁÖÕÊ½
ÂëëºÅË»¼»Ç¼»ÁÕ¹ÇÌÁÊÇÎè
ê¹Õ»
Ø»çÊ½ì
¾»ÇÊÕ
ÂºÖ»çÊ½Ä»ÇÊÕÅÖÄÆÇÊ»ÍÌÁÊÇÎè
êÀ¼¹
ß¼¹ÆÊ
ÂºÀ¼¹ËÅÆÀÌº»ÉÊÌÆ»ÌÔÕÎè
ßÃÊ»ÉÖÊ½
ß¼ÊÆ¹»ÖÀ
ÂËÃÊ»ÉÖÊ½ÌË¼ÊÆ¹»ÖÀÅº»ÉÊÆÀÔÁÇ½Æ»ÌæÀçÎè
íÀÁ
ê»ÖÖ
Â¼º»ÖÖÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
îÃÊ¼¹ïðÕ
ØÊËÇ
Â¼ÊÆÀ¼ÖÕÅº»ÉÊÆÀÔÁÇ½Æ»ÌæÀçÎè
Ø»ºÊ
îÇÀÊÄÊ
ÂÖÕÇÀÊÄÊÅº»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇËÀº¹ÆÊÌÀ¼æÎè
ñ¹ÆÇÀ¼
ãÊ¼Á»ÁÖÊä
ÂçòÊ¼Á»ÁÖÊäÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
¾ÊÇÃ»Á½
àÀÕÕ
ÂÄÍÀÕÕÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
ó»ôÊ
õ»¼ËÊÁÇÊ¼
Âó»ôÊÌõ»¼ËÊÁÇÊ¼Åº»ÉÊÆÀÔÁÇ½Æ»ÌæÀçÎè
óÊºº½
¾ÔÊÁÖ¹»
ÂÉÄÔÊÁÖ¹»ÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
º»ÉÊËÀ¼ö¹¼ÊÅº»ÉÊËÀ¼ö¹¼ÊÌÆÀÍè
ß»Ç¼¹ÆÉ
íÊ¹Çä
ÂË¼Ê¹ÇäÅº»ÉÊËÀ¼ö¹¼ÊÌÆÀÍÎè
é¹Í
óÊÁÁÊÖ½
ÂëÉÊÁÁÊÖ½ÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
ê¹ÁÖ»
îÀÄ¹Ê¼»ë
ÂºÕÀÄ¹Ê¼»ëÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
à»¿
¸»¼ÇäÀæ
ÂÍÃ»¼ÇäÀæÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
à¹ÆÃÊººÊ
¸ÔÍËÃ¼Ê½
ÂÍÃÔÍËÃ¼Ê½ÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎè
í½»Á
õÀÀºÊ½
Â¼ÆÀÀºÊ½Åº»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇËÀº¹ÆÊÌÀ¼æÎè
ó½
í»ÍÕÊ½
ÂÉ¼»ÍÕÊ½ÅÆ¹Ç½ÀÈ»ÉÊËÀ¼ÇÌÆÀÍÎ Ï÷øùÐÒ·
âËËº¹Æ»ôÀÁ
ÙÛÙìÛÛÚ
õÀÔÁÇ½
Àò
ê»ÉÊ
ßÓ
õÀÔÁÇ

l

Y

`\[

\[`ak
a\bbZd

fb[ZZ
Wbb_e Zfb[ZZiZ\]Xi]Zcc`\[\dZ\
^`_c]k

!"hf^hhc#^"Y

$
%^ &$V'd`b\hX()

! "#

$

%#

&
'

!

"

())

*

"!

'
&

'!())+$

&! !

,
!,

!-

./012342/556789:9 ;<=>?@AB?@AC<DEFG<HIDJKL>=<DMBKID AB?@INOPE<=ID?
QQRSPDEL?D<<?
OPE<=ID?TAUVRWRX
YZ[Z\Q]X^R]_R`_[Q
abcdeefghidejfklmnopfceqifr

stuvwxyz{{|}~z|y|vvvyu|}w|w
zv|~z{uv
|}|yz|vxwz{wvxwy|yz{}
yvv}}yuv
|{|z{||}|yz~xwyw}yxz}{|x|}}z|{w}|||u~|{|y ¡¢¡£¤¥¦¡§¨©ª¨«¬®©ª¯°«¯§°±²°«³«²´²µ²´«¶

·¸¸¹º»¼½º¸¼½½º¾»º¿¼½
ÀÁÂÁÃÂÁÄÅÀÁÆÇÄÈÉ ÉÊËÌÍÎËÌÊÏÐÑÏËÒÒÓÔÍÕÖÒÌÓÓ×
ØÒÒÙÚÆÂÂÓÖÒÌÓÓ×ÛÓÜÜËÝÞÛÝÓßÂßÊËÌÂËÔàÓáÂËâÂãã×ãäåããããããÎæçèéÊÙßéÝÁàÐãêëãêìÁíéîåïãðñòÀÖèÄòòéßóèñÈâìÁíôëîõããèïöÕô÷åããøÔÊÒËòÞ ÁÂÁ Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 1 Agenda Item # VI.A.1.

CITY OF LAKEPORT
City Council
City of Lakeport Municipal Sewer District
Lakeport Redevelopment Successor Agency
Lakeport Industrial Development Authority
Municipal Financing Agency of Lakeport

STAFF REPORT
RE: Mayoral Appointment of Liaisons to Commissions, Boards, and Committees
MEETING DATE: 01/06/2026
SUBMITTED BY: Kelly Buendia, City Clerk
PURPOSE OF REPORT: Information only Discussion Action Item WHAT IS BEING ASKED OF THE CITY COUNCIL/BOARD:

The Mayor is being asked to appoint members as liaisons to commissions, boards, and committees. In addition, the Council is being asked to adopt a resolution appointing representatives to represent and vote on behalf of the City at the League of California Cities, Redwood Empire Division Business meetings and represent the City and vote at Division Legislative Committee meetings.

BACKGROUND/DISCUSSION:

Annual appointments are made to several commissions, committees, and boards. Some of these appointments are advisory only and some of them require active participation. The Mayor has authority to appoint members to these commissions, committees, and boards.

These annual appointments run from January through December of the coming calendar year. The following is brief information on each of the commissions/ boards/committees:
 Lakeport Fire Protection District: The board meets the second Tuesday of each month at 5:30 p.m. at the Fire Department. One Council member and an alternate are appointed (not voting or acting members) to attend meetings and report to the City Council.
 Lake County Chamber of Commerce: The board meets the fourth Tuesday of each month at 8:00 a.m. at Umpqua Bank. There are also monthly dinner meetings. One Council member and an alternate are appointed (not voting or acting members) to attend meetings and report to the City Council.  Lakeport Main Street Association: The Board of Directors meets on the 3rd Monday of every month at the Lakeport City Hall at 5:00 pm. One Council Member is appointed (not voting or acting member) to attend meetings and report to the City Council.
 League of California Cities, Redwood Empire Division, Division Business Meeting Voting Delegate: This board meets quarterly. One Council member and one alternate are appointed to attend the League's Division meetings.
 League of California Cities, Redwood Empire Division, Legislative Committee Voting Delegate: One Council member and one alternate is appointed to attend the League's Legislative Committee meetings.  Lake County/City Area Planning Council (APC): This committee handles transportation issues and meets the second Wednesday of each month. The location alternates between the City of Lakeport Council Chambers and the Lake Transit offices in Lower Lake. Two Council members and an alternate are appointed and are active, voting members of the APC.

Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 2 Agenda Item # VI.A.1.
 County of Lake Solid Waste Management Task Force: This is a County committee on which the City has a liaison. Typically, the City appoints one Council member and the City Manager to attend any meetings of the Task Force.
 SB 621 Indian Gaming Funds Committee: This committee meets on as "as needed basis" as funding becomes available. The City appoints one active voting member and one alternate.  Local Agency Formation Commission (LAFCO): This board meets monthly and alternates meetings between Lakeport and Clearlake. The City appoints a Council member who acts as a voting member of LAFCO. An alternate is also appointed. An alternate commissioner is rotated between the City of Clear Lake and the City of Lakeport every two years. It will be the City’s turn to appoint an alternate for the years 2022 and 2023.
 Invasive Species Task Force Committee: This committee meets on monthly on a Monday TBA from 10:00 a.m. to 12:00 at the Agriculture Office. The City appoints one member as an active, voting member.  Clean Water Program Committee (formerly TMDL): This board meets on a monthly basis, and the City appoints one member as an active, voting member.
 Lakeport Unified School District Committee: This committee meets quarterly, TBA. The City appoints two Council members to sit on the committee and report to Council.  Lake County Abandoned Vehicle Abatement Service Authority: Meetings are called by the County on an “asneeded” basis. The Council appoints one member who acts a voting member and an alternate is also appointed.
 Lake County Airport Land Use Commission: This committee is not currently active, however, the Mayor may wish to appoint a Council Member to the Commission should a project arise needing city participation in the Commission.
 Lake County Risk Reduction Authority: The meetings of the Board of Directors shall be held on the third Monday of each month at 3:00 p.m. The City appoints one member and one alternate.  Lake County Recreation Agency: The meetings of the Board of Directors are currently held on the last Thursday of each month. The City appoints two members of the City Council and one alternate.  Lake County Regional Housing Trust Fund: The Trust Fund was established by MOU between the County, the City of Clearlake and the City of Lakeport. The Board of Trustees of the Fund will include representation from the City of Lakeport.
 City Lands Advisory Committee (Replaces the City Property and Land Ad-Hoc Committee): A permanent standing committee pursuant to Government Code section 54952(b) to advise on a broad range of matters concerning City-owned lands, associated agreements, and strategic land use considerations. The body will remain advisory only, with all final decisions reserved for the full City Council.

OPTIONS:

The Mayor can make appointments to the various commissions, boards, and committees as listed or give further direction.

The Council can adopt a resolution appointing voting delegates to the League's Division Business and Legislative Committee meetings or decline to appoint a voting delegate to either/both meetings.

FISCAL IMPACT:

None $ Budgeted Item? Yes No
Budget Adjustment Needed? Yes No If yes, amount of appropriation increase: $ Affected fund(s): General Fund Water OM Fund Sewer OM Fund Other:

Comments:

Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 3 Agenda Item # VI.A.1.

COUNCIL PRIORITIES:
☐ Priority #1: Public Safety & Crisis Response
☐ Priority #2: Disaster Resiliency
☒ Priority #3: Good Governance & Fiscal Stability
☐ Priority #4: Capital Infrastructure Improvement
☐ Priority #5: Safe, Sustainable & Attractive Neighborhoods ☐ Priority #6: Economic Development
SUGGESTED MOTIONS:

No motion is necessary for the Mayoral appointments.

Move that the City Council adopt a resolution appointing representatives to represent and vote on behalf of the City at the League of California Cities, Redwood Empire Division Business meetings and represent the City and vote at Division Legislative Committee meetings.

Attachments: 1. List of current liaisons to commissions, boards, and committees.

2. Proposed resolution for League of California Cities, Redwood Division appointments

LAKEPORT CITY COUNCIL
EFFECTIVE JANUARY 6, 2026

LIAISONS TO COMMISSIONS, BOARDS, COMMITTEES

LIAISONS
2025 2026
Lakeport Fire Protection District Council Member Price
Council Member Parlet (Alt.)
Lake County Chamber of Commerce Mayor Costa
Council Member Parlet, Alt.

Lakeport Main Street Association Council Member Price

APPOINTMENTS
2025 2026
League of California Cities
Redwood Empire Division
Division Business Meeting Voting Delegate
Mayor Costa
Mayor Pro Tem Disney (Alt.)
League of California Cities
Redwood Empire Division
Legislative Committee Voting Delegate
Mayor Costa
Mayor Pro Tem Disney (Alt.)
Lake County/City Area Planning Council Council Member Mattina Council Member Parlet
Mayor Costa (Alt.)
Right of Way Ordinance Advisory Ad-Hoc
Committee
Council Member Price
Council Member Parlet
PEG Board Council Member Price
Vector Control District Board George Spurr
Mayor Pro Tem Disney (Alt.)
County of Lake Solid Waste Management
Task Force
Council Member Price
Council Member Parlet
SB 621 Indian Gaming Funds Committee Mayor Costa
Mayor Pro Tem Disney
Local Agency Formation Commission &
LAFCO Alternate^
^Rotates to City of Lakeport in 2026 &
2027
Council Member Mattina
Council Member Parlet (Alt.)
Invasive Species Task Force Committee Mayor Pro Tem Disney Clean Water Program Committee Mayor Pro Tem Disney
Council Member Parlet (Alt.)
Lakeport Unified School District
Committee
Council Mattina
Council Member Price
Abandoned Vehicle Service Authority Council Member Price Council Member Parlet (Alt.)
Risk Reduction Authority Mayor Costa
City Manager Ingram (Alt.)
Lakeport Solid Waste Committee Council Member Parlet
Council Member Mattina
Lake County Airport Land Use Commission Council Member Mattina Mayor Costa (Alt.)
Lakeport Investment Committee Council Member Mattina
Council Member Parlet
Lake County Recreational Agency, JPA
(LCRA)
Mayor Pro Tem Disney
Mayor Costa
Tribal Consultation Committee Mayor Costa
Mayor Pro Tem Disney
City Property and Land Ad Hoc Committee
(Established by Resolution 2964 (2024)
Council Member Mattina
Mayor Pro Tem Disney
Replaced by City Lands Advisory
Committee
Lake County Regional Housing Trust Fund
(Established by Resolution 2976 (2024)
Mayor Costa
Council Member Parlet
City Lands Advisory Committee
(Established by Resolution No. 3018 (2025)
RESOLUTION NO. ______ (2026)

A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF

LAKEPORT APPOINTING REPRESENTATIVES TO REPRESENT AND VOTE

ON BEHALF OF THE CITY AT THE LEAGUE OF CALIFORNIA CITIES,

REDWOOD EMPIRE DIVISION BUSINESS MEETINGS AND REPRESENT

THE CITY AND VOTE AT DIVISION LEGISLATIVE COMMITTEE
MEETINGS.

WHEREAS, the City is a member of the League of California Cities, an association of California city officials who work together to enhance their knowledge and skills, exchange information, and combine resources so that they may influence policy decisions that affect cities, and
WHEREAS, mayors, council members and other officials set League policies and priorities from member cities who serve on the League Board of Directors, League policy committees, regional division boards, departments, caucuses, and task forces where League policies and priorities are formulated and set, and WHEREAS, the City is an active member of the Redwood Empire Division, League of California Cities, and
WHEREAS, the Redwood Empire Division By-laws, Article III, Section 3, states representatives of each member city shall cast one vote by city, and WHEREAS, the Redwood Empire Division By-laws, Article VIII, creates a Redwood Empire Division Legislative Committee to review and respond to bills that impact Redwood Empire Cities, and
WHEREAS, the City must appoint one elected official to attend and represent the city at Division Business meetings who can vote on behalf of the city, and WHEREAS, the City must appoint one elected official to attend and represent the city at Legislative Committee meetings who can vote on behalf of the city, and WHEREAS, an alternate elected official should be appointed to represent the city in the event the regular member is not available to attend, and WHEREAS, appointments should be reviewed and updated annually.

NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED that the 2026 appointments for the Redwood Empire Division are as follows:

Division Business Meeting Primary: ___________________________ Division Business Meeting Alternate: __________________________ Legislative Committee Primary: ______________________________ Legislative Committee Alternate: _____________________________ It is hereby certified that the foregoing Resolution No. ____ was duly introduced and adopted by the City Council of the City of Lakeport at its regular meeting held on the 6th day of January 2026 by the following vote:

AYES:

NOES:

ABSENT:

ABSTAIN:

Approved:
____________________________
Brandon Disney, Mayor
Attested:
______________________________
Kelly Buendia, City Clerk
Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 1 Agenda Item #VI.B.1.

CITY OF LAKEPORT
City Council ☒
City of Lakeport Municipal Sewer District ☐
Lakeport Industrial Development Authority ☐
Municipal Financing Agency of Lakeport ☐

STAFF REPORT
RE: WWTP Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project Award MEETING DATE: 01/06/2026 SUBMITTED BY: Paul Harris, Utilities Director
PURPOSE OF REPORT: ☐Information only ☐ Discussion ☒Action Item WHAT IS BEING ASKED OF THE CITY COUNCIL/BOARD:

The City Council is being asked to approve the plans, specifications, and working details for the Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project; award a public works construction contract to the lowest responsible bidder, Piazza Construction; and authorize the City Manager to execute a construction agreement with Piazza Construction in an amount not to exceed $970.200.00. This amount includes the base bid of $882,000.00 plus a 10% contingency to account for any unforeseen conditions or necessary change orders that may arise during construction.

BACKGROUND:

The work consists of installing a new liquid sodium hypochlorite system at the City of Lakeport's wastewater treatment facility at 795 Linda Lane in Lakeport. Work includes installation of storage tanks, containment basin, feed and delivery mechanisms between the tanks and treatment facility, safety features, and associated electrical and instrumentation controls.

The bids were publicly opened on Wednesday, December 10, 2025, after a five-week bid period. There were six bids received. Upon reviewing the bid documents, Piazza Construction is the lowest responsive bidder. The engineer’s estimate for this project was $600,043.00. Appropriations of $900,000 were approved for this project in this current fiscal year. Construction is estimated to start at the beginning of March and be completed by August 2026.

DISCUSSION:

The purpose of the project is to transition from the use of sodium hypochlorite gas to sodium hypochlorite liquid at the City of Lakeport’s Municipal Sewer District’s Wastewater Treatment Plant. The purpose of transitioning from sodium hypochlorite gas to liquid sodium hypochlorite is to enhance operational safety, improve regulatory compliance, and increase system reliability within Lakeport’s sewer district. Liquid sodium hypochlorite significantly reduces the risk associated with the storage and handling of pressurized disinfection chemicals, thereby minimizing potential exposure to staff and the surrounding environment. This transition also supports compliance with evolving occupational safety and environmental regulations, reduces emergency response planning requirements, and simplifies day-to-day operations. Additionally, liquid sodium hypochlorite provides consistent disinfection performance while allowing for more precise dosing control, improved system redundancy, and reduced maintenance complexity. Overall, the conversion strengthens the District’s commitment to public health protection, employee safety, and sustainable wastewater treatment operations.

Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 2 Agenda Item #VI.B.1.

In recommending a contract award, staff must evaluate if the bidder is responsible as defined in Public Contract Code § 1103 as, “a bidder who has demonstrated the attribute of trustworthiness, as well as quality, fitness, capacity, and experience to satisfactorily perform the public works contract.”, Piazza Construction’s Experience Statement shows prior experience on projects that are similar in scope and value of the Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project.

The City Council has the discretionary authority to approve the Project’s plans and designs in advance of construction. The Project’s plan and designs were prepared by MC Engineering and submitted July of 2025. The Project’s plan and designs were reviewed by the City’s Engineering Division and approved by Kevin Ingram, City Manager, Paul Curren, City Engineer, and Paul Harris, Utilities Director. City staff recommends the City Council approve the Project’s plans and designs, as staff consider them to be reasonable based on the detail of the plans prepared by MC Engineering and the approval granted by Kevin Ingram, Paul Curren, and Paul Harris.

ENVIRONMENTAL COMPLIANCE:

Staff filed a Notice of Exemption under the requirements of the California Environmental Quality Act (CEQA) on June 26, 2025. This project meets the criteria established in Section 15301 and 15302 of the CEQA Guidelines as it consists of minor alterations to existing publicly owned utility facilities and replacement of an existing system, maintaining the same purpose and capacity. The project was determined to be eligible for a Categorical Exemption.

OPTIONS:

1. Award a construction contract to Piazza Construction, Inc. for the Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project and authorize the City Manager to execute the construction contract for the bid amount.

2. Reject all bids and direct Staff to readvertise the project.

3. Take no action or provide alternative direction to staff.

FISCAL IMPACT:
☐ None ☒ Not to exceed $970,200.00 Budgeted Item? ☒Yes ☐ No Budget Adjustment Needed? ☒Yes ☐ No If yes, amount of appropriation increase: $70,200 Affected fund(s): ☐ General Fund ☐ Water OM Fund ☒ Sewer OM Fund ☐ Other:

Comments:

COUNCIL PRIORITIES:
☒ Priority #1: Public Safety & Crisis Response
☐ Priority #2: Disaster Resiliency
☒ Priority #3: Good Governance & Fiscal Stability
☒ Priority #4: Capital Infrastructure Improvement
☐ Priority #5: Safe, Sustainable & Attractive Neighborhoods ☐ Priority #6: Economic Development
SUGGESTED MOTIONS:

Meeting Date: 01/06/2026 Page 3 Agenda Item #VI.B.1.

Move to approve the plans, specifications and working details and award a construction contract to Piazza Construction for the Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Project and authorize the City Manager to execute the construction contract for the not-to-exceed amount of $970,200.00. ☒ Attachments: 1. Bid Tabulation

2. Project Plans

3. Project Specifications

4. Articles of Agreement-Piazza Construction
Line Item Description Quantity Unit Unit Cost Total Unit Cost Total Unit Cost Total Unit Cost Total Unit Cost Total Unit Cost Total 1 Bonds and Insurance 1 LS $9,500.00 $9,500.00 $25,000.00 $25,000.00 $18,950.00 $18,950.00 $25,000.00 $25,000.00 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 $25,000.00 $25,000.00 2 Mobilization/Demobilization 1 LS $14,500.00 $14,500.00 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 $50,250.00 $50,250.00 $85,000.00 $85,000.00 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 $75,000.00 $75,000.00 3 Water Pollution Control Program 1 LS $2,500.00 $2,500.00 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 $12,500.00 $12,500.00 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 $5,000.00 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 4 Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing 1 LS $500.00 $500.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $7,000.00 $7,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 5 Sodium Hypochlorite Disinfection 1 LS $855,000.00 $855,000.00 $992,369.00 $992,369.00 $1,056,800.00 $1,056,800.00 $1,043,885.00 $1,043,885.00 $1,122,000.00 $1,122,000.00 $1,121,600.00 $1,121,600.00 Total $882,000.00 $1,078,369.00 $1,139,500.00 $1,159,885.00 $1,194,000.00 $1,225,100.00 Valentine Corporation Wahlund Construction, Inc.

Sodium Hypochlorite Upgrade Bid No. 25-04
Piazza Construction TNT Industrial Covenant Technical Solutions Pacific Infrastructure Corp.

Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01015 Sequence of Construction
01150 Measurement and Payment
01340 Shop Drawings and Submittals
01370 Schedule of Values
01400 Quality Control
01503 Storm Water Pollution Control
01600 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
01650 Disinfection System Startup
01710 Cleaning
01720 Project Closeout
01740 Guarantees and Warranties
01950 Safety
DIVISION 2- SITE WORK
02072 Demolition and Removal
02200 Earthwork
02201 Trenching, Pipe Embedment, and Backfill
02270 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control
02513 Asphaltic Concrete Vehicular Paving and Repair
DIVISION 3- CONCRETE
03100 Concrete
DIVISION 5- METALS
05501 Anchor Bolts
05521 Aluminum Handrails
05600 Fiberglass Fabrications
Table of Contents
05821 Chain Link Fencing
05999 Misc. Metals
DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07900 Sealants and Caulking
DIVISION 9- FINISHES
09900 Painting
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
10400 Identifying Devices
DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT
11010 Bulk Chemical Storage Tanks
11020 Skid-Mounted Sodium Hypochlorite Disinfection System and Enclosure 11030 Safety Equipment
11303 Sump Pumps
11304 Outdoor Lighting
DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13300 General Instrumentation
13320 System Testing, Commissioning, and Quality Control 13330 Field Instrumentation
13340 Control Panels
13342 Pump Control Panel
13350 Programmable Control Systems
13370 Applications Programming
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
15060 Pipe and Piping Systems
Table of Contents
15070 Thermoplastic Process Pipe
15090 Pipe Supports
15100 Valves
15350 Piping Connectors
15500 Piping Schedules
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL
16010 General Electrical
01015
SECTION 01015

SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A.The construction of this project will occur while the Wastewater Treatment System is operating to meet specific, critical permit requirements. The operations necessary to meet these requirements are of higher priority than construction activities. Schedules of connections, renovations and modifications shall be submitted to the Owner for approval, and all such items shall be coordinated throughout the entire construction period.

B. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a project schedule, as called for in Section 01015, prior to the pre-construction meeting and notice to proceed. The Contractor shall also submit a schedule of submittals prior to the pre-construction meeting. The project schedule, schedule of values, bypass plan, and safety plan must be approved by the Owner before the initial estimate for partial payment is submitted.

C. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at and again 3 calendar days prior to beginning work on a particular area, and coordinate with the Owner the specific items to be isolated and duration for each. The contractor shall also obtain written approval from the Owner prior to each shutdown. High flow conditions or equipment outages may require the rescheduling of an approved shutdown. Any cost associated with rescheduling will be considered as incidental to the Contractor's cost of the project.

D.The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing at least 3 calendar days prior to any testing of a unit or facility, and coordinate with the Owner the specifics of the testing. The contractor shall also obtain written approval from the Owner prior to the test.

E. The Contractor shall not operate any valves or equipment in the existing facilities without supervision of Owner.

F. Prior to beginning work on shutdowns and process connections, the Contractor shall have on-site all materials, equipment, and personnel necessary to complete the work in the time scheduled. The Contractor shall also perform all possible tasks to the most complete state possible. For example, all exposed bolts and nuts on valves, flanges, or fittings which are to be disassembled shall be removed and replaced one at a time prior to shut down and connections; thus, allowing for as timely completion as possible.

G.Access by Owner to all existing Owner facilities must be maintained at all times.

H.Plugged pipelines, in which water has been standing, shall be cleaned of debris prior to conducting Work by Contractor in the project area/locations.

I. The Contractor shall be required to maintain the access roads utilized during construction in a reasonably clean condition. As needed street cleaning and scraping will be required as directed by the Owner.
01015
J. Access roads shall not be utilized for storage of materials except where written permission is provided by the Owner.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A.The Contractor shall include the Sequence of Construction in the overall project schedule

1.3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES DURING SHUTDOWNS AND DIVERSIONS A.The Contractor's responsibilities during any and all shutdowns or diversions are outlined below. A diversion is defined as any operation which makes necessary diversion of flow around any structure or process which is normally in service. A shutdown is defined as taking any process or piece of equipment out of service whether or not flows are diverted around any process.

B. Supply of Equipment:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all equipment, labor, and materials for accomplishing the diversion or shutdown on schedule. Contractor shall have on hand additional equipment replacement parts, couplings, and hose in case of breakdown or emergency.

C. Timely Completion:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the manning and scheduling of all shutdowns and diversions to accomplish them in the time set forth. The responsibility includes coordination with all applicable utility companies, Owner’s staff, and other Contractors working onsite. If any overtime or ·shift work is required to accomplish the shutdown or diversion within the required time limits, the cost of such overtime of shift work shall be at the Contractor's sole expense.

D.Coordination with Owner

1. All unit shutdowns must be coordinated with and approved by the Owner.

2. Connections at potable Water Tanks, treated effluent pumping stations, and existing disinfection system components shall be coordinated with the Owner and shall be done during off peak or low flow periods.

3. If pumps are used for diversions, the pumps must be sized for the range of flows the system is experiencing at the time.
1) Owner may also require cellular auto dialer or other alarms in the Emergency notification plan.

PART 2 - CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE FOR SPECIFIC ITEMS

2.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall submit a Work Plan for specific work items. The Work Plan shall list the sequence of operations, demolition, bypasses, dewatering, and improvements for each phase of the Work. The Work Plan shall be incorporated into the Contractor’s schedule. The 01015
Work Plan shall be submitted for the Owner’s approval prior to starting any work at the work areas described in the Work Plan.

B. The Work Plan shall incorporate:

1. Safety Plan, per Section 01950

2. Confined Space Entry Plan, per Section 01950

3. Noise and Dust Control Plan
C. The Contractor shall coordinate and schedule each task necessary to complete all work within the time allowed for the Project. Coordination and time limitations for individual facilities are described in the following paragraphs. If and when necessary, limitations shall be discussed and approved by Owner. These phases are general in nature and not intended to prescribe the Contractor's Work Plan. Work items from various phases may be done simultaneously or separately.

D. Each phase may require the Contractor to perform work such as installing temporary or permanent plugs and/or diversion facilities in structures that are in service. The specifics related to flow diversion and temporary plugging means and methods are the responsibility of the Contractor; however, the Contractor's plans and schedules shall be submitted to the Owner for review and approval.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING
A. Contractor shall install erosion control measures per the drawings and requirements of these specifications and according to the SWPPP prior to beginning work in areas within the scope of the SWPPP.

B. Construction sequencing and substantial completion will be based upon the following parameters and requirements and other more specifically discussed in specifications:

1. Paving and other finish work to be scheduled independently of other work, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2. Avoiding disruption of existing operational pipelines and facilities, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer and Owner/Operator.

C. SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE DISINFECTION SYSTEM

1. Pothole to verify the location of existing utilities.

2. Sawcut and demo existing pavement as indicated on the plans.

3. Prepare site for secondary containment structure.

4. Construction and installation of new sodium hypochlorite, potable water, and other site work and piping.

5. Construction of new secondary containment concrete structure.

6. Installation of new tanks, handrails, and other equipment as shown on project drawings.

7. Cleaning of new tank and yard piping, pressure test and drain. 01015

8. Make connection to dosing location.

9. Provide start-up and commissioning services for new tank fill and peristaltic pump dosing system.

2.3 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor may use Owner’s Potable Water for construction purposes. (offsite hydrant to be utilized with trucking and temporary pumping as needed by contractor due to limited water on site)

1. Upon pre-approval by Owner.

2. Contractor will need to coordinate with the Owner on the amount of water available.

Contractor is responsible for all associated costs.

B. The Owner will provide water to Contractor at no charge during construction. Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect the Owner's lines from contamination or damage.

C. If the Contractor desires to utilize Owner water at fire hydrants, then he shall install at his expense, a slow closing valve on the outlet and a meter. When the Contractor is using water from the hydrant, he shall open the hydrant valve in the morning and use the valve which has been installed for control at all other times. At night, upon cessation of construction operations, the hydrant valve shall be closed. At all other times when the Contractor's valve remains on the outlet, the Contractor shall keep necessary wrenches available at the hydrant so that the valve can be quickly removed by the Owner in case of fire. The Owner will not allow use of existing fire hydrants unless the Contractor adheres to the above-described requirements. At any time, Owner’s use of hydrant water shall not be hindered by the Contractor.

2.4 EQUIPMENT STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING
A. Equipment Startup and Commissioning:

1. All equipment installations shall be inspected and tested by the Manufacturer’s Representatives in accordance with the equipment specifications prior to placement into operation. Performance testing of the equipment shall be completed by the equipment Manufacturer’s Representatives after placement into operation in accordance with the equipment specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION
01150
SECTION 01150

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1- NOT USED
PART 2 - APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

2.1 SUMMARY
A. General work included in this Section:

1. Measurement and Payment.

2.2 GENERAL
A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer in accordance with the schedule established by conditions of the Contract and Agreement between Owner and Contractor.

B. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer are responsible for the identifying or correction of any tabulation errors within the Contractor’s Payment Application Form or continuation sheets.

C. Additional requirements specified elsewhere.

1. Total Bid Price: Per Agreement.

2. Progress payments, retainages, and final payment: Conditions of the Contract and Agreement.

3. Schedule of Values: Section 01370.

2.3 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED
A. Submit applications per form including Application for Payment with itemized data typed on 8-1/2 IN x 11 IN white paper continuation sheet.

B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet.

1. Format, schedules, line items, and values: Those listed in the Schedule of Values.

2.4 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT A. Application form:

1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to the date of submittal application.

2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with the respective totals indicated on the continuation sheets.

3. Execute certification with the signature of a responsible officer of the Contractor's firm.

B. Continuation Sheets:

1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work with item number and the scheduled dollar value for each item.

2. Fill in the dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.
01150
a. Round off values to nearest dollar.

3. List each Change Order executed prior to the date of submission at the end of the continuation sheets.
a. List by Change Order number and description, as for an original component item of work.

2.5 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A. When Owner or Engineer requires substantiating data, Contractor shall submit suitable information, with a cover letter identifying:

1. Project.

2. Application number and date.

3. Detailed list of attachments

4. For stored products:
a. List of Items, Item numbers, and reference to identification as shown on application.
b. Description of specific materials.

B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.

C. Payment for material on hand requires that the material be present at the treatment plant and verification that the material is correct for it’s intended use.

2.6 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT
A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.

2.7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE
A. Submit Applications for Payment to Engineer as described in General Conditions.

B. Number: One original plus four copies of each application.

C. When Engineer finds the application properly completed and correct, he will transmit a Certificate for Payment to Owner, with a copy to Contractor.

PART 3 - PAYMENT FOR BID ITEMS

3.1 SUMMARY
A. The Bid Amounts for each Bid Item will be used for comparative bid analysis.

B. The Bid amounts will also form the basis of monthly progress payments. Each Lump Sum bid amount will undergo further breakdown as described in Section 01370, Schedule of Values.

C. Quantity of work to be paid for under any item for which a unit price is fixed in Contract Documents shall be a number, as determined by Owner, of units of work satisfactorily completed in accordance with Contract Documents or as directed by Owner. Unless otherwise provided, determination of number of units of work so completed will be based, so far as practicable, on actual measurement or count within prescribed or ordered limits, and no payment will be made for work done outside of limits.
01150
D. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by the Engineer multiplied by the unit price for the Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work.

E. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period.

F. Bid items are not intended to be exclusive descriptions of work categories and the Contractor shall determine and include in its pricing all overhead (except that otherwise included in other specific bid items), and profit, taxes, subcontracts, transport, handling, storage, supervision, administration, materials, labor, rentals, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete each Bid Item (work phase) as shown and specified.

G. All elements of the Work shall be encompassed within the sum of all bid items for a complete and working Project as shown on the Drawings and Specifications. No additional payment will be made for work shown on the Drawings and Specifications not specifically identified within a bid item description.

H. Compensation for cleaning and trash removal associated with individual bid items shall be included within the price for that bid item.

I. Compensation for excess excavation hauling to disposal site associated with individual bid items shall be included within the price for that bid item.

J. Rock excavation, if any, is to be included with each bid item that contains excavation. No additional payment will be made for rock excavation.

3.2 NON-PAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS
A. Payment will not be made for any of the following:

1. Products wasted.

2. Products disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable.

3. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement.

4. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle.

5. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work.

6. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work.

7. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products, notwithstanding that payment shall be made for excess excavation within individual bid items, where the material is not usable as native fill, properly disposed, and made within the lines and levels of the Work.

3.3 BID DESCRIPTION
A. Bid Item 1- Bonds and Insurance

1. Measurement and Payment by Lump Sum.

2. The lump sum bid price includes all Project bonding and insurance associated with the Project. Bonds and insurance will be paid in the first payment request with back-up data provided by the Contractor.
01150
B. Bid Item 2- Mobilization/ Demobilization

1. If the contractor bids more than 5% of the total bid price for mobilization/demobilization the amount over 5% shall be paid on a pro-rated basis by precent of completion for each progress payment. Mobilization shall include: moving onto the site of all equipment; submittal and approval of initial project schedule and safety plan; obtaining and paying for all permits by other agencies as applicable; furnishing temporary construction utilities (temporary power, toilets, water, fences, etc.); installing construction signs; temporary buildings and field office trailer(s); and other construction all as required for the proper performance and completion of the work.

2. Mobilization shall also include work required for any environmental mitigation measures

3. The lump sum bid for demobilization shall not be less than two and one-half percent (2.5%) of the total bid price. Demobilization shall include site cleaning and restoration of surfaces within the job site, post-construction meeting, removal of all temporary facilities and equipment from the work area, disconnection of the temporary construction utilities, record drawings, and turnover of Project to the Owner.

4. Contractor may apply for payment of mobilization on a percent complete basis as the items covered in the Mobilization are being completed.

5. Contractor may apply for payment of demobilization after the overall Project Substantial Completion is achieved and the Project begins to demobilize.

6. The lump sum price shall be full compensation for the preparation and installation or submittal of these materials, and for all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals to complete this item.

C. Bid Item 3- Water Pollution Control Program

1. The WPCP shall be prepared by third party professionals qualified and experienced in the preparations of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans applicable to the work described in the Contract Documents. The same third-party professionals shall conduct the required monitoring and reporting to permitting agencies.

D. Bid Item 4- Sheeting, Shoring, and Bracing

1. Measurement and Payment by Lump Sum Paid on a Percent of Work Complete.

2. “Adequate Sheeting, Shoring….” shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools and equipment and for doing all the work required for providing necessary shoring and bracing per State of California Labor Code 6705 – Protection of Workers in Excavations.

3. As required by Section 6705 of the California Labor Code and in addition thereto, whenever work under the Contract involves the excavation of any trench or trenches 5 feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit for acceptance by the Owner or by a registered civil or structural engineer, employed by the Owner, to whom authority to accept has been delegated, in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for work protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation, of such trench or trenches. 01150

4. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the Contractor, and all costs therefore shall be included in the price named in the Contract for completion of the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents.

5. Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping, or other protective system less effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders.

6. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to impose tort liability on the Owner, or any of their officers, agents, representatives, or employees.

E. Bid Item 5- Sodium Hypochlorite Disinfection System

1. Measurement and Payment by Lump Sum Complete

2. The Contractor shall include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary for a complete and operating disinfection system and containment pit. This Bid Item includes tree and fence removal as required and shown on Sheet C101.

3. The payment for the Sodium Hypochlorite Disinfection System shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, material, tools, and equipment required to provide and install the water tank, pump station building, pumps, and accessories. This item shall include all structures, tanks, pumps, piping, fittings, flexible expansion joints, valve vaults, valves, electrical service, electrical components, instrumentation, telemetry, building materials, concrete, site drainage concrete swales and drain inlets, grading, site improvements, fencing and gates, potholing, excavation, backfill, testing and disinfection, and any other appurtenances, labor, equipment, to complete the Sodium Hypochlorite Disinfection System installation as required by the plans, standard drawings, and specifications, complete and ready for use.

4. This bid item includes pump and instrumentation Manufacturer’s field, startup and training services.

5. This bid item includes permanent AC pavement as shown on the drawings.

6. This Bid Item includes all Tank Foundation Excavation to specified grades and as approved by Geotechnical Engineer at the site during construction

3.21 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES
A. Measurement Devices

1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state Weights and Measures department within the past year.

2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle

3. Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable State department within the past year.

4. Linear Dimensions: By Electronic Distance Measuring Wheel and tapes as appropriate.
01150
B. Measurement by Weight: Measured by certified scale weight. A ton shall consist of 2,000 pounds avoirdupois.

1. Contractor shall furnish a certified weigh-master certificate and/or weight tags at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. When required by Engineer, the operator of each vehicle weighed shall obtain a weight or load slip from the weigher and deliver said slip to the Engineer at the point of delivery of the material.

3. Vehicles used to haul material being paid for by weight shall be weighed empty daily and at such additional times as the Engineer may direct. Each vehicle shall bear a plainly legible identification mark. Vehicles may from time to time be required by the Engineer to have the weight of the material to be paid for verified by weighing the empty and loaded vehicle on such other scales as the Engineer may designate.

C. Measurement by Volume: Measured using average end area method.

D. Measurement by Load Receipt Method: Measured using the number of delivered loads multiplied by the average truck capacity in cubic yards E. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius.

F. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord.

END OF SECTION
01340
SECTION 01340

SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: This Section addresses submittal requirements for shop drawings, samples, and operation and maintenance materials.

1.2 SUBMITTALS: GENERAL
A. All preliminary submittals shall be in electronic format.

B. Electronic copies of approved submittals are acceptable. A separate submittal number shall be provided for tracking each submittal.

C. Transmit all submittals to Engineer.

D. All submittals shall contain a cover sheet or cover letter clearly representing the purpose and the item(s) submitted.

E. Submittal information defining equipment and materials shall be specific to the products proposed. Generalized product information that does not clearly define specific equipment or materials to be used will be rejected. Submittals shall contain the manufacturer’s recommendations for installation, where applicable or required.

F. All shop drawings and material and equipment submittals shall contain an approval stamp from the Contractor.

1. The stamp shall state that “[Contractor name] has examined and verified all field dimensions and measurements, field construction criteria, materials, and similar data, and that the Contractor has checked with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.”

2. All transmittals shall be made by the Contractor. Transmittals received from subcontractors and suppliers will receive no action.

G. The submittal of shop drawings and samples shall comply with the General Conditions.

H. Each transmittal shall contain a transmittal cover sheet clearly indicating the following:

1. The Project Name.

2. The Owner.

3. The Engineer.

4. Date transmitted.

5. The transmittal identification number for each item.

6. A description of each item.

7. Action requested.
01340

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTALS
A. The requirements for shop drawing transmittals are as follows:

1. Cover sheets shall contain the information depicted in Section 1.2F.

2. Each item transmitted shall be numbered consecutively beginning with “1”.

3. Resubmittals shall retain the original transmittal number, but be accompanied with a suffix letter starting with letter “A”.

4. Each transmittal cover sheet shall contain items within only one Specification Section or construction detail.

5. Submit two copies of the submittal materials for the Engineer, plus the number of copies required by the Contractor.

6. The first page of each item’s submittal materials shall contain a 2” x 3” clear space for the Engineer’s stamp.

7. The Contractor’s marks shall be on each copy of the transmittal.

8. The contents of transmittals shall be coordinated and identified so that all items can be easily verified by the Engineer.

9. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and technical data to allow an evaluation to be made to determine that the item is in compliance with the Contract Documents.

10. Wherever possible, submit product data information on 8½ “ x 11” sheets.

11. Indicate exact item or model, and all proposed items on product information sheets.

12. Submittal information shall include legible scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics, capacities, test data, installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color charts, layout drawings, parts catalogs, rough-in diagrams, wiring diagrams, controls, weights, and other pertinent data.

13. If proposed products deviate from the specifications or drawings in any way, clearly note and justify the deviation, in detail, in a supplemental letter to the submittal. If an explanation is not provided, the shop drawing will be returned without action.

1.4 SAMPLE SUBMITTALS
A. Identify the sample as to manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, tag number, specification section or drawing detail, color, texture, finish, and other pertinent data.

B. Include specific installation and application instructions.

C. Provide the Contractor’s stamp of approval on samples as an indication of his checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with interrelated work. 01340

1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE

SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals are required for:

1. Major equipment.

2. Equipment with electric motors.

3. Specialized equipment including control valves, instrumentation, control systems, meters, recorders, and transmitters.

B. Transmittals for Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be identified with consecutive numbers, starting with “1”. The prefix OM shall be provided for the transmittal of O&M Manuals (i.e. “OM - #”).

C. Submit one copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual until approval is received.

D. An acceptable O&M submittal will be retained by the Engineer. The transmittal cover sheet will be returned with a request for two additional copies.

E. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal sheet. The deficient areas will be noted.

F. O&M Manuals shall include, but are not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Equipment function, normal operating characteristic, and limiting operations.

2. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions.

3. Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal operations, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions.

4. Lubrication and maintenance instructions.

5. A guide to “troubleshooting”.

6. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear.

7. Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings.

8. Engineering data.

9. Electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams and interconnection diagrams.

10. Test data and performance curves.

11. A list of recommended spare parts.

12. Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other documents packed with equipment when it is delivered.

13. Equipment record sheets recommended by the manufacturer. 01340
PART 2 – EXECUTION

2.1 SUBMITTALS: APPROVAL OR REJECTION
A. The Contractor shall submit electronic submittals to the Engineer. The submittal will be reviewed for completeness and certified by the Engineer with one of the following.

1. No Exceptions.

2. Exceptions as Noted.

3. Revise and Resubmit.

4. Rejected.

5. Information Only.

B. If the Engineer finds the submittal in substantial compliance with the specification, he will certify the submittal “No Exceptions”. In this event, the Contractor may begin to implement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.

C. If the Engineer marks the submittal “Exceptions as Noted”, the Contractor may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal with the noted corrections.

D. If the Engineer marks the submittal “Revise and Resubmit” it will be annotated as to why it was not approved. The Contractor must then revise his submittal to meet specifications and resubmit for approval.

1. Resubmittal shall be identified with the original identification number and shall include a suffix in accordance with Section 1.3A
E. If the Engineer finds the submittal is not within the requirements of the specifications, it will be marked “Rejected” and annotated as to why it was rejected. The Contractor must then resubmit for approval.

1. Resubmittal shall be identified with the original identification number and shall include a suffix in accordance with Section 1.3A
F. If the Engineer marks the submittal “Revise Information Only” it will not be reviewed and will be returned to the Contractor. The submittal is not required to be reviewed by the Engineer or is not within the responsibility of the Engineer for review. The Contractor need not resubmit for approval.

G. Transmittals that are not stamped by the Contractor in accordance with Section 1.2 D will not be reviewed and will be returned with no action.

H. Transmittals that are “No Exceptions” or “Exceptions As Noted” will be distributed to the Owner’s field personnel. If for any reason the Contractor resubmits an approved item, the Contractor shall assure that previously approved documents are superseded by the resubmittal.
01340
Transmittals that are “Revise and Resubmit” or “Rejected” will not be distributed. One electronic copy of the transmittal will be marked up and returned to the Contractor.

END SECTION
01370
SECTION 01370

SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. General work included in this Section:

1. Schedule of values.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES: GENERAL
A. Submit to Engineer a Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work.

B. Upon request of Engineer, support the values with data that will substantiate correctness.

C. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing overpayment of Contractor on items of the Work that will be performed early will not be accepted.

D. Revise and resubmit the Schedule of Values until acceptable to Engineer.

1. No Applications for Payment shall be submitted until Schedule of Values is accepted including applications for payment for mobilization.

E. The Schedule of Values, when accepted by Engineer, shall be used as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.3 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prepare schedule on 8-1/2 IN x 11 IN letter format.

1. Contractor's standard forms and automated printout will be considered for approval by Engineer upon Contractor's request.

2. Identify schedule with:
a. Title of Project and location.
b. Engineer and Project number.
c. Name and address of Contractor.
d. Contract designation.
e. Date of submission.

3. Provide digital files in both Adobe .pdf and Microsoft Excel .xlsx format.

B. Schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C. Follow the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items. 01370

1. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major Section of the Specifications.

D. For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under the item.

E. Such items as bond and insurance premiums, temporary construction facilities, job mobilization and demobilization, and may be listed separately.

F. For the various portions of the Work:

1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

2. For all items, break down the value into:
a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. Cost of installation.
c. The total installed value, including Contractor's overhead and profit.

G. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Price.

1.4 SUB SCHEDULE OF UNIT MATERIAL VALUES
A. Submit a sub-schedule of unit costs and quantities for:

1. Products on which progress payments will be requested for stored products.

B. The form of submittal shall parallel that of the Schedule of Values, with each item identified the same as the line item in the Schedule of Values.

C. The unit quantity for bulk materials shall include an allowance for normal waste.

D. The unit values for the materials shall be broken down into:

1. Cost of the material, delivered and unloaded at the site, with taxes paid.

2. Installation costs, including Contractor's overhead and profit.

E. The installed unit value multiplied by the quantity listed shall equal the cost of that item in the Schedule of Values.

END OF SECTION
01503
SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - LABORATORY TESTS

1.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified laboratory and field testing of materials and equipment where the Technical Specifications specifically obligate the Contractor to provide the services:

1. Earthwork.

2. Trenching and trench backfill

3. Paving and surfacing.

4. Concrete.

B. Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of owner required services.

C. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor’s obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.

D. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all specified services and testing not specifically identified in the technical Specifications to be provided by Owner related to the design of mixes, products and equipment, to Engineer’s review of proposed materials and equipment before, during and after incorporation in the Work, and to retest materials and equipment before, during and after initially failing Owner furnished tests:

1. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor’s obligations to perform the Work of the Contract.

E. Where testing is paid for by owner, contractor to reimburse owner for retesting of due to previously failed results.

F. Contractor shall obtain the services of a qualified testing laboratory with current Caltrans IA certification for the tests involved. Contractor shall be responsible for determining compliance with the following requirements. Test results for each layer/element shall be provided to the City prior to placement of subsequent layers.

Submission may be electronic to the engineer.

Relative compaction is defined as the ration of the in-place density divided by the laboratory density. In place wet and dry density shall be determined using a calibrated and standardized nuclear gauge in accordance with ASTM D 6938.

1. If California Test 216 is used to determine the laboratory maximum wet density, then relative compaction is the ration of field wet density to laboratory maximum wet density.

2. If ASTM D 1557 is used for laboratory maximum dry density, the relative compaction is the ration of field dry density to laboratory maximum dry density.
01503

3. For HMA, relative compaction (density) shall be ratio of the in-place density to the theoretical maximum specific gravity based on the following test methods;
a. In-Place Density: ASTM D 2950 or D7113
Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity: AASHTO T 209 or ASTM D 2041
b. Testing of relative compaction shall conform to Table 1:

Table 1 Minimum Compaction Testing Frequencies
Type of Construction Requirement Maximum test area size Minimum Number of Tests Embankment 90% 2500 sf 2 test per 8” lift
Native Subgrade (top 6”) 95% 3
Aggregate Bases & Subbases 95% 3
Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) 91% to 97% 3
Aggregate base beneath
Sitework Concrete
90% Visual inspection by City
Inspector. If requested, 2 tests

1.2 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY
A. Meet "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.

B. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E 329, "Standards of Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel as Used in Construction" as applicable.

C. Authorized to Operate in the State in Which the Project is Located.

D. Submit copy of report of inspection of facilities made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during the most recent tour of inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

E. Testing Equipment:

1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to either:
a. National Bureau of Standards.
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
01503

1.3 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel after due notice.

B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing of materials and methods of construction:

1. Comply with specified standards.

2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Promptly notify Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of Work or products.

D. Promptly submit an electronic copy of written report of each test and inspection to Engineer.

Each report shall include:

1. Date issued.

2. Project title and number.

3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.

4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.

6. Record of temperature and weather conditions.

7. Date of test.

8. Identification of product and Specification section.

9. Location of sample or test in the Project.

10. Type of inspection or test.

11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.

12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Engineer.

1.4 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory Is Not Authorized To:

1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Approve or accept any portion of the work.

3. Owner-employed laboratory shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with Laboratory Personnel and Provide Access to Work.

B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing.

C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete, and 01503
other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory.

D. Furnish Copies of Products Test Reports as Required.

E. Furnish Incidental Labor and Facilities:

1. To provide access to work to be tested.

2. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested.

3. To facilitate inspections and tests.

4. For storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests:

1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse Owner for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to Contractor's negligence.

PART 2 - SHOP TESTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with specified shop and factory tests of materials and equipment, including retesting of items that fail original tests.

B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract.

2. Certification of products: The respective sections of Specifications.

3. Test, adjust and balance of equipment: The respective sections of Specifications.

4. Shop tests required, and standards for testing: Each Specification section listed.

PART 3 - MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

3.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall provide and pay for the services of manufacturers' representatives to perform the specified services.

B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere:
01503

1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract.

2. Certification of products: The respective sections of Specifications.

3. Test, adjust and balance of equipment: The respective sections of Specifications.

4. Field tests required, and standards for testing: The respective Specification sections.

5. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01340 Shop Drawings.

3.2 QUALIFICATION OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Authorized Representative of the Manufacturer.

B. Experienced in the Application and Installation of the Subject Equipment.

3.3 SERVICES PROVIDED BY REPRESENTATIVE
A. Visit the Site:

1. Inspect, check and adjust equipment as required and approve installation.

2. Be present when equipment is placed in operation.

3. Revisit the site as often as required to correct all problems and until equipment installation and operation are acceptable to Engineer.

B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

C. Furnish an electronic copy of a written report to Engineer, through Contractor, certifying that:

1. Equipment is properly installed and lubricated.

2. Equipment is in accurate alignment.

3. Equipment is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping and anchor bolts.

4. Equipment has operated satisfactorily under full load conditions.

PART 4 - FIELD TESTING

4.1 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with field testing of materials and equipment.

B. Related Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders or 01503
approvals of public authorities: Conditions of the Contract.

2. Certification of products: The respective section of Specifications.

3. Test, adjust and balance equipment: The respective sections of Specifications.

4. Field tests required, and standards for testing: The respective Specification sections.

5. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01340.

4.2 TESTING
A. Provide all required materials, labor, equipment, water, and power required for testing.

B. Perform all Tests in Presence of Engineer.

C. Prepare and submit to Engineer an electronic copy of written reports detailing the results of the tests and identifying corrective action for materials and equipment which fails to pass field tests.

D. Repair with no additional compensation all materials and equipment which fail during testing. 01503
PART 5 - SCHEDULES

5.1 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. Contractor shall pay all costs associated with laboratory services for testing of concrete, pavement, and earthwork compaction.

1. Contractor shall pay costs of structural steel welding tests within limits specified in Steel Specifications.

2. Contractor shall pay costs of retesting due to Contractor’s failure to comply with the specifications.

B. Provided testing laboratory services by Contractor shall include the following: Specification Type of Equipment
Section or System
02200 EARTHWORK (Relative Density, Compaction)
02201 TRENCHING, BACKFILL, AND EMBEDMENT
(Relative Density, Compaction)
02513 PAVEMENT REPAIR (Relative Density,
Compaction, Asphalt)
03100 CONCRETE (Aggregate Gradation, Cylinders,
Slump, Air Content)

END OF SECTION
01503
SECTION 01503

STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. Work under this section includes the preparation and implementation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan before and during rainfall events.

B. The Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be prepared by third-party professionals qualified and experienced in the preparations of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans applicable to the work described in the Contract Documents. The same third-party professionals shall conduct the required monitoring and reporting to permitting agencies.

1. The Plan shall be in accordance with State guidelines and as required based on proposed construction activities, dewatering needs, and anticipated stormwater runoff mitigation.

2. Cost of permitting to be paid by Contractor.

3. The SWPPP shall comply with the Environmental Mitigation Measures included in the Project Manual.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Storm Water Pollution Controls: Measures provided by the Contractor before and during a rainfall event to minimize rainfall runoff from the Site, prevent on-site sediment from being carried off-site, and limit pollutant load to rainfall run-off.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall have prepared and submit to Engineer a site-specific Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (“SWPPP”). The storm water pollution controls shall conform to the Lake County, and the Regional Water Quality Control Board Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan requirements for construction projects. Include a copy of the completed Notice of Intent prepared and submitted by Contractor to obtain the State Water Resources Control Board NPDES General Permit for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction Activity (“General Permit”). A copy of the SWPPP shall be maintained on-site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL PROGRAM
A. Temporary erosion control shall consist of, but not be limited to, constructing such facilities and taking such measures as are necessary to prevent, control, and abate water, mud, and erosion damage 01503
to public and private property as a result of the construction of this Project.

B. The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to prevent the discharge of any material which is not solely stormwater (i.e., rain) to the storm drain system which includes, but is not limited to, catch basins, drainage channels, and creeks. Non-allowable discharges include, but are not limited to, eroded soil from stockpiles or disturbed earth on-site, concrete and concrete washout water, sawcut slurry, fuel, oil, and other vehicle fluids, solid wastes, and construction chemicals.

C. Stormwater pollution control work is intended to provide prevention, control, and abatement of such stormwater pollution and shall consist of constructing those facilities which may be contained in the Contractor's stormwater pollution control program, shown on the plans, specified herein, or directed by the Engineer.

D. A Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan must be submitted and approved by the Engineer prior to start of work. The plan shall contain measures necessary to keep all substances used in or resulting from his work out of the gutters, storm drains and creeks, including but not limited to: employee and subcontractor training and instruction, dry cleanup of spills, wet-vacuum of saw cutting slurry, proper disposal of cement and paint, proper handling of hazardous materials and hazardous waste, blocking of storm drains, shoveling dirt and debris from gutters, covering materials stored outside, sweeping pavements and approach streets, and erosion controls (straw bales, silt fences, detention basins, etc.) at grading sites. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to monitor and maintain all such measures on a daily or more frequent basis, including on non-work days and during storms. In addition, all catch basins at the project site, and which are determined by the Engineer to have been affected by the construction, shall be cleaned out by the Contractor at the end of the project.

E. The Contractor shall include the following minimum actions as identified by the Central Valley Regional Water Quality Control Board Staff Recommendations (when applicable to project):

1. Stabilize site access points to avoid tracking materials off-site;

2. Stabilize denuded areas prior to the wet season (October 15 through April 15);

3. Protect adjacent properties;

4. Stabilize temporary conveyance channels and outlets;

5. Use sediment controls and filtration to remove sediment from water generated by dewatering;

6. Use proper materials and waste storage, handling, and disposal practices;

7. Use proper vehicle and equipment cleaning, fueling, and maintenance practices;

8. Control and prevent discharge of all potential construction-related pollutants;

9. Prepare a contingency plan in the event of unexpected rain or a control measure failure.

F. In addition, when applicable, during saw cutting the Contractor shall cover or barricade catch basins using control measures such as filter fabric, straw bales, sand bags, or fine gravel dams to keep slurry out of the storm drain system. When protecting an inlet, the Contractor shall ensure that the entire opening is covered. The Contractor shall shovel, absorb, and/or vacuum saw cut slurry and pick up all waste prior to moving to the next location or at the end of each working day, whichever is sooner.

If saw cut slurry enters a storm drain inlet, the Contractor shall remove the slurry immediately. 01503
G. The Owner will not be liable to the Contractor for failure to accept all or any portion of an originally submitted or revised stormwater pollution control program, or for any delays to the work due to the Contractor's failure to submit an acceptable stormwater pollution control program.

H. During construction of the project, if the stormwater pollution control measures being taken by the Contractor prove inadequate to prevent stormwater pollution, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to revise his operations and/or his stormwater pollution prevention plan. If the Contractor fails to adequately revise his operations after such direction, the Engineer may cause the stormwater pollution prevention plan to be performed by others, the costs to be deducted from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.

I. The complete cleanup of all material which is discharged from the project in violation of the Discharge Rules shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Should the Contractor fail to respond promptly and effectively to the Engineer's request for cleanup of such discharges, the Engineer may cause the cleanup to be performed by others, the costs to be deducted from any monies due or to become due the Contractor.

J. Nothing in the terms of the contract nor in the provisions in this section shall relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with Sections 5650 and 12015 of the Fish and Game Code, or other applicable statutes relating to prevention or abatement of stormwater pollution.

K. Payment for the preparation and implementation of a Stormwater Pollution Control Program shall be considered as included in the payment for “Stormwater Pollution Control Program”.

3.2 STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROLS DURING SITE WORK
A. Water pollution control work shall conform to the requirements in the "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and Water Pollution Control Program (WPCP) Preparation Manual" and the "Construction Site Best Management Practices (BMPs) Manual," and addenda thereto issued up to, and including, the date of advertisement of the project. These manuals are hereinafter referred to respectively as the "Preparation Manual" and the "Construction Site BMPs Manual", and collectively, as the "Manuals". Copies of the Manuals may be obtained from the Department of Transportation, Material Operations Branch, Publication Distribution Unit, 1900 Royal Oaks Drive, Sacramento, California 95815, Telephone: (916) 445 3520, and may also be obtained from the Department's Internet website at: http://www.dot.ca.gov/hq/construc/stormwater.html.

B. The Contractor shall know and fully comply with applicable provisions of the Manuals, and Federal, State, and local regulations and requirements that govern the Contractor's operations and storm water and non-storm water discharges from both the project site and areas of disturbance outside the project limits during construction. Attention is directed to Sections 7 1.01, "Laws to be Observed", and 7

1.12, "Indemnification and Insurance", of the State Specifications.

C. Water pollution control requirements shall apply to storm water and non-storm water discharges from areas outside the project site which are directly related to construction activities for this contract including, but not limited to, staging areas, storage yards and access roads. The Contractor shall comply with the Manuals for those areas and shall implement, inspect and maintain the required water pollution control practices. Installing, inspecting and maintaining water pollution control practices on areas outside the project limits not specifically arranged and provided for by the Owner for the execution of this contract, will not be paid for. 01600
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for penalties assessed or levied on the Contractor or the Owner as a result of the Contractor's failure to comply with the provisions in this section "Water Pollution Control" including, but not limited to, compliance with the applicable provisions of the Manuals, and Federal, State and local regulations and requirements as set forth therein.

E. Penalties as used in this section shall include fines, penalties and damages, whether proposed, assessed, or levied against the Owner or the Contractor, including those levied under the Federal Clean Water Act and the State Porter Cologne Water Quality Control Act, by governmental agencies or as a result of citizen suits. Penalties shall also include payments made or costs incurred in settlement for alleged violations of the Manuals, or applicable laws, regulations, or requirements. Costs incurred could include sums spent instead of penalties, in mitigation or to remediate or correct violations.

G. Contractor shall provide controls to minimize storm water runoff from exposed soil on the Site and prevent sediment and debris from leaving the Site.

H. Contractor shall remove and dispose of any existing sediment from catch basins, and shall keep catch basins free of accumulated dirt and debris during the entire project.

I. Contractor shall also provide controls so that rainwater does not accumulate in excavation pits or trenches. Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, treatment (if required), and proper disposal of any rainwater that has accumulated in such pits prior to the pits being backfilled.

END OF SECTION
01600
SECTION 01600

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Scheduling of product delivery.

2. Packaging of products for delivery.

3. Protection of products from damage from:
i. Handling
ii. Exposure to element or harsh environments.

B. Payment:

1. No payment will be made to Contractor for equipment or materials not properly stored and insured or without approved shop drawings.

2. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent progress estimates if proper storage procedures are not observed.

1.2 DELIVERY
A. Scheduling:

1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage.

B. Packaging:

1. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer’s original unbroken cartons or other containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or environmental damage.

C. Identification:

1. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item, and installation location.

D. Protection and Handling:

1. Provide manufacturer’s instructions for storage and handling.

PART 2 – EXECUTION

2.1 PROTECTION, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Manufacturer’s instruction:

1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written directions.

2. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in storage.

3. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

4. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 01600

2.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect deliveries:

1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used, or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on the project.

B. Provide temporary storage facilities, as required, for the protection of stored materials.

C. Monitor storage area:

1. Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture conditions are maintained.

END SECTION
01650
SECTION 01650

DISINFECTION SYSTEM STARTUP
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope of Work:

1. Procedures and actions, required of the Contractor, which are necessary to achieve and demonstrate Substantial Completion.

2. Requirements for Substantial Completion Submittals.

3. Contractor alerted that vendor site visits for operator training sessions are requested to be scheduled with prior authorization by Owner staff.

4. Equipment Manufacturer personnel to be present at startup and provide assistance as required.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substantial Completion: See General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit proposed training activities in the chronological order listed below prior to the start of the facility start-up testing period:

1. Master operation and maintenance training schedule:
• Submit 30 days (minimum) prior to first training session for Owner’s personnel. • Schedule to include:
• Target date and time for Owner witnessing of each system initial startup. • Target date and time for Operation and Maintenance training for each system, both field and classroom.
• Target date for initiation of Demonstration Period.
• Submit for review and approval by Owner
• Include holidays observed by Owner.
• Attend a schedule planning and coordination or progress meeting prior to first anticipated training session.
• Provide a status report and schedule-to-complete for requirements prerequisite to Manufacturer’s training.
• Identify initial target dates for individual manufacturer’s training sessions. • Owner reserves the right to insist on a minimum (7) days notice of rescheduled training session not conducted on master schedule target date for any reason. • Schedule to be resubmitted until approved.
01650

2. At least eight (8) copies of instructional materials used for training to be provided at time of first training session.

3. Substantial Completion Submittal:
• File Contractor’s Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection. • Approved Operation and Maintenance manuals received by Engineer minimum four weeks prior to scheduled training.
• Written request for Owner to witness each component startup. Request to be received by Owner minimum 4 weeks before scheduled training of Owner’s personnel on that system.
• Equipment installation and startup certifications.
• Letter verifying completion of all startup activities including receipt of all specified items from manufacturers or suppliers as final item prior to initiation of Demonstration Period.

1.4 COST OF STARTUP
A. Contractor to pay all costs associated with facility startup excluding power to run new facilities.

B. Contractor to pay for all return trips incurred by Manufacturer Representatives where equipment or construction was not ready for scheduled startup activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS –

NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Completion of Construction Work:

1. Complete the work to bring the Project to a state of substantial completion.

C. Equipment Startup:

1. Requirementsfor individual items of equipment are included in Division 2 through 26 of these Specifications.

2. Prepare the equipment so it will operate properly and safely and be ready to demonstrate functional integrity during the Demonstration Period.

3. Perform Equipment Startup to extent possible without introducing product flow.

4. Perform Equipment Startup in presence of Manufacturer’s Representative and Engineer.

4. Coordinate with Owner, a logistics plan for filling pipes and systems with potable water required to facilitate startup testing of the individual equipment components and systems.

5. Procedures include but are not necessarily limited to the following:
01650
a. Test or check and correct deficiencies of:
1) Power, control and monitoring circuits for continuity prior to connection to power source.
2) Voltage of all circuits.
3) Phase sequence.
4) Cleanliness of connecting piping systems.
5) Alignment of connected machinery.
6) Vacuum and pressure of all closed systems.
7) Lubrication.
8) Valve orientation and position status for manual operating mode. 9) Tankage for integrity using product flow.
10) Pumping equipment using product flow.
11) Instrumentation and control signal generation, transmission, reception and response.
12) Tagging and identification systems.
13) All equipment: Proper connections, alignment, calibration and adjustment. b. Calibrate all safety equipment.
c. Manually rotate or move moving parts to assure freedom of movement. d. “Bump” start electric motors to verify proper rotation. e. Perform other tests, checks, and activities required to make the equipment ready for Demonstration Period.
f. Documentation:
1) Prepare a log showing each equipment item subject to this paragraph and listing what is to be accomplished during Equipment Startup. Provide a place for the Contractor to record date and person accomplishing required work. Submit completed document before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion certification.

6. Obtain certifications, without restrictions or qualifications, and deliver to Engineer:
a. Manufacturer’s equipment installation check letters. b. Instrumentation Supplier’s Instrumentation Installation Certificate.

C. Personnel Training:

1. See individual equipment specification sections.

2. Conduct all personnel training after completion of Equipment Startup for the equipment for which training is being conducted and after submission and approval of O&M manuals.
a. Personnel training on both individual equipment and complete process systems will not be considered completed unless:
1) All pretraining deliverables are received and approved before commencement of training on the individual equipment or system.
2) No system malfunctions occur during training.
01650
3) All provisions of field and classroom training specifications are met. b. Training not in compliance with the above will be performed again in its entirety by the manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner.

3. Field and classroom training requirements:
a. Hold classroom training onsite.
b. Notify each manufacturer specified for onsite training that the Owner reserves the right to video record any or all training sessions. Organize each training session in a format compatible with video recording.
c. Training instructor: Factory trained and familiar with giving both classroom and “hands-on” instructions.
d. Training instructors: Be at classes on time. Session beginning and ending times to be coordinated with the Owner and indicated on the master schedule. Normal time lengths for class periods can vary, but brief rest breaks should be scheduled and taken. e. Organize training sessions into maintenance verses operation topics and identify on schedule.
f. Plan for minimum class attendance of five people at each session and provide sufficient classroom materials, samples and handouts for those in attendance. g. Instructors to have a typed agenda and well prepared instructional material. The use of visual aids, e.g., films, pictures, and slides is recommended for use during the classroom training programs. Deliver agendas to the Engineer a minimum of 7 days prior to the classroom training. Provide equipment required for presentation of films, slides, and other visual aids.
h. In the onsite training sessions, cover the information required in the Operation and Maintenance manuals submitted according to Section 01340 and the following areas as applicable:
1) Operation of equipment.
2) Lubrication of equipment.
3) Maintenance and repair of equipment.
4) Troubleshooting of equipment.
5) Preventive maintenance procedures.
6) Adjustments to equipment.
7) Inventory of spare parts.
8) Optimizing equipment performance.
9) Capabilities.
10) Operational safety.
11) Emergency situation response.
12) Takedown procedures (disassembly and assembly).
13) Tasks required to maintain warranty.
14) Address questions raised by training session participants. i. Address above paragraphs 1), 2), 8), 9), 10) and 11) in the operation sessions.

Address
01650
above paragraphs 3), 4), 5), 6), 7), and 12) in the maintenance sessions. j. Maintain a log of classroom training provided including: Instructors, topics, dates, time and attendance.

D. Complete the filing of all required submittals:

1. Shop drawing.

2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

3. Training material.

4. Record drawings.

E. Filing of Contractor’s Notice of Substantial Completion and Request for Inspection of Project:

1. File the notice when the following have been completed:
a. Construction work (brought to state of Substantial Completion). b. Equipment startup.
c. Personnel training.
d. Submittal of required documents.

2. Engineer will review required submittals for completeness within 10 calendar days of Contractor’s notice. If complete, Engineer will complete inspection of the Work, within 15 calendar days of Contractor’s notice.

3. Engineer will inform Contractor in writing of the status of the Work reviewed, within 20 calendar days of Contractor’s notice:
a. Work determined not meeting state of Substantial Completion:
1) Contractor: Correct deficiencies noted or submit plan of action for correction within five (5) days of Engineer’s determination. 2) Engineer: Reinspect work within (5) days of Contractor’s notice of correction of deficiencies.
3) All reinspection costs incurred will be deducted from final payment due Contractor.
b. Work determined to be in state of tentative Substantial Completion: Engineer to prepare tentative “Engineer’s Certificate of Substantial Completion.” c. Engineer’s Certificate of Substantial Completion:
1) Certificate tentatively issued subject to successful demonstration of functional integrity.
2) Issued for Project as a whole or for one or more discrete definable areas of plant. 3) Issued subject to completion or correction of items cited in the certificate (punch list).
4) Issued with responsibilities of Owner and Contractor cited. 5) Executed by Engineer.
6) Accepted by Owner.
7) Accepted by Contractor.
01650
d. Upon successful completion of Demonstration Period, Engineer will endorse certificate attesting to the successful demonstration, and citing the hour and date of beginning and ending the successful Demonstration Period of functional integrity as the effective date of Substantial Completion.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION PERIOD
A. General:

1. Demonstrate the functional integrity of the mechanical, electrical and control interfaces of the respective equipment and components comprising the facility as evidence of Substantial Completion.

2. Duration of demonstration period: 10 working days.

3. If, during the Demonstration Period, the aggregate amount of time used for repair, alteration, or unscheduled adjustmentsto any equipment orsystemsthat rendersthe affected equipment or system inoperative exceed 10 percent of the Demonstration Period, the demonstration of functional integrity will be deemed to have failed. In the event of failure, a new Demonstration Period will recommence after correction of the cause of failure. The new Demonstration Period shall have the same requirements and duration as the Demonstration Period previously conducted.

4. Conduct the demonstration of functional integrity under full operational conditions.

5. Owner will provide operational personnel to provide process decisions affecting plant performance. Owner’s assistance will be available only for process decisions. Contractor will perform all other functionsincluding but not limited to equipment operation and maintenance until successful completion of the Demonstration Period.

6. Owner reserves the right to simulate operational variables, equipment failures, routine maintenance scenarios, etc., to verify the functional integrity of automatic and manual backup systems and alternate operating modes.

7. Time of beginning and ending any Demonstration Period shall be agreed upon by Contractor, Owner, and Engineer in advance of initiating Demonstration Period.

8. Throughout the Demonstration Period, provide qualified final field instruction on select systems and to respond to any system problems or failures which may occur:

9. Provide all labor, supervision, utilities, chemicals, maintenance, equipment, vehicles or any other item necessary to operate and demonstrate all systems being demonstrated.

END OF SECTION
01710
SECTION 01710

CLEANING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Intermediate and final cleaning of Work not including cleaning of systems specified elsewhere.

1.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials.

1.3 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning agents:

1. Compatible with surface being cleaned.

2. New and uncontaminated.

3. For manufactured surfaces use cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING – GENERAL
A. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions.

B. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities.

C. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or sewers.

D. Dispose of degradable debris and nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site.
01710
E. On completion of work, leave area in a clean, natural looking condition. Remove all signs of temporary construction activities incidental to construction of required permanent Work.

F. Do not burn on-site.

3.2 INTERIOR CLEANING
A. Cleaning during construction:

1. Keep work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel at the project site.

2. As a minimum, dispose of waste materials, debris, and rubbish on a weekly basis.

3. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until substantial completion.

B. Final Cleaning:

1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces.

2. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean.

3. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine.

4. Ventilation systems:
a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction.
b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

5. Replace all burned out lamps.

6. Broom clean and/or mop floor areas.

3.3 EXTERIOR CLEANING
A. Cleaning during construction:

1. Construction debris:
a. Confine in strategically located container(s).
b. Cover containers to prevent blowing of debris.
c. Haul containers from site a minimum of once per week.

2. Dispose debris to container(s) daily.

3. Take special precautions to dispose of loose debris under windy or adverse weather conditions.

4. Vegetation on the project site will shall be maintained and trimmed as necessary. 01710

5. Soils, sand, and gravel shall be removed from paved and sidewalk areas, as necessary, to prevent muddy, dusty, or nuisance conditions. Materials shall not be flushed into storm sewer systems.

B. Final cleaning:

1. Remove trash and debris containers from site.

2. Clean paved roadways.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Routine monitoring of site conditions shall be conducted by the field representative.

Deviations from requirements shall be promptly rectified by the Contractor.

B. The project superintendent is expected to control conditions that may result in creating nuisance conditions within the developed residential neighborhood.

END OF SECTION
01720
SECTION 01720

PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Preparation of Project Record Documents: Maintain, as a minimum, on site one set of drawings, specifications, addenda, change orders, work directive changes, field orders, and other modifications to the Contract Documents.

B. Drawings: Legibly mark each item in red pencil to record actual construction. Minimum lettering size on full-size drawings shall be 1/8-inch high, block style, vertical upper case. Do not use paste-on details or mark on the back side of drawings. Include at the minimum, the following:

1. Measured depths of foundations, duct banks, and pipelines.

2. Surveyed coordinates of pipe connections, bends, and material transitions.

3. Changes in the horizontal and vertical locations of new and existing underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced by measurement to permanent surface improvements

4. Measured locations of building piping and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the work.

5. Identify specific details of pipe connections and final locations of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, and pull boxes.

6. Identify locations of spare conduits including beginning, ending and routing through pull boxes, and manholes. Record spare conductors, including number and size within spare conduits, and filled conduits.

7. Field changes of dimensions and details

8. Details, especially existing utilities discovered in the course of work and not on original drawings.

9. Special attention shall be applied to showing changes in the following areas:
a. Buried or concealed (inaccessible without demolition) work b. Structural modifications
c. Pneumatic, electrical, and electronic control systems C. Final Submittal of Project Documents: Prior to final acceptance inspection, submit project record documents, as defined above, to Engineer. Final submittal shall include the following:

1. One complete hard copy set of full-sized project documents marked up and augmented with submittals to fully illustrate all revisions made in the course of the work.

END OF SECTION
01740
SECTION 01740

GUARANTEES AND WARRANTEES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A.Contractor's Guarantee. The Contractor shall warrant and guarantee the entire Work and all parts thereof, including that performed and constructed by Subcontractors, Sub- subcontractors, and others employed directly or indirectly on and for the Work, against faulty or defective materials, equipment, or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of the Final Completion of the Work or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any special guarantee or warranty required by the Contract Documents. In addition, the equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in design.

Within the guarantee period and upon notification of the Contractor by the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly make all needed adjustments, repairs or replacements arising out of defects which, in the judgment of the Owner, become necessary during such period. The cost of all materials, parts, labor, transportation, supervision, special tools and supplies required for correction of abnormalities shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor also extends the terms of this guarantee to cover repaired parts and all replacement parts furnished under this guarantee provisions for a period of one (1) year from the date of their installation by the Contractor. If, within fifteen (15) days, unless specified otherwise, after the Owner gives the Contractor notice of a defect, failure, or abnormality of the Work, the Contractor neglects to make or undertake with due diligence the necessary repair or adjustments or order the Work to be done by a third party, the Owner will direct the work to be completed by others with the cost of the Work to be paid by the Contractor. In the event of an emergency where, in the judgment of the Owner, delay would cause a spill, an odor complaint, serious loss or damage, repairs or adjustments may be made by the Owner, or a third party chosen by the Owner, without giving notice to the Contractor, and the cost of the work shall be paid by the Contractor.

B. Guarantee of Work on Property of Others. The Contractor's guarantee shall cover and include any of the Work installed on property not owned by the Owner, whether public or private, and shall include the repair of damage to improvements and existing conditions on such other property caused by settlement or otherwise resulting from the Contractor's operations unless the owner of such other property shall in writing release the Owner from liability and responsibility for Work or damage therefrom on such other property.

C. Manufacturers' Warranties. As a precedent to final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Contract Manager all the manufacturers' warranties required by the Contract Documents, with the Owner named as beneficiary. In addition, for all equipment bearing a manufacturer's warranty that extends for a longer period than the Contractor's guarantee, the Contractor shall secure and deliver the warranties to the Construction Manager in the same manner.

END OF SECTION
01950
SECTION 01950
SAFETY
PART 1- CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY
For all requirements of Section 01950 – Safety and Health, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for job site safety and implementation of allsafety requirements while performing work at all of the OWNER’s facilities including the water tank, pump stations and pipelines.

A. Contractor Certification

1. The CONTRACTOR shall certify per Form 1950-A, Safety Certification Form, that persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable are experienced and qualified to anticipate and meet the safety and health requirements of this Project pursuant to California Administrative Code, Title 8, "Industrial Relations", and Code of Federal Regulations, Sections 1900 through 1910, "Occupational Safety and Health Standards", and Section 1926 "Construction".

2. As part of this certification, the CONTRACTOR certifies that persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable have, at a minimum, the following written safety programs: Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP), Hazard Communication Program, and New Employee Orientation Program. The CONTRACTOR certifies that persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable also have additional written safety programs such as: Confined Space Program, Lockout Tag Out (LOTO) Program, Excavation Safety program, Fall Protection Program, etc. to addressspecific safety hazards associated with the work being performed.

3. The CONTRACTOR certifiesthat personsfor whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the project is properly staffed and equipped to execute their emergency and rescue plan. This requirement will apply continuously twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven days a week until final acceptance of the Work.

4. The Safety Certification Form (Form 1950-A) must be completed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the OWNER as part of the Safety Submittal prior to the issuance of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Contractor’s Safety Personnel

1. Safety Officer - The CONTRACTOR shall designate a fully trained and responsible member who serves asthe Safety Officer for the CONTRACTOR’s organization. The Safety Officer shall be experienced in administering, enforcing and overseeing the safety standards contained in the California Administrative Code, Title 8 and 29, and the Code of Federal Regulations, Sections 1900 through 1910 and Section 1926, whose duty shall be the prevention of hazards and accidents and who shall have authority to direct work for the CONTRACTOR.

C. Safety Supervisor - The CONTRACTOR shall designate a Safety Supervisor who will be present at each project site during the course of all work performed by or under the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The Safety Officer may be used as a Safety Supervisor. The Safety Supervisor shall be fully trained for the type of work being performed and shall have authority to direct the CONTRACTOR's work.

D. Safety Measures

1. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with all laws, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and 01950
lawful orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury or loss. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility that persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable follow the CONTRACTOR’s own safety program and provide one or more designated Safety Supervisor(s) at each work site. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain copies of all documents mentioned or referenced in this Section readily available at the site until the Work is completed.

E. Accident Reporting. Any accident occurring within the premises of the OWNER’sfacilitiesshall be reported to the OWNER within 24 hours, within 8 hours if the event is deemed an Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) reportable incident, or immediately if life threatening.

CONTRACTOR will provide a written report for each accident within three working days of the initial reporting.

PART 2- OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY
The responsibilities of the OWNER, ENGINEER and Inspector with respect to the CONTRACTOR's safety measures in, on, or about the site and vicinity will be to advise the CONTRACTOR and persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable of known hazards and to apprise the CONTRACTOR of apparentsafety deficiencies not meeting the requirements of the CONTRACTOR’s Site Specific Safety Plan or those stated in Sections 01950. In the event of recognizable imminent danger, the OWNER, ENGINEER, and Inspector witnessing such activity will attempt to immediately inform the CONTRACTOR and/or persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable of thissituation so that this activity can be halted and that persons affected are relocated to safety.

PART 2- GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

2.1 PERSONAL HYGIENE
Persons involved in work for the OWNER may be exposed to disease-producing organisms in wastewater (sewage). The CONTRACTOR shall require persons for whom the CONTRACTOR isresponsible or liable to observe proper hygienic precautions, including washing of hands and other exposed portions of the body with disinfecting soap and water before eating orsmoking, and prior to leaving projectsite. The CONTRACTOR isrequired to provide portable toilets with hand washing facilities for their workforce and SUBCONTRACTORs.

2.2 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The CONTRACTOR shall not permit any person for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable to enter or remain on the worksite unless the person is equipped with the appropriate personal protective equipment conforming to the requirements of California General Industrial Safety Orders and shall discharge from the site all persons not so equipped. The CONTRACTOR shall post conspicuoussigns at appropriate locations warning the public and persons engaged upon the Work of thisrequirement. At a minimum, each person must wear a safety helmet,safety glasses, steel-toed bootsfor general persons (fiberglass-toed boots for electricians) for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable, shirts with sleeves, and long pants.

2.3 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE
The CONTRACTOR shall conduct work so as to insure the least possible obstruction to traffic and inconvenience to the OWNER and general public at large in the vicinity of the work and to insure the protection of persons and property. No road orstreetshall be closed except with the permission of the OWNER and the proper governmental authority. Fire hydrants on or adjacent 01950
to the work shall be accessible to fire-fighting equipment. Temporary provisionsshall be made by the CONTRACTOR to insure the use of sidewalks, private and public driveways and proper functioning of gutters, sewer inlets, drainage ditches and culverts, irrigation ditches and natural water courses. The CONTRACTOR is also required to mitigate any erosion as a result of the Work (through the use of silt traps at existing catch basins, etc.). A Storm Water Pollution Control Plan may be required as part of the Site Specific Safety Plan.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain barricades, guards, temporary bridges and walkways, watchmen, night lights and dangersignalsilluminated from sunset to sunrise, and all other necessary appliances and safeguardsto protect the Work, life, property, the public, excavations, equipment, and materials. Barricadesshall be ofsubstantial construction and shall be painted and/or reflectorized to increase their visibility at night. Suitable warning signs shall be so placed and illuminated at night as to show in advance where construction, barricades, or detours exist. Guard railsshall be provided for bridges and walkways over or adjoining excavations,shafts, and other openings and locations where injury may occur.

2.4 COMMUNICATION
Communication between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER must be maintained at all times.

The CONTRACTOR is responsible for providing the OWNER with a contact list for key CONTRACTOR staff, in addition to maintaining emergency procedures in their Specific Site Safety Plan. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to communicate to the OWNER all hazards which they plan to introduce to the work site, whether by procedure or material, and changes, or revisions that may be needed to their Site Specific Safety Plan.

2.5 HAZARDOUS AREAS
The CONTRACTOR shall not permit or allow any person or persons to enter any pipe, manhole, wetwell, or space containing hazardous or noxious substances or gases, or where there is an insufficient amount of oxygen to sustain life and consciousness, or any other hazardous area unless equipped with lawful and appropriate safety equipment and life supporting apparatus, and unless those entering are continually monitored and guarded by and in communication with other persons outside the space or area who are equipped in the same way, can give an alarm to others for assistance, and initiate immediate rescue operations in the event of mishap.

2.6 SMOKING
Smoking is prohibited everywhere in the plant
PART 3- EMERGENCIES

3.1 WORK DURING AN EMERGENCY.

The CONTRACTOR shall perform any and all operations and shall furnish any materials and equipment necessary during an emergency which will result in imminent loss of life or property.

CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER of the emergency as soon as practicable, but shall not wait for instruction before taking necessary action. Any additional compensation or extension of Contract Time claimed by the CONTRACTOR on account of an emergency shall be applied for as provided in contract documents.
01950

3.2 REPRESENTATIVES FOR EMERGENCIES.

The CONTRACTOR shall provide in the Site Specific Safety Plan a written list giving the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the Safety Officer and Safety Supervisor(s) who can be contacted at any time in case of emergency. The representatives shall be fully authorized and equipped to correct unsafe or inconvenient conditions on short notice. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify the OWNER of all changes needed to keep the contact list up to date.

PART 4- FIRE PREVENTION
The CONTRACTOR's Safety Officer shall inspect the entire Work and site, including storage areas, at frequent intervals to verify that fire prevention measures are constantly enforced.

4.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND HOSES.

The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and maintain fully charged fire extinguishers of the appropriate type, supplemented with temporary fire hoses wherever an adequate water supply exists, at the places where burning, welding, or other operations that may cause a fire are being performed.

PART 5- OWNER’S EQUIPMENT
CONTRACTOR shall not utilize any OWNER's equipment in support of their work effort, unless specifically authorized to do so per the contract. The use of OWNER equipment, tools, or staff by the CONTRACTOR is not permitted. The OWNER will not accept delivery or offload delivered material for the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER will not allow the CONTRACTOR to use any of its safety equipment (ladders, gas monitors, exhaust fans, lighting, etc.). The OWNER's equipment shall not be shut down, turned off, or otherwise handled by the CONTRACTOR, unless this is required as part of the contract and prior coordination has been made with the OWNER’s staff.

PART 6- HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
The OWNER utilizes chemicalsthat are classified as Hazardous Materials. If there is an OWNER related incident involving hazardous materials, you will be provided direction over the loudspeaker, or directly from the OWNER's staff. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to bring hazardous material to the Treatment Plant or any other work locations controlled by the OWNER, an SDS (Safety Data Sheet) for each hazardous material along with Form 1950-B must be submitted to the OWNER for review. Any hazardous materials not included within the originalsubmittal of the Project MSDS Binder are to be submitted to the OWNER a minimum of 15 days prior to the proposed delivery date.

PART 7- SUBMITTALS

7.1- SITE SPECIFIC SAFETY PLAN
The OWNER shall only review this safety submittal for the required elements and not content. Prior to receiving Notice to Proceed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit to the OWNER three (3) sets of their Site 01950
Specific Safety Plan binders. The spine of each bindershould be labeled SITE SPECIFIC SAFETY PLAN for “Project Name” in large print for easy reference. The Site Specific Safety Plan describes specific work activitiesto be performed and the associated hazards and corresponding safety measure(s) the CONTRACTOR is proposing to implement. The Site Specific Safety Plan shall be a stand alone document and not merely refer to portions of the CONTRACTOR’s Injury and Illness Prevention Program (IIPP).

Adequate descriptions of work activities, hazards,safety measures, and emergency and rescue procedures are to be provided in order to illustrate compliance with OSHA required measures.

Additionally, the Site Specific Safety Plan would include at a minimum:
a. a signed Safety Certification Form (Form 1950-A)
b. a listshowing the CONTRACTOR’s Safety Officer and Safety Supervisor(s) with 24 hour contact information
c. a list of safety equipment that will be maintained on site, including rescue equipment d. a list of personsfor whom the CONTRACTOR isresponsible or liable who are properly trained and qualified to participate in Permit Required Confined Space and Lock Out Tag Out operations
e. an index shall be provided so that it references each tabbed section of the Site Specific Safety Plan.

7.2- HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
In addition to and separate from the Site Specific Safety Plan, the CONTRACTOR shall submit three (3) sets of Project MSDS binders to the OWNER prior to receiving the Notice to Proceed for each hazardous substance that is anticipated for use at the work site. By utilizing Form 01950-B each set is to be submitted in a binder utilizing tabbed dividers to separate the CONTRACTOR defined MSDS categories. An index is to be included on the first page in each bindershowing the MSDS categories.

The bindershould be oversized and include dividers with extra tabs to allow room for unanticipated MSDS sheets or categories submitted during the course of the project. The spine of the binder should be labeled MSDS for “Project Name” in large print for easy reference. Subsequent MSDS sheets not provided in the original Project MSDS binder are to be provided in pre-punched sets of three with an updated index reference sheet when necessary. The CONTRACTOR shall create and maintain at least one MSDS binder for the CONTRACTOR’s use at the work site.

PART 8- SAFETY PROGRAMS
The OWNER has implemented various safety standards and programs that the CONTRACTOR and persons for whom the CONTRACTOR is responsible or liable is expected to adopt while performing all work for the OWNER. If there is a conflict with Federal, State, or local safety laws, the stricter law shall apply. If there is a conflict between the OWNER’s safety standards or programs and that of the CONTRACTOR, the stricter standard or program shall apply. The CONTRACTOR shall highlight all conflicts that may exist in the CONTRACTOR’s Site Specific Safety Plan and illustrate how the stricter interpretation is being utilized.

8.1 CONFINED SPACE SAFETY
The OWNER employs a "Permit Required" safety standard for all confined space entries per California General Industrial Safety Orders, Section 5157. Work performed in or about but not limited to manholes, wetwells, vaults, pipes, tanks, basins, structures, and excavations carries with it the high potential for exposure of personsfor whom the CONTRACTOR isresponsible or liable and any other persons in the 01950
vicinity of the work to hazardous conditions. These conditions may include, but are not limited to, exposure to hydrogen sulfide, carbon dioxide, methane, carbon monoxide and other gases; exposure to atmospheres containing insufficient oxygen to support human life; exposure to wastewater (sewage) which may contain bacteriological, chemical, and other constituents harmful to humans; working in conditions where engulfment or entrapment of personnel may occur (such as in excavations); and working in structures with uneven and slippery surfaces and with difficult and limited access. Many of these environments are classified as "confined spaces" in the Code of Federal Regulations, Sections 1900 through 1910 and Section 1926, the California Administrative Code, Title 8, and the State of California's General Industry Safety Orders, Article 8, Sections 5156- The CONTRACTOR shall be fully familiar with, and shall strictly adhere to and comply with, the applicable sections of these documents pertaining to confined spaces. In the event of a conflict between applicable requirements, the more restrictive requirement shall apply.

1. The CONTRACTOR is required to be especially alert to these conditions and employ a "permit required" system for all confined space entries asspecified in California General Industrial Safety Orders, Section 5157. The CONTRACTOR must maintain training recordsfor all participantsin confined space entries by permit only and must provide copies of these upon request of the OWNER.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for ensuring that the project is properly staffed and equipped to execute their Confined Space Program and associated emergency and rescue plan. OWNER safety equipment and/or staff will not be made available to the CONTRACTOR, unless during the course of an emergency rescue which will result in imminent loss of life or property.

8.2 LOCKOUT TAG OUT (LOTO)
The OWNER employs the OSHA required Lockout Tag Out (LOTO) standards, and where permissible, a group lockout procedure per CFR 1910.147(f)(3). While performing work on OWNER’s equipment or where the OWNER’s equipment or facility can potentially provide an energy source that could cause injury to the CONTRACTOR, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the OWNER’s LOTO procedures. The OWNER’s LOTO Program is available for review from the MRWPCA Safety Officer and will be provided to the CONTRACTOR at the preconstruction meeting. The CONTRACTOR shall also be required to implement LOTO procedures that meet the requirements of Title 8, CCR, Sections 2320.1 - 2320.7 and 3314. OWNER safety equipment and/or staff will not be made available to the CONTRACTOR, unless during the course of an emergency rescue which will result in imminent loss of life or property.

1. The CONTRACTOR will contact the OWNER to discuss the work to be performed and jointly identify all Lockout Tag Out points necessary to isolate energy sources.

2. The OWNER will provide and secure singularly keyed OWNER lockout lock(s) and lockout tag(s) at all lockout points. The CONTRACTOR is required to provide singularly keyed lockout lock(s) and lockout tag(s) for each affected employee at each lockout point. The CONTRACTOR and OWNER shall remove their lockout lock(s) and tag(s) when work on the OWNER’s equipment or facility has been completed and deemed to be functional and ready by the OWNER to be returned back into service.

3. The CONTRACTOR may participate in group lockout whereby, the CONTRACTOR’s supervisor or foreman along with the OWNER’s authorized employee will participate in the coordination of affected contractor work forces and ensure continuity of protection. A group LOTO will only be permitted if the OWNER’s Group LOTO procedure or a stricter procedure is followed and is approved by the OWNER’s Safety Officer. 01950

4. In addition to meeting requirements of OSHA 3120 CONTRACTOR must maintain training records for LOTO trained employees and must provide copies of these upon request of the OWNER.

END OF SECTION
02072
SECTION 02072

DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL
PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition, cutting and patching of existing construction where shown on Drawings, or as required to accommodate new work shown or specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. See Section 01340.

2. Indicating manufacturer and type of:
i. Proposed nonshrink grout.
ii. Epoxy bonding adhesive.
iii. Proposed materials and methods to be used for matching and repairing existing construction.

B. A list of current employees who have completed appropriate asbestos training and copies of their current certificates identifying their qualifications.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General:

1. Salvage items, designated for Owner's salvage, as a functional unit.

2. Clean, list and tag for storage.

3. Protect from damage and deliver to location designated.

4. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment required for operation.

1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Perform preliminary investigations, including potholing, as required to ascertain extent of work.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference with other operations.

PART 2- PRODUCTS

1.5 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Nonshrink grout:
i. Masterflow 928 by Master Builders.
ii. Sika Grout 212 by Sika.\
02072

1.7 MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink Grout:

1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining.

2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at jobsite.

3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation or by other means.

4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi.

5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure/seal compound recommended by grout manufacturer.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive:

1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 GENERAL
A. The clearing of all material shall conform to Section 15.02051, “Clearing, Grubbing, Demolition, Abandonment, Removal, Disposal and Salvage” of the Owner Specifications, and Section 15 “Existing Facilities” and Section 16, “Clearing and Grubbing” of the State Standard Specifications.

B. Contractor shall prune trees and bushes as necessary for the work. Prior to any work being performed the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to review trees to be pruned.

2.2 SAW-CUTTING
A. Where shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall saw-cut existing asphalt and concrete to provide a vertical joint for the removal and replacement of pavement.

B. Contractor shall remove and dispose of AC pavement as provided in the State Specifications.

C. When saw-cutting, all cuts shall be level and uniform without fracturing, and allowing a proper levels for completed construction.

2.3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. The Contractor shall dispose of the pipes and structures removed in accordance with all applicable regulations.

B. Removal of existing structures and facilities including miscellaneous existing facilities such as concrete shall conform to the provisions of this Section.

2.4 PREPARATION
A. Provide covered passageways where necessary to ensure safe passage of persons in or near areas of work.

B. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required.

C. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary.
02072

2.5 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting and Removal:

1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for installation of new work.

2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive new work.

3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.

B. Modification of Existing Concrete:

1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining surfaces.

2. Protect remaining concrete from damage.

3. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete.

4. Concrete may be broken out after initial saw cuts in the event concrete thickness prevents cutting through.

5. Where sawing is not possible, make openings by drilling holes around perimeter of opening and then chipping out the concrete.
i. Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to remaining concrete. ii. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides and build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete.
iii. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 IN from face of concrete and fill resulting holes with nonshrink grout.

C. Removal of Existing Anchor Bolts or Other Protruding Elements:

1. Removal within a distance of 8 FT above finished floor or operating level elevation.

2. Removed to a depth of 1/2 IN from finished surface.

3. Fill void with non-shrink grout.

D. Matching and Patching:

1. Walls, ceilings, floors or partitions:
i. Repair abutting walls, ceilings, floors or partitions disturbed by removal. ii. Match and patch existing construction disturbed during installation of new work. iii. Methods and materials:

1. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas for areas or surfaces being repaired.

2. Subject to review of Engineer.

E. Salvaged Items:

1. Salvage and deliver to Owner items as identified by Engineer

2. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces.

3. Dispose of items or materials not designated for Owner's salvage or reuse. Promptly remove from site

4. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site.

F. Clean Up:

1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site.

END OF SECTION
02200
SECTION 02200

EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following work stages:

1. Clearing, grubbing and site preparation.

2. Removal and disposal of debris.

3. Handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material.

4. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and protection Work.

5. Pumping and dewatering excavations.

6. Backfilling.

7. Construction of engineered fills, structural fills and structural backfills

8. Construction of embankments.

9. Surfacing and grading.

10. Gravel Surfacing for Roadways

11. Gravel Landscape Surfacing

12. Rip Rap

13. Subsurface drainage.

14. Appurtenant Work.

B. Over-Excavation Requirements: Contractor to excavate subgrade to the depths shown on the drawings. Coordinate with the project Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of engineered fill or AB. Engineer shall determine the amount of over-excavation, if any, is required. Overexcavation and replacement of additional subgrade materials shall be subject to reasonable cost increases if deemed necessary.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labor Code 6705 – Protection of Workers in Excavations:

As required by Section 6705 of the California Labor Code and in addition thereto, whenever work under the Contract involves the excavation of any trench or trenches 5 feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit for acceptance by the Owner or by a registered civil or structural engineer, employed by the Owner, to whom authority to accept has been delegated, in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for work protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation, of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the Contractor, and all costs therefore shall be included in the price named in the Contract for completion of the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents. Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping, or other protective system less effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to impose tort liability on the Owner, 02200
or any of their officers, agents, representatives, or employees.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Comply with all requirements of local, county and state agencies.

2. Provide an erosion control plan in compliance with all special erosion control regulations, Best Management Practices (BMP's) and ordinances. See Section 01503.

3. CEQA mitigation measures. See Supplementary Conditions.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection:

1. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling.

2. Do not remove trees from outside excavation or fill areas unless authorized by the Engineer; protect from permanent damage by construction.

3. Protect Work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the Project has been completed.

B. Weather:

1. Do not backfill or construct fills or embankments during freezing weather or during periods of heavy rainfall when soil moisture conditions will not permit achieving required compaction.

2. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill, fill area or embankment.

3. Do not backfill or construct fill or embankments on frozen surfaces.

4. Jobsite elevation is approximately 1390± feet above mean sea level.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Gradation Curves:

1. Coarse base rock.

2. Drain gravel.

3. Road base.

B. Dewatering:

1. Proposed equipment.

2. Well or sump location, size, and details of construction.

3. Size and layout of discharge headers.

C. Imported Material Acceptance

1. All tests necessary for the Contractor to locate acceptable imported material shall be made by the Contractor. Certification that the material conforms to the Specification requirements along with copies of the test results from a qualified commercial testing laboratory shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 30 days before the materials are required for use. All aggregate samples shall be furnished by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s sole expense. Samples shall be representative and be clearly marked to show the source of the material and the intended use on the project. Sampling of the aggregate source shall be done by the Contractor to the Engineer. No imported materials shall be delivered to the site until the proposed source and materials test have been tentatively accepted in writing by the 02200
engineer.

2. Final acceptance will be based on the tests made on samples of material taken for the completed and compacted course. The completed course is defined as a course or layer that is ready for the next layer or the next phase of construction. All testing for final acceptance shall be performed by the engineer.

3.If tests conducted by the Contractor or the Engineer indicate that the material does not meet Specification requirements, material placement will be terminated until corrective measures are submitted and accepted by the Engineer. Material which does not conform to the Specification requirements and is placed in the work shall be removed and replaced at the contractor’s sole expense. Sampling and testing performed by the contractor shall be done at the contractor’s sole expense. Retesting of failed test sections performed by the Engineer will be charged to the Contractor in accordance with the Geotechnical Engineer’s current rate schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Classification of Excavated Materials:

1. Remove and handle excavated materials regardless of its type, character, composition, condition, or depth.

B. No blasting allowed due to proximity of essential treatment plant facilities.

C. Fills and Embankments:

1. Crushed rock: ASTM C33, Size No. 67.

2. Aggregate base: CalTrans Class II aggregate base.
a. R-value of 78
b. Sand equivalent of 65 min
c. Durability index of 80 min

3. Graded gravel: ASTM C33, size No. 467 free of dust, clay, or trash.

4. Earth/Native Fill:
a. To the maximum extent practical use excess earth from excavation for engineered fills and embankments.
b. Obtain additional material from offsite locations providing material complying with Specifications for respective types of fills.
c. Free from rocks or stones larger than three (3) inches in greatest dimension and free from brush, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and other deleterious materials. d. Organic content: 2 percent maximum.
e. Acceptable to Engineer.
f. No rocks or stones in upper 18 inches of fill or embankment. g. Where allowed, distribute rocks and stones through the fill to not interfere with compaction.

5. Engineered Fill:
a. Earth, as modified below.
b. Imported or on-site native soils
02200
c. Where excess earth from excavation onsite utilized, it shall be free of wood, grass, roots, broken concrete, stones, trash, or debris of any kind. d. No rocks, clods, and hard lumps larger than three (3) inches in greatest dimension with less than 15 percent larger than 1-inch in maximum dimension. e. Moisture content uniformly distributed and such that maximum density of compacted soil will be obtained.
f. Common Fill
a. maximum plasticity index of 15.
g. Select Fill
a. Liquid Limit Less than 40 and maximum plasticity index of 15 b. 100 percent passing 2-inch sieve and less than 30 percent passing Number 200 sieve

6. Structural Backfill (backfill placed within 2 feet-0 inches of proposed structures unless
otherwise specified):
a. CalTrans ¾ IN Class II aggregate base.
b. Moisture content uniformly distributed and such that maximum density of compacted soil will be obtained.

7. Structural Fill:
a. ¾ inch clean crushed graded gravel.
b. Locations under footings and building slabs as shown on contract plans.

8. Imported fill:
a. Free of vegetation, debris, and other deleterious material. b. Organic content: Two (2) percent maximum.
c. Plasticity index no greater than 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM D4318. d. “R” value no less than 20.
e. Non-expansive.
f. Gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM D 422 as follows: Sieve Size (Sq. Openings) % Passing by Weight
4 inches 90-100

2.5 inches 90 - 100
No. 4 90 - 100
No. 200 10 - 60
g. Optimum moisture content uniformly distributed such that maximum density ofsoil will be obtained per ASTM D1557.
h. Furnish all fill as necessary to complete the project.

D. Geotextile Filter Fabric:

1. Structural: Mirafi 180N, Supac 8NP or equal.

2. Geotextile fabric used in conjunction with crushed rock or gravel beneath structures shall be AMOCO 4551 or equal.
02200
E. Coarse base rock:

1. Granular material, maximum size 3 inches.

2. Less than 10 percent passing 1 inch sieve.

3. Free of dust, clay, or trash.

4. Compact with vibratory plate compactor.

E Drain gravel:

1. Crushed rock.

2. Granular material, maximum size 1-1/2 inches.

3. At least 50 percent retained on the No. 4 sieve.

4. less than 5 percent retained on the No. 200 sieve.

5. Rock beneath concrete slabs, maximum size 3/4-inch.

F. Road Base:

1. ASTM specification for Class II aggregate base.

2. Sieve Size % Passing
Sieve 1" 100
3/4" 90-100
#4 35-55
#30 10-30
#200 2-9

3. CalTrans Class II gradation.

4. Compact to at least 95 percent of the relative compaction based on the ASTM D1557-92 test method.

G. Gravel Road Surfacing:

1. Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 26-1.02A, Class 2 Aggregate Base, 3/4- inch Maximum.

2. Minimum three inches thick.

H. Landscaping Gravel Surfacing:

1. Weed Control Fabric
a. Weed control fabric shall be manufactured from thermally spun bonded polypropylene fabric and shall conform to the following:

Specification Minimum Requirement
Grab Tensile Strength 59 kg
Grab Elongation 60%
UV Resistance 70% @ 150
hours Mass 102
grams/square meter
02200
b. Staples shall be 50 mm wide, 200 mm in length, and 11 gauge wire.

2. Gravel: Gravel shall consist of crushed rock and shall conform to the following requirements:

Grading Requirements
Sieve Size Percent
Passing 2 inch 100
1 ½ inch 90-100
1 inch
¾ inch 50- 85
#4 25-45
#30 10-25
#200 2-9
I. Rip Rap

1. Where shown on drawings

2. Per Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 72-2, Rock Slope Protection a. Method B Placement; “Light” rock gradation

3. Lay riprap over Caltrans specified geotextile material.

4. Excavate footing trench at toe of slope per Caltrans Standard Specification 72-

2.03 Construction
PART 3 – EXECUTION

1.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall do all grading, placement of fill or excavation as required to completely grade site to lines and grades shown, and to provide for the indicated drainage. Where finished grade conforms to existing grade, the ground shall be scarified, re-compacted, and graded-off evenly with existing grade.

1.2 INSPECTION
A. Field verify the location of all underground utilities, pipelines and structures. Special attention is directed to existing pipes and electrical conduits on site, which must remain in service throughout construction.

1. Clear sites to be occupied by permanent construction of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings, and other objectionable material and debris.

2. Grub stumps.

3. Clean and strip subgrade for fills and embankments of surface vegetation, sod, and organic topsoil.

4. Remove waste materials from site and dispose weekly.

5. No burning onsite is allowed.
02200

1.3 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Exact locations of underground facilities are not shown on the plans. No “potholing” excavations were made to verify the locations of existing underground facilities.

B. The contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert at 811 and make other investigations as may be required to determine if underground utilities might interfere with the work to be performed. The Contractor shall excavate and locate (pothole) existing pipelines, conduits, and facilities within two feet of a proposed excavation.

C. The known existing buried utilities and pipelines are shown on the Drawings in their approximate location. The Contractor shall exercise care in avoiding damage to all utilities and will be held responsible for repair if damaged. There is no guarantee that all utilities or obstructions are shown, or that locations indicated are accurate. Utilities are piping, conduits, wire, cable, ducts, maintenance holes, pull boxes and the like, located at the project site and adjoining construction locations.

D. Check on Locations: Contact all affected utility owners and request them to locate their respective utilities prior to the start of excavation (contact Underground Service Alert). The utility owner shall be given 7 days written notice prior to commencing excavation. If a utility owner is not equipped to locate its utility, the Contractor shall locate it.

E. Clearly paint the location of all affected utility underground pipes, conduits, and other utilities on the pavement or identify the location with suitable markers if not on pavement. In addition to the location of metallic pipes and conduits, non-metallic pipe, ducts and conduits shall also be similarly located using surface indicators, and detection tape if present and shall then be similarly marked.

F. Prior to the preparation of piping shop drawings, or the excavating for any structures, the Contractor shall locate and uncover these existing utilities to a point 1 foot below the utility.

Submit a report identifying each underground utility and its depth and location. Any variation in the actual elevations and the indicated elevations shall be brought to the Engineer’s attention.

Provide 72 hours-notice to Owner prior to commencing exploration or potholing activities.

G. Excavations around underground electrical ducts and conduits shall be performed using extreme caution to prevent injury to workmen or damage to electrical ducts or conduits. Similar precautions shall be exercised around gas lines and telephone cables.

H. Interferences: Both horizontal and vertical interferences may occur at locations other than shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer. The Contractor may be requested to submit a method to correct the interferences. The Engineer will provide the selected method for correcting said interferences to the Contractor. Payment for interferences that are not shown on the plans, nor which may be inferred from surface indications, shall be in accordance with the provisions of the Supplemental General Provisions
I. Any necessary relocations of utilities, whether shown on the Drawings or not, shall be coordinated with the affected utility. The Contractor shall perform the relocation only if instructed to do so in writing from the utility and the Engineer.

J. Shutdowns: Planned utility service shutdowns shall be accomplished during period of minimum use. In some cases this may require night or weekend work. Such work shall be at no additional cost to the owner. Program work so that service will be restored in the minimum possible time, 02200
and shall cooperate with the utility companies in reducing shutdowns of utility systems to a minimum. See Construction Sequencing Spec 01015 for additional details.

1. Disconnections: No utility shall be disconnected without prior written approval from the utility owner. When it is necessary to disconnect a utility, the Contractorshall give the utility owner not less than 72 hours notice when requesting written approval. The Contractor shall program his work so that service will be restored in the minimum possible time.

K. Overhead Facilities: Overhead lines may exist in the project area and must be flagged and protected by the Contractor from damage. There are existing overhead electric and telephone transmission lines at the site. These overhead utilities are not shown on the Drawings. Extreme caution shall be used when working in the vicinity of overhead utilities so as to prevent injury to workmen or damage to the utilities. The Contractor shall be required to comply with the applicable provisions of the California Construction Safety Orders when working anywhere on this project.

1.4 OBSERVATION OF STAINED OR ODOROUS SOIL
A. Contractor shall notify Engineer and immediately stop work in an area if soil, debris, water or other substances at an area of the Site (“Affected Area”) are observed, uncovered, or otherwise discovered because the soil, concrete or debris is discolored, oily or exhibits an odor. Promptly confirm this oral notice in writing. The owner will consider such conditions and determine a course of action. The Contractor shall continue to work in areas not affected and shall resume work in the Affected Area only after being notified by the Engineer.

1.5 PERFORMANCE - GENERAL
A. General:

1. Perform Work in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions against hazard.

2. Provide adequate working space and clearances for Work performed within excavations and for installation and removal of concrete forms.

3. Do not undercut excavation faces for extended footings.

4. Clean subgrades of loose material before concrete is placed thereon.

5. Preservation of trees:
a. Do not remove trees outside fill or excavated areas, except as authorized by Engineer. b. Protect trees left standing from permanent damage by construction operation. c. Trim standing trees as directed by Engineer.

6. Except as otherwise authorized, indicated, or specified, replace all material excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings, slabs on grade and foundations with concrete placed at the same time and monolithic with the concrete above.

7. Remove soft soil materials, loose materials, wood, debris and deleterious substances encountered within excavated areas.

8. All locations of temporary fill and stockpiling shall be submitted and approved by the owner in advance.

9. Perform all excavation of every description, regardless of the type, nature, or condition of 02200
material encountered as specified, shown on the contract drawings, or required to accomplish the construction.
a. Over-Excavation: Under all building slabs and other structures where loose native soils or expansive clays are encountered, remove soil to a depth of two feet. And replace with Engineered fill, uniformly moisture-conditioned to approximately 2 percent above optimum moisture content, and compacted to at least 95% relative compaction.
b. Scarification and Re-compaction: The bases of excavations shall be scarified to 12”, moisture conditioned to at least 95% relative compaction or as directed by the geotechnical engineer.
c. Following site stripping, grubbing, and any required over-excavation, areas to receive Engineered Fill or areas to be used for the future support of structures or concrete slabs supported-on-grade shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches, uniformly moisture conditioned to approximately 3 percent above the optimum moisture content, and compacted to at least 95 percent relative compaction. Within pavement areas (within 12 inches of finished subgrade) the scarified subgrade shall be compacted to at least 95 percent relative compaction.

B. Blasting: Not permitted.

C. Dewatering:

1. Contractor shall remove all sediment from water pumped or otherwise removed from excavations before disposing of it in a natural stream or water course (flowing or not).

2. All dewatering activities to be in accordance with local codes and regulations.

3. Provide and maintain adequate dewatering equipment to remove and dispose of surface and groundwater entering excavations, and other parts of the Work.

4. Keep each excavation dry during subgrade preparation and continually thereafter until the structure to be built or the pipe to be installed is completed to the extent that no damage from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other cause will result.

5. Dewater excavations which extend to or below groundwater by lowering and keeping the groundwater level beneath such excavation at least 12 inches below the bottom of the excavation.

6. Divert surface water or otherwise prevent it from entering excavated areas to the extent practical without damaging adjacent property.

7. Contractor is responsible for the condition of any pipe or conduit he uses for drainage; all drainage pipes shall be left clean and free of sediment.

8. Obtain all required local and State permits required to discharge water pumped from the excavations.

9. Provide stable excavation slopes, walls and bottom.

10. Filter native soil and prevent loss of ground from dispersion and erosion

11. Prevent soil piping and groundwater boring through the excavation bottom

12. Prevent damaging settlement to nearby structures, utilities, and pipelines

13. Dewatering to be installed and removed in accordance with governing agency

14. Allow for controlled release of groundwater to its static level in a manner that prevents 02200
disturbance of the bottom soils and prevents flotation or movement of structures, pipelines or utilities
D. Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing:

1. Reference General Conditions.

2. Provide proper and substantial sheeting, shoring and bracing, as required, to prevent caving or sliding, to protect workmen and the Work, and to protect existing structures and facilities.

3. Design and build sheeting, shoring and bracing to withstand all loads that might be caused by earth movement or pressure, and to be rigid, maintaining shape and position under all circumstances.

4. Submit sheet pile cut-off wall design calculations, stamped by a California registered professional engineer.

5. Do not pull trench sheeting before backfilling.

6. All sheeting, shoring and bracing in accordance with OSHA and UBC requirements.

7. All sheet pile cut-off walls to be removed at the end of the Project.

E. Stabilization:

1. Thoroughly compact and consolidate subgrades for concrete structures so they remain firm, dense and intact during required construction activities.

2. Remove all mud and muck during excavation.

3. Reinforce subgrades with crushed rock or gravel if they become mucky during construction activities, as directed by Engineer.

4. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades are to be at or below subgrade elevations indicated on Drawings.

5. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6 to 8 inches and prior to subgrade compaction, except as otherwise indicated on drawings.

F. Crushed Rock or Gravel Fills: (non-trench)

1. Place on suitably prepared subgrade.

2. Compacted by vibration.

3. Where covered with concrete, grade gravel to required subgrade:
a. Cover with polyethylene film where indicated on Drawings.

G. General Fill Requirements: (non-trench)

1. Maximum un-compacted lift of all fill areas: 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on drawings.

2. Compact with mechanical tampers approved by the Soils Consultant or Engineer.

3. Compaction by inundation by water is not permitted.

4. Backfill both sides of foundation walls at the same time.

5. Backfill retaining wall structures only after all walls and support slabs of confining structures are complete and the concrete has reached its 28-day strength. 02200

6. Use small hand operated compactor within 3 feet of walls.

7. Do not backfill water bearing or secondary containment structures until leak test on structures is complete and accepted by Engineer.

8. Use of Flowable Fill shall be allowed only where shown on the Drawings. Contractor may use Flowable Fill in other locations as approved by the Engineer.

9. Place geotextile filter fabric between all open graded material and existing soil, structural fill, etc.

H. Roadway Excavation:

1. Excavate for roadways, drives and parking areas per the lines, grades, cross sections and dimensions indicated on Drawings.

2. Excavate unsuitable material from the subgrade.

3. After shaping, roll subgrade compacted to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D1557-latest revision to a minimum depth of six (6) inches.

4. Reshape and wet as required.

5. Remove soft or otherwise unsuitable material and replace with suitable material.

I. Structural Compaction under footing and floors:

1. Clear and grub area to be filled.

2. Subgrade preparation:
a. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, scarify to depth of eight (8) inches minimum until free of ruts and hummocks, uniform and free of large clods. b. Bring to optimum moisture content.
c. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density as determined per ASTM D1557-latest revision.

3. Structural Fill Placement and Compaction:
a. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, place structural fill material (3/4 inch clean crushed gravel) in approximate horizontal layers, eight (8) inches maximum uncompacted depth. b. Spread and level material deposited in piles and windrows before compacting. c. Compact each layer only when material has the best practicable uniform moisture content for satisfactory compaction.
d. Add water and work each layer to obtain the uniform moisture content and adequate compaction.
e. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or other means acceptable to Engineer to 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D1557. f. Alter compaction methods if material fails to meet specified density. g. Where a trench passes through a fill or embankment:
1) Place and compact fill and embankment to 12 inches above top of the pipe before excavating the trench.

4. Structural Backfill Placement and Compaction:
02200
a. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, place structural backfill material (Class II AB) within two feet of structures, in approximate horizontal layers, eight (8) inches maximum un-compacted depth, unless otherwise indicated on drawings. b. Spread and level material deposited in piles and windrows before compacting. c. Compact each layer only when material has the best practicable uniform moisture content for satisfactory compaction.
d. Add water and work each layer to obtain the uniform moisture content and adequate compaction.
e. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or other means acceptable to Engineer to 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D1557. f. Alter compaction methods if material fails to meet specified density. g. Where a trench passes through a fill or embankment:
1) Place and compact fill and embankment to 12 inches above top of the pipe before excavating the trench.

J. Fills and Embankments Including Structural Fill: (non-trench)

1. Clear and grub area to be filled.

2. Subgrade preparation:
a. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, scarify to depth of six (6) inches until free of ruts and hummocks, uniform and free of large clods.
b. Bring to optimum moisture content.
c. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density as determined per ASTM D1557- latest revision.

3. Placement and compaction:
a. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, place in approximate horizontal layers, eight
(8) inches maximum un-compacted depth.
b. Spread and level material deposited in piles and windrows before compacting. c. Compact each layer only when material has the best practicable uniform moisture content for satisfactory compaction.
d. Add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work each layer to obtain the uniform moisture content and adequate compaction.
e. Thoroughly compact each layer by rolling or other means acceptable to Engineer to 95 percent of maximum dry density at optimum moisture content, ASTM D1557. f. Alter compaction methods if material fails to meet specified density. g. Where a trench passes through a fill or embankment:
1) Place and compact fill and embankment to 12 inches above top of the pipe before excavating the trench.

K. Structural Backfill: (non-trench)

1. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, maximum un-compacted thickness of layers:

Eight
02200
(8) inches.

2. Compact with mechanical, platform-type tampers.

3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D1557.

4. Use roller for compaction if necessary to prevent damage to structure and desired density can be obtained.

5. Compaction by inundation by water not permitted.

6. If trench passes through a structure backfill, compact backfill to an elevation 12 inches above top of pipe before trenching.

7. Do not deposit or compact tamped or otherwise mechanically compacted backfill in water.

8. Water settlement is not permitted.

9. No mechanized equipment is to be used within 3 feet of structure.

10. Take particular care to compact backfill which will be beneath pipes, drives, roads, parking areas, curbs, gutters or other surface construction of gutters.

11. Compact backfill adequately to support items constructed or placed thereon.

L. Disposal of Excess Excavated Materials:

1. Except as otherwise permitted, dispose of excess excavated materials away from the site of the Work.
a. Contractor to dispose of material in a suitable location, approved to accept excess excavation, per all state and local regulations.

M. Final Grading:

1. After completion of all other outside Work and after backfilling is completed and settled, bring to grade at the indicated elevations,slopes and contours, all areas of the site to be graded.

2. Graders and other power equipment may be used for final grading and slope dressing if the result is uniform and equivalent to hand Work.

3. Grade all surfaces for effective drainage.

4. Provide a one (1) percent minimum slope except as otherwise required.

5. Place topsoil at locations and to limits indicated on Drawings.

6. Grade and surface to Engineer's satisfaction.

N. Gravel Landscaping

1. Weed Control Fabric
a. Immediately before placing fabric, surfaces to receive fabric must be free of loose or extraneous material and sharp objects that may damage the fabric during installation. b. After preparation of sub base, the soil shall be treated with dormant weed control. b. Align fabric and place in a wrinkle-free manner.
c. Overlap adjacent rolls of the fabric from 12 to 18 inches. Spread each overlapping roll in the same direction. Fasten fabric with staples flush with the fabric to prevent movement of fabric by placement of gravel mulch.
02200
d. Repair or replace fabric damaged during placement of gravel with sufficient fabric to comply with overlap requirements.

2. Gravel Landscaping Application
a. Do not place gravel during rainy conditions.
b. Place gravel and compact by rolling.
c. The finished gravel surface must be smooth and uniform, maintaining original flow lines, slope gradients, and contours of the job site.
d. Minimum 3 inches thick

3. 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. OWNER will pay for all laboratory and field tests to determine compliance of in-place and backfill materials and compaction with the Specifications.Contractorto coordinate field sampling schedule with Resident Inspector to provide the specified number of tests.

B. Fills and Embankment, Except Structural Fill:

1. Two modified Proctor compaction tests, ASTM D1557, or ASTM D2922, on each type of fill material.

2. One in-place compaction test for each 200 cubic yards of material placed.

C. Engineered Backfill and Fill:

1. Two modified Proctor compaction tests, ASTM D1557, and Two (2) in-place compaction tests, ASTM D2922, for each lift of material placed at locations required by Engineer.

2. Two (2) initial gradation tests for each type of material plus one (1) additional test for each 500 cubic yards of each material.

D. Subgrade:

1. Two (2) in-place density tests for each level of footing or foundation.

2. Test: Nuclear, ASTM D2922.

E. Retests of failed compaction shall be performed by the OWNER, but shall be paid for by the Contractor.

F. Geotechnical Engineer will certify earthwork performed according to plans and specifications prior to acceptance.

END OF SECTION
02201
SECTION 02201

TRENCHING, PIPE EMBEDMENT, AND BACKFILL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:

1. Clearing, grubbing and site preparation.

2. Removal and disposal of debris, including pipes and fittings.

3. Handling, storage, transportation and disposal of excavated material.

4. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and protection Work.

5. Pumping and dewatering trenches.

6. Backfilling.

7. Pipe embedment.

8. Potholing
a. Exact location of existing electrical conduit and potable water pipe are unknown
b. Exact location of operations building 4” sewer pipe is unknown c. Exact location of treated wastewater plant effluent pipe is unknown d. Potholing required for items a. and b. above prior to construction.

9. Appurtenant work.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Labor Code 6705 – Protection of Workers in Excavations:

As required by Section 6705 of the California Labor Code and in addition thereto, whenever work under the Contract involves the excavation of any trench or trenches 5 feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit for acceptance by the Owner or by a registered civil or structural engineer, employed by the Owner, to whom authority to accept has been delegated, in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for work protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation, of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer employed by the Contractor, and all costs therefore shall be included in the price named in the Contract for completion of the Work as set forth in the Contract Documents. Nothing in this Section shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping, or other protective system less effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders. Nothing in this Section shall be construed to impose tort liability on the Owner, or any of their officers, agents, representatives, or employees.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
02201

1. Comply with all requirements of local, county and state agencies.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Protection:

1. Protect adjacent structures and surrounding areas from damage during excavation, filling, and backfilling and concrete pours.

2. Do not remove trees from outside excavation or fill areas unless authorized by the Engineer; protect from permanent damage by construction.

3. Protect Work from erosion or other similar types of damage until the Project has been completed.

4. Protect all property corners and evidence thereof.

5. Protect all existing underground utilities, except where as specified to be removed.

6. The project's property boundaries shall be clearly delineated by the use of orange temporary construction fencing. Where work is being done in an off-site easement, the property owner shall be notified 48- hours prior to beginning any work. Extreme care shall be taken to protect both the existing project site and all adjacent improvements from damage. The Contractor shall provide and install suitable safeguards approved by the owner to protect objects from injury or damage. Any damage resulting from the construction shall be repaired or replaced in a timely manner at the Contractor's expense. (Refer to Cal Trans Standards Section 7-1.12 "Responsibility for Damage").

B. Weather:

1. Do not backfill during freezing weather or during periods of heavy rainfall when soil moisture conditions will not permit achieving required compaction.

2. Do not use frozen materials, snow, or ice in any backfill.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Gradation Curves

1. Submit for all imported materials and as directed by Geotechnical engineer.

B. Potholing Report:

1. The Contractor shall pothole utilities that cross and/or potentially conflict with the proposed containment pit and underground utilities prior to any excavation. All utility crossings shall potholed a minimum of two weeks in advance of any work occurring to keep the project within the required time frames and to document depth andlocation versus that shown on the plans. Contractor shall provide the Owner a Potholing Report, two weeks in advance of any work occurring, highlighting any unknown utilities and/or the differences in elevation or location of existing utilities. This may require a full-time potholing crew working in parallel with the pipe installation. Costs associated with any utility conflicts resulting from inadequate potholing effort shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Do not prepare any shop drawings for, or make final order for, or design any pipe materials for any particular section of pipeline and valve vault(s) until all utilities in that section of pipeline have been exposed, and until such time as no interferences are found between said existing utilities and the proposed pipeline alignment. If interferences are found in any 02201
particular section of pipeline, do not prepare any shop drawings for, or make final order for, or design any pipe materials for that particular section of pipeline until the pipeline alignment has been modified by the Engineer to eliminate all such interferences.

2. The number and location of the potholes to be made shall be determined by the Contractor in advance and submitted in writing to the Engineer. If such conflicts are discovered, they shall be immediately reported to the Engineer.

3. Submit report to Engineer with potholing results:
a. Utility location in Plan.
b. Material type.
c. Material size (diameter)
d. Utility depth, IE.

4. Submit potholing report to Engineer at least 2 weeks in advance of desired work by Contractor.

C. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)/Sediment and Erosion Control Measures:

The SWPPP shall be implemented at the appropriate level to protect water quality at all times, throughout the life of the project. Non-storm water BMPs must be implemented throughout the year. The dynamic nature of construction allows for, and may require, changes to the SWPPP based on the particular nature of the storm should the Plan not be effective. Any deviation from the approved SWPPP shall be reported in writing to the Engineer so the appropriate notice can be sent to the Regional Water Quality Board
D. Submit an electronic copy of a report from a testing laboratory verifying that backfill material conforms to the specified gradations of characteristics for granular material, imported sand, rock refill, for foundation stabilization, and water.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Classification of Excavated Materials:

1. None.

2. Remove and handle excavated materials regardless of its type, character, composition, condition, or depth.

3. No blasting allowed due to proximity of essential treatment plant facilities.

B. Topsoil:

1. Native material removed and stockpiled before excavation.

2. Free from trash, debris and surface vegetation.

C. Pipe Embedment:

1. Type "A" Material: 3/8 inch minus imported screened sand with a minimum sand equivalent of 50 per CAL TEST 217-G. All gradations are to be approved by the Engineer 02201
prior to construction.

2. Type "B" Material: Class 2 Aggregate Base Rock per Caltrans specifications.

3. Type "C" Material: 1-lnch uniform crushed or non-crushed drain rock free of organic matter.

Ground water conditions require Type "C" material per approval of Engineer. Drain rock to be wrapped in geotextile fabric.

4. Type "D" Material: Crushed rock or soil-rock mixture (native) not to exceed 3 inches. Up to a 6 inch minus material may be used with special considerations and conditions approved by Engineer. The material shall be completely free of wood, roots, or other deleterious
materials. Backfill must have enough fines between a No. 8 and No. 200 sieve to prevent
nesting and reduce water transmissivity. Approvals by soils engineer must be acquired prior to use of materials. Not to be used within 12 inches of pipe without Engineer approval. Compaction by vibratory equipment or other approved devices. Engineer may require that the material be screened.

5. Type "E" Material: Imported and/or non-import mixture of crushed material, screened, nonwashed with minimum sand equivalent of 30 per CAL TEST 217-G. All material free of wood, roots or other deleterious materials. Material to be ½ inch minus for 12-inch pipe or smaller and ¾ inch minus for 16 inch and larger pipe. Material gradations to include some medium and fine sand (No. 8 to No. 200 Mesh Sieves). A layer of geotextile fabric shall be placed between the pipes and intermediate backfill zone for material not meeting Type "A" or ”E” material specifications.

6. Type "F" (Controlled Density Fill): A low strength, concrete slurry type backfill material made with a mixture of cement, fly ash, sand and aggregate. Compressive strength; 28 days between 50 psi and 200 psi.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

6.1 INSPECTION
A. Field verify the location of all underground utilities, pipelines and structures. Special attention is directed to existing pipes and electrical conduits on site, which must remain in service throughout construction.

1. Clear sites to be occupied by permanent construction of logs, trees, roots, brush, tree trimmings, and other objectionable material and debris.

2. Grub stumps.Clean and strip subgrade for fills and embankments of surface vegetation, sod, and organic topsoil.

3. Remove waste materials from site and dispose weekly.

4. No burning onsite is allowed.

6.2 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Locations of underground facilities shown on the plans are based upon record information and no guarantee is made as to the accuracy of the locations shown. The contractor shall notify Underground Service Alert (800) 642-2444 and make other investigations as may be required to 02201
determine if underground utilities might interfere with the work to be performed. Ifsuch conflicts are discovered, they shall be immediately reported to the Engineer by the Contractor. No excavations were made to verify the locations of existing underground facilities.

B. The Contractor shall excavate and locate (pothole) existing pipelines, conduits and facilities within two feet of a proposed excavation. Provide 72 hours-notice to Owner prior to commencing exploration or potholing activities.

1. The known existing buried utilities and pipelines are shown on the Drawings in their approximate location. The Contractor shall exercise care in avoiding damage to all utilities and will be held responsible for repair if damaged. There is no guarantee that all utilities or obstructions are shown, or that locations indicated are accurate. Utilities are piping, conduits, wire, cable, ducts, maintenance holes, pull boxes and the like, located at the project site and adjoining construction locations. Conflicts between water and sewer pipes shall be properly protected with and will adhere to California Department of Public Health standards.

2. Costs associated with any utility conflicts resulting from inadequate potholing effort shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3. heck on Locations (Potholing): Contact all affected utility owners and request them to locate their respective utilities prior to the start of “potholing” procedures (contact Underground Service Alert). The utility owner shall be given 7 days written notice prior to commencing potholing. If a utility owner is not equipped to locate its utility, the Contractor shall locate it.

4. Clearly paint the location of all affected utility underground pipes, conduits and other utilities on the pavement or identify the location with suitable markers if not on pavement.

In addition to the location of metallic pipes and conduits, non-metallic pipe, ducts and conduits shall also be similarly located using surface indicators, and detection tape if present and shall then be similarly marked.

5. After the utility survey is completed, commence “potholing” to determine the actual location and elevation of all utilities where crossings, interferences, or connections to new pipelines or other facilities are shown on the Drawings, marked by the utility companies, or indicated by surface signs. Prior to the preparation of piping shop drawings, or the excavating for any new pipelines or structures, the Contractor shall locate and uncover these existing utilities to a point 1 foot below the utility. Submit a report identifying each underground utility and its depth and location. Any variation in the actual elevations and the indicated elevations shall be brought to Engineer’s attention.

6. Excavations around underground electrical ducts and conduits shall be performed using extreme caution to prevent injury to workmen or damage to electrical ducts or conduits.

Similar precautions shall be exercised around gas lines and telephone cables. a. Backfill after completing potholing. In existing pavement, pave with 1 inch of cold mix asphalt concrete.

7. Interferences: If an underground utility lies close to or will interfere with the proposed improvement, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer. Contractor may be requested to submit a method to correct the interferences. The Engineer will provide the selected method for correcting said interferences to the Contractor.

8. Any necessary relocations of utilities, whether shown on the Drawings or not, shall be coordinated with the affected utility. The Contractor shall perform the relocation only if 02201
instructed to do so in writing from the utility and the Engineer. The Contractor shall also protect any utilities encountered in the work.

9. Shutdowns: Planned utility service shutdowns shall be accomplished during period of minimum use. In some instances, this may require night or weekend work. Such work shall be at no additional cost to the CLMSD. Program work so that service will be restored in the minimum possible time, and shall cooperate with the utility companies in reducing shutdowns of utilities to a minimum.

10. Disconnections: No utility shall be disconnected without prior written approval from the utility owner. When it is necessary to disconnect a utility, the Contractor shall give the utility owner not less than 72 hours of notice when requesting written approval. The Contractor shall program his work so that service will be restored in the minimum possible time.

11. Overhead Facilities: Overhead lines exist in the project area and must be flagged and protected by the Contractor from damage. These overhead utilities are not shown on the Drawings. Extreme caution shall be used when working in the vicinity of overhead utilities so as to prevent injury to workmen or damage to the utilities. The Contractor shall be required to comply with the applicable provisions of the California Construction Safety Orders when working anywhere on this project.

6.3 OBSERVATION OF STAINED OR ODOROUS SOIL
A. Contractor shall notify Engineer and immediately stop work in an area if soil, debris, water or other substances at an area of the Site (“Affected Area”) are observed, uncovered, or otherwise discovered because the soil, concrete or debris is discolored, oily or exhibits an odor. Promptly confirm this oral notice in writing. The Owner will consider such conditions and determine a course of action. The Contractor shall continue to work in areas not affected and shall resume work in the Affected Area only after being notified by the Engineer.

6.4 PERFORMANCE - GENERAL
A. General:

1. Perform Work in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions against hazard.

2. Provide adequate working space and clearances for Work performed within excavations and for installation and removal of concrete forms.

3. Clean subgrades of loose material before concrete is placed thereon.

7. Remove soft soil materials, loose materials, wood, debris and deleterious substances encountered within excavated areas.

B. Blasting: Not permitted.
02201
C. Topsoil:

1. Remove and stockpile sufficient topsoil to surface to a minimum depth of 4 inches fill, embankment and other areas where the original topsoil will be removed or damaged.

2. At the completion of other Work in each area, place and grade topsoil to Engineer's satisfaction.

D. Sheeting, Shoring and Bracing:

1. The Contractor shall submit shoring plans to the Engineer prior to performing any trench excavation over 5 feet. The Engineer’s review of these plans shall not relieve the contractor of his/her responsibility for conforming to all laws concerning excavations. The Contractor shall obtain an excavation permit from OSHA for any excavations over 5 feet. The trench width shall not be more than 2 feet wider than the outside diameter of the pipeline or less than the OSHA requirements.

2. Provide proper and substantial sheeting, shoring and bracing, as required, to prevent caving or sliding, to protect workmen and the Work, and to protect existing structures and facilities.

3. Design and build sheeting, shoring and bracing to withstand all loads that might be caused by earth movement or pressure, and to be rigid, maintaining shape and position under all circumstances.

4. Submit sheet pile cut-off wall design calculations, stamped by a California registered professional engineer.

5. Do not pull trench sheeting before backfilling.

6. All sheeting, shoring and bracing in accordance with OSHA and UBC requirements.

7. All sheet pile cut-off walls to be removed at the end of the Project.

E. Stabilization:

1. Thoroughly compact and consolidate subgradesfor trench bottoms so they remain firm, dense and intact during required construction activities.

2. Remove all mud and muck during excavation.

3. Reinforce subgrades with crushed rock or gravel if they become mucky during construction activities, as directed by Engineer.

4. Finished elevation of stabilized subgrades are to be at or below subgrade elevations indicated on Drawings.

5. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 6 to 8 inches and prior to subgrade compaction.

F. Trench Excavation:

1. Do not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work.

2. Except where tunneling is indicated on the Drawings, specified, or permitted by Engineer, excavate trenches by open cut from the surface.

3. Alignment, grade and minimum cover:
a. Excavate trenches so pipes can be laid straight at uniform grade without dips or bumps, between the terminal elevations indicated on the Drawings. 02201
b. Comply with pipe specification sectionsregarding vertical and horizontal alignment and maximum joint deflection.
c. Where grades or elevations are not fixed on the Drawings, excavate trenches to provide a minimum depth of backfill cover over top of the pipe:
1) 30 inchesfor water and wastewater piping unless otherwise specified on drawings. 2) Increase depth as required at vertical curves and for clearance beneath existing pipes, conduits, drains, drainage structures, or other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades.
3) Measure pipe cover depth vertically from top of pipe to finished ground or surface elevation, or to future lower surface elevations where indicated on Drawings.

4. Maintain excavation spoils on uphill side of trench and provide erosion containment measures on downhill side.

5. Limiting trench widths:
a. Excavate to a width which will provide adequate working space and pipe clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and placement of embedment. b. If needed to reduce earth loadsto preventsliding, cut banks back on slopes which extend not lower than one (1) foot above the top of the pipe. c. Stipulated minimum clearances are minimum clear distances, not minimum average distances.
d. Maximum trench width six (6) inches above the top of the installed pipe: Pipe O.D. plus 24 inches, or as otherwise indicated on drawings.
e. Minimum permissible clearances between installed pipe and trench wall:

Pipe Size Minimum Clearance
<=8 inches 4 inches
8 inches and Larger 6 inches

6. If the width of the lower portion of the trench exceeds the maximum permitted, provide pipe of adequate strength, special pipe embedment, or arch concrete encasement as required by loading conditions and as determined by Engineer.

7. Mechanical excavation:
a. Do not use where its operation would damage trees, buildings, culverts, or other existing property, structures, or utilities above or below ground; hand excavate only in such areas.
b. Use mechanical equipment of a type, design, and construction and operated so that:
1) Rough trench bottom elevation can be controlled.
2) Uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained from one (1) foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench. 3) Trench alignment is such that pipe is accurately laid to specified alignment and is centered in the trench with adequate clearance between pipe and trench sidewalls.
c. Do not undercut trench sidewalls.
02201

8. Excavation below pipe subgrade:
a. Except as otherwise required, excavate trenches below the underside of pipes as indicated on Drawings, according to pipe and soil type, to provide for installation of embedment pipe foundation material.
b. Pipe may not be laid directly on trench bottom.

9. Bell holes:
a. Excavate to provide adequate clearance for tools and methods of pipe installation. b. Do not allow any part of bells or couplings to contact the trench bottom, walls, or granular embedment when pipe is joined.

10. Open Trench: All trenches to be fully covered after working hours and daily with yellow tape during construction.

11. Unsuitable Trench Bottom: If the bottom of the trench is soft, yielding, or otherwise unsuitable as a foundation for the pipe in the opinion of the geotechnical engineer, or Resident Engineer, the unsuitable material shall be removed to the depth necessary to provide a stable and satisfactory foundation. Three-quarter inch crushed rock shall be placed in the trench to provide a stable foundation. The rock is in addition to the required pipe bedding used in the pipe zone. All rock shall be wrapped with approved geo-fabric.

G. Pipe Embedment:

1. Embed pipes above and below the bottom of pipe as indicated on Drawings and as specified.

2. Spread and surface grade embedment to provide continuous and uniform support beneath pipe at all points between bell holes or pipe joints.

3. Slightly disturbing finished subgrade surface during withdrawal of slings and lifting tackle is permissible.

4. After grading, aligning and placing pipe in final position, and shoring home, deposit and compact sufficient embedment under and around each side of the pipe and back of the bell or end thereof to hold the pipe in proper position and alignment during subsequent operations.

5. Place and compact embedment material uniformly and simultaneously on both sides of pipe to prevent lateral displacement.

6. Granular:
a. Maximum un-compacted thickness of layers: Six (6) inches. b. Compact by slicing with shovel or vibrating.

7. Compacted embedment:
a. Maximum un-compacted thickness of layers: eight (8) inches. b. Compact to 95 percent maximum density as determined by ASTM D1557. c. For Class C embedment, compact to top of pipe.

8. Jetting and ponding not permitted.

H. Trench Backfill:

1. Compacted backfill:
02201
a. Provide for the full depth of trench above embedment at all locations. b. Where the trench for one (1) pipe passes beneath the trench of another pipe, compact the backfill for the lower trench to the bottom of the upper trench. c. Finish the top portion beneath established sodded areas with 12 inches minimum, topsoil corresponding to, or better than, underlying adjacent sodded areas. d. Suitable job excavated material, or graded gravel, Contractor's option. e. Job excavated materials:
1) Place in eight (8)-inch maximum un-compacted thickness, uniform layers. 2) Increased layer thickness may be permitted for non-cohesive material if Contractor demonstrates to Engineer's satisfaction that specified compacted density will be achieved.
3) Use methods and equipment appropriate to the material to be compacted to prevent transmission of damaging shocks to pipe.
4) Roadways and under structures: Compact to 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content per ASTM D1557 or to 70 percent relative density per ASTM D4253 and D4254 when appropriate.
5) Other locations, compact to 90 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content per ASTM D1557 or to 70 percent of relative density per ASTM D4253 and D4254.
f. Graded gravel:
1) Deposit in uniform layers of 12 inches maximum un-compacted thickness. 2) Compact with suitable vibrating roller or platform vibrator to not less than 70 percent relative density per ASTM D4253 and D4254.

2. Water settled backfill: Not allowed.

3. Finish the top portion of backfill with at least 12 inches of topsoil corresponding to, or better than, that underlying adjoining areas.

I. Drainage Maintenance:

1. Do not backfill trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other traffic-ways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses prior to backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the traffic-way to prevent impounding water after pipe is laid.

2. Backfill so that water does not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches.

3. Remove materials deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the trench line immediately after backfilling is completed and restore ditches and water courses to original section, grade, and contours.

4. Do not obstruct surface drainage any longer than necessary.

J. Protection of Trench Backfill:

1. Protect backfill from erosion when trenches are constructed in ditches or other water course.

2. Install ditch checks where the ditch grade exceeds one (1) percent.

3. Minimum depth: Two (2) feet below the original ditch or water course bottom for the full 02201
bottom width.

4. Minimum width: 18 inches into the side slopes.

5. Minimum thickness: 12 inches.

K. Disposal of Excess Excavated Materials:

1. Distribute excess earth from excavations located in unimproved property directly over the pipe trench and within the pipeline right-of-way to a maximum depth ofsix (6) inches above the original ground surface elevation at and across the trench and sloping uniformly each way:
a. Carefully finish material thus wasted with a drag, blade machine, or other suitable tool to a smooth, uniform surface without obstructing drainage at any point. b. Do not waste excess excavated material in the above manner where the trench line crosses or is within a railroad, public road, or highway right-of-way. c. Distribute and level to thicknesses noted on the Drawings.

2. Dispose of excess excavated materials from excavations located in improved (including areas to receive pavement herein) property away from the site of the Work. a. Contractor to dispose of material in a suitable location, approved to accept excess excavation, per all state and local regulations.

L. Final Grading and Topsoil Replacement:

1. After completion of all other outside Work and after backfilling is completed and settled, bring to grade at the indicated elevations,slopes and contours, all areas of the site to be graded.

2. Graders and other power equipment may be used for final grading and slope dressing if the result is uniform and equivalent to hand Work.

3. Grade all surfaces for effective drainage.

4. Provide a one (1) percent minimum slope except as otherwise required.

5. Place topsoil at locations and to limits indicated on Drawings.

6. Grade and surface to Engineer's satisfaction.

M. Steel Trench Plates - Steel trench plates shall not be used over open trench areas without the approval of the Engineer. All steel plates shall be adequately restrained to eliminate shifting.

Steel plates do not eliminate the need for shoring. Temporary asphaltic plant mix ("cut-back·) at least one-foot in width shall be used for a transition on each edge of the plate. "Rough Road" or ''Bump" signs shall be installed 200-feet on each side before the steel plate. The sign shall only be mounted to an operable, lighted barricade for a maximum of 24 hours. The sign shall be mounted to a 4-inch x 4-inch post if the placement exceeds 24-hours N. Unless otherwise shown in the drawings or otherwise described in the specifications, relative compaction in the pipe trenches shall be as follows:

1. Pipe Base: 95% relative compaction.

2. Pipe Zone: 90% relative compaction.

3. Backfill in Trench Zone: 90% relative compaction. (Not Beneath Paving or Aggregate 02201
Base Access Roadways.)

4. Backfill in Trench Zone to Street Zone in Paved Areas or within Limits of Aggregate Base Roadways: 95% relative compaction.

5. Backfill in Street Zone in Paved Areas or within Limits of Aggregate Base Roadways:
95% relative compaction.

6. Refill for Foundation Stabilization: 95% relative compaction.

7. Refill for Over-excavation: 95% relative compaction.

6.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will pay for all laboratory and field tests to determine compliance of in-place and backfill materials and compaction with the Specifications. Contractor to coordinate field sampling schedule with Resident Inspector to provide the specified number of tests.

B. Pipe Embedment and Backfill:

1. Two initial gradation tests for each type of material plus one (1) additional test for each 500 cubic yards of each material.

2. Compaction Test Methods - The percent relative compaction of all testable trench backfill soil shall be determined by a combination of the following ASTM test methods:
a. ASTM D1557, Modified Proctor Compaction Curve or two (2) relative density tests, ASTM D4253 and D4254, as appropriate, for each type of embedment on backfill material proposed, except granular embedment material.
b. ASTM D1556, In-place Soil Density by The Sand Cone Replacement Method. c. ASTM D2216, Soil Moisture Content by The Convection Oven Method. ASTM D2922, In-place Soil Density by Nuclear Method.
d. ASTM D3017, In-place Soil Moisture Content by Nuclear Method. e. ASTM D4643, Soil Moisture Content by The Microwave Oven Method ASTM D4959, Soil Moisture Content by The Direct Heating Method.

3. Minimum of one (1) in-place compaction test, ASTM D2922, for every two (2)-foot depth of backfill per 100-foot interval will be required.

4. Contractor shall, when requested, excavate to the required depth so density tests may be taken and bring such excavationsto required density after testing at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Retests of failed compaction shall be performed by the Owner, but shall be paid for by the Contractor. No backfill work can be deemed approved until such time all compaction test have been approved and accepted by the Engineer.

END OF SECTION
02270
SECTION 02270

SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General: Erosion and sediment control shall closely adhere to the approved SWPP permit and conditions.

B. Scope:

1. Provide erosion control measures using Best Management Practices, including:
a. Soil erosion and sediment control.
b. Straw bale erosion control barriers.
c. Erosion control filter fences.

C. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawing, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340.

2. Earthwork: Section 02200.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:

1. Erosion control standards: “Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in Developing Areas” by the U.S. Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service, College Park, Maryland.

2. Comply with all local and State of California standards and regulations.

B. Mitigation Measures:

1. Mitigation of silt fencing and other Best Management Practice (BMP) erosion control measures in compliance with CEQA requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Detailed and dimensioned drawings and fabric specifications.

2. Manufacturer’s installation procedures and guidelines.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Straw bales:

1. New condition, twine tied and less than one year old.

B. Erosion control filter fabric:

1. Mirafi 100X, Exxon 100S or approved equal.
02270

2. Stakes for straw bales and filter fence: No. 4 reinforcing steel or 2-inch x 2-inch wood stakes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to General Stripping Topsoil and Excavating:

1. Install perimeter silt fence and straw bales around construction areas to contain runoff, in alignments shown on drawings:
a. Provide two stakes per bale.
b. First stake angled toward previously installed bale to keep ends tight against each other.
c. Replace bales as required to provide effective erosion control barrier throughout duration of construction.

2. Locate filter fence as shown on drawings:
a. Properly stake to provide continuous fully supported barrier. b. Overlap cut ends.
c. Bury bottom end to secure fabric.

3.2 DURING CONSTRUCTION PERIOD
A. Maintain straw bales and filter fences:

1. Inspect regularly especially after rainstorms.

2. Repair or replace damaged or missing items.

B. Do not disturb existing vegetation (grass and trees) outside of designated work areas.

C. Remove sediment from behind bales or filter fencing to prevent overtopping.

D. Seed and mulch all disturbed areas as soon as areas become ready.

3.3 NEAR COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Eliminate straw bales, filter fences traps, etc.

B. Grade to finished or existing grades.

C. Fine grade all remaining earth areas for positive drainage, then seed and mulch per Section 02485.

END OF SECTION
02513
SECTION 02513

ASPHALTIC CONCRETE VEHICULAR PAVING AND REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. General work included in this Section:

1. All asphaltic concrete vehicular paving for roads, parking areas and other incidental structures as indicated in the Contract Documents.

2. Repair existing pavements, roads, drive-ways, and curbs that are removed or damaged during construction to their original or better condition.

3. Refer to drawings for trench paving details along with limit of paving.

4. All work to comply with The City of Lakeport standard details and specifications.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Comply with all applicable requirements of The City of Lakeport B. Reference Standard:

1. Standard Specifications and Standard Plans for The City of Lakeport

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340.

B. The contractor shall submit asphalt concrete mix design with the submittal package.

C. The Contactor shall provide a copy of the delivery tags for all asphalt concrete incorporated into the work to the Owner’s Inspector.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations:

1. Do not apply when underlying surface is muddy, frozen, or wet.

2. Spreading and finishing.
a. Do not place tack coat or asphalt when temperature is below 48 DegF and falling or at any time when temperature is below 45 DegF. b. Place when above 40 DegF and rising or when temperature is above 48 DegF.

3. Do not apply pavement marking paint within 8 HRS of fog or rain or when below 45 DegF.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Concrete Pavement shall be constructed as shown on the Plans in conformance with the provisions of Section 39, "Hot Mix Asphalt" of the State Standard Specifications (City of Lakeport Standard Specifications Page 22)
02513
B. Asphaltic concrete: In accord with State/City Specifications and as described below:
a. Asphalt Concrete shall conform to the requirements for Type A, ½” Maximum, PG64-16 containing 25% RAP. No binder bump is allowed. HMA shall meet Caltrans 2024 Standard Specifications Section 39.

C. Thickness:
2 1. AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS.

D. Aggregate base.

1. 3/4 IN maximum, Class 2 aggregate base in accordance with the 2024 Caltrans Standard Specifications- Section 26.

2. Conform with State of California, DOT standards. State Standard Specification Sections 25 and 26 (City of Lakeport Standard Specifications Page 19) E. Seal Coat: Comply with 2024 Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 37-5 for parking lot seals.

F. Electrical Pull Box Extension and Traffic Lid.

1. Replacement for Existing

2. Provide ring and lid to match new pavement final grade

3. Per CALTRANS 2024 Standard Plans
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PAVING CONSTRUCTION
A. The Contractor shall place and compact replacement asphalt concrete paving in accordance with the State Specifications.

B. Construct to line, grade and typical section as indicated.

1. Proof-roll subgrade prior to placing base course.

2. Repair subgrade as required.

3. On properly compacted subgrade, install a compacted layer of aggregate base course in accord with State/City Specifications.
a. The average thickness shall equal design thickness as shown on plans. The minimum thickness shall be the design thickness minus ½”. The surface tolerance for aggregate base shall be +/- ½” in 10 feet.

4. Install an asphalt binder course, and an asphalt surface course, in accord with State/City Specifications.
a. The average thickness shall equal design thickness as shown on plans. The minimum thickness shall be the design thickness minus ¼”. The surface tolerance for HMA shall be +/- ¼” in 10 feet.

5. Install seal coat per State/City Specifications.

C. Construct in accord with State/City Specifications.

D. Tolerance of finished grade: 0.10 FT (30 mm) plus/minus from required elevations. 02513
E. Correct areas where "bird baths" occur to eliminate ponding conditions.

F. Asphalt curbs to be machine lain and homogenous with adjacent paving.

G. Raise existing electrical pull box to final pavement elevation and replace existing lid with traffic rated lid.

END OF SECTION
03100
SECTION 03100

CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cast-in-place concrete and grout.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. 116R, Cement and Concrete Terminology.
b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete.
c. 212.3R, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
d. 304R, Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. e. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods.
f. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting.
g. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting.
h. 318, Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. i. 347R, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A82, A1064 Standard Specification for Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
b. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement (Including Supplementary Requirements S1). c. A775, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. d. C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. e. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. f. C39, Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
g. C94, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. h. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete.
i. C143, Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. j. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
k. C157, Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic 03100
Cement Mortar and Concrete.
l. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. m. C172, Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. n. C173, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
o. C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
p. C260, Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. q. C289, Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method).
r. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.
s. C330, Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete.
t. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. u. C496, Standard Test Method for Splitting Tensile Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens.
v. C567, Standard Test Method for Unit Weight of Structural Lightweight Concrete.
w. C595, Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. x. C618, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete.
y. D1056, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
z. D1751, Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
aa. E329, Standard Specification for Agencies Engages in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction.

3. Federal Specification (FS):
a. CEGS 03300, Vegetable Fiber.

4. Corps of Engineers: Specification CRD-C572 Polyvinyl Waterstops.

5. State Standard Specifications: Standard Specifications for DOT State of California B. Quality Control:

1. Concrete testing agency.
a. Contractor to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory to:
1) Perform materials evaluation.
2) Design concrete mixes.
03100
b. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E329.

2. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design has been approved by Engineer.
a. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete that meets the requirements of this Specification.

3. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, job conditions, weather, strength test results, or other circumstances warrant.
a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved by Engineer.

4. Perform structural calculations as required to prove that all portions of the structure in combination with remaining forming and shoring system has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight plus the loads placed thereon.

C. Qualifications:

1. Ready mixed concrete batch plant certified by National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA).

2. Formwork, shoring and reshoring for slabs and beams except where cast on ground to be designed by a professional engineer currently registered in the states where the project is located.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Per ACI 116R except as modified herein:

1. Concrete fill: Non-structural concrete.

2. Concrete Testing Agency: Testing agency employed to perform materials evaluation, design of concrete mixes or testing of concrete placed during construction.

3. Exposed concrete: Exposed to view after construction is complete.

4. Indicated: Indicated by Contract Documents.

5. Lean concrete: Concrete with low cement content.

6. Nonexposed concrete: Not exposed to view after construction is complete.

7. Required: Required by Contract Documents.

8. Specified strength: Specified compressive strength at 28 days.

9. Submitted: Submitted to Engineer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:

1. See Section 01340.

2. Concrete mix designs proposed for use. Concrete mix design submittal to include the following information:
a. Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse aggregates. b. Test for aggregate organic impurities.
c. Test for deleterious aggregate per ASTM C289.
03100
d. Proportioning of all materials.
e. Type of cement with mill certificate for cement.
f. Type of fly ash with certificate of conformance to specification requirements. g. Slump.
h. Air content.
i. Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture proposed for use. j. 28-day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 318 and as indicated herein.
k. Shrinkage test results.
l. Standard deviation value for concrete production facility. m. Contractor's proposed pour sequence. Provide 1/4 IN = 1 FT - 0 IN minimum scaled drawings indicating:
1) Location of all construction joints.
2) Location and type of waterstops.
3) Any proposed deviations from Contract Drawings must be clearly indicated.
4) Reproductions of Contract Drawings are acceptable for this purpose.

3. Manufacturer and type of joint filler, joint sealant, curing agent and chemical floor hardener.

4. Manufacturer and type of bonding and patching mortar and bonding adhesive used at construction joints.

5. Manufacturer and type of nonshrink grout and the cure/seal compound required for the nonshrink grout.

6. Reinforcing steel: Show grade, sizes, number, configuration, spacing, location and all fabrication and placement details.
a. In sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing without having to make reference to Contract Drawings.
b. Obtain approval of shop drawings by Engineer before fabrication. c. Mill certificates.

7. Strength test results of in place concrete including slump, air content and concrete temperature.

B. Formwork Shop Drawings

1. Before starting concrete work, submit shop drawings of formwork showing size and thickness of members, dimensions and locations of openings and blockouts, vertical limits of concrete placements, horizontal lifts, plywood form pattern, proposed construction joints, form tie elevations and details, and any architectural features to be cast into the concrete. Incorporate the work of all trades.

2. This review is for the purpose of assessing the Contractor’s interpretation of the Contract Documents and will not include any considerations of the availability, 03100
suitability, constructability, or safety of concrete forming system.

3. Drawings and structural calculations for all concrete other than slabs on grade shall be submitted for record purposes only and not for review or approval. Formwork drawings and structural calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered in California. Where superplasticizers are used with Engineer’s approval, design formwork to resist full liquid head.

4. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design, installation, use, and safe removal of all formwork. The formwork design shall comply with all governing codes, all Federal, State, and local ordinances; and generally accepted engineering principles.

5. Submit drawings showing the installation and removal sequence and procedures to be used. Include weight of formwork, assumed construction load, proposed minimum concrete strength for stripping of formwork, size and type of reshores, reshore spacing pattern, number of levels of reshores, and assumed load per reshore at each level.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of Material:

1. Cement and fly ash:
a. Store in moistureproof, weathertight enclosures.
b. Do not use if caked or lumpy.

2. Aggregate:
a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or foreign materials.
b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching. c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
d. Do not use bottom 6 IN of stockpiles in contact with ground. e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use.

3. Admixtures:
a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage. b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use.

4. Reinforcing steel:
a. Support and store all rebars above ground.

B. Delivery:

1. Concrete:
a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load for ready-mixed concrete. b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at the time of delivery. c. Ticket to show:
1) Mix identification mark.
2) Quantity delivered.
03100
3) Amount of each material in batch.
4) Outdoor temp in the shade.
5) Time at which cement was added.
6) Numerical sequence of the delivery.
7) Amount of water added.

2. Reinforcing steel: Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal tags with permanent mark numbers.
a. Mark numbers to match shop drawing mark number.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Nonshrink grout:
a. Sika "SikaGrout 212."
b. Gifford Hill "Supreme Grout."
c. Master Builders "Masterflow 713."

2. Epoxy grout:
a. Master Builders "Brutem MPG."
b. Euclid Chemical Company, "High Strength Grout."
c. Fosroc, "Conbextra EPHF".

3. Expansion joint fillers:
a. Permaglaze Co.
b. Rubatex Corp.
c. Williams Products, Inc.

4. Waterstops, PVC:
a. Greenstreak Plastic Products, Inc.
b. W.R. Meadows, Inc.
c. Burke Company.

5. Form coating:
a. Richmond "Rich Cote."
b. Industrial Lubricants "Nox-Crete Form Coating."
c. Protex "Pro-Cote."

6. Prefabricated forms:
a. Simplex "Industrial Steel Frame Forms."
b. Symons "Steel Ply."
03100
c. Universal "Uniform."

7. Chemical Floor Hardeners.
a. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
b. Euclid Chemicals Inc.
c. Dayton Superior.

8. Bonding agents:
a. Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Master Builders Inc.
c. L&M construction Chemicals Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150 Type IP(MS), II, or V, Low Alkali (LA).

B. Fly Ash:

1. ASTM C618, Class F or Class C.

2. Nonstaining.
a. Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform light gray color. Specifier: May use 6 percent loss on ignition for non-air-entrained concrete.

3. Maximum loss on ignition: 4 percent.

4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients.

5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the State Highway Department in the state where the Project is located for use in concrete for bridges.

C. Admixtures:

1. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.

2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures:
a. ASTM C494 Type A through E.
b. Conform to provisions of ACI 212.3R.
c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved in writing by Engineer and at no cost to Owner.
d. Follow manufacturer's instructions.
e. Use chloride free admixtures only.

3. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials and admixtures by weight percent of cement:
a. 0.10 all concrete.

4. Do not use calcium chloride.

5. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618.

6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design.
03100
D. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter.

E. Aggregates:

1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33, except as modified below.

2. Fine aggregate: Clean natural sand.
a. No manufactured or artificial sand.

3. Coarse aggregate: Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert granular material. a. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent.

4. Gradation of coarse aggregate:
a. Lean concrete and concrete topping: Size #7.
b. All other concrete: Size #57 or #67.

F. Concrete Grout:

1. Nonshrink grout:
a. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed with only water to be added. b. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. c. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation.
d. Minimum compressive strength of nonshrink grout at 28 days: 6500 psi.

2. Epoxy grout:
a. 3-component epoxy resin system.
1) Two liquid epoxy components.
2) One inert aggregate filler component.
b. Each component packaged separately for mixing at jobsite.

G. Reinforcing Steel:

1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.

2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185.
a. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 psi.

3. Column spirals: ASTM A82.

H. Forms:

1. Prefabricated or job built.

2. Wood forms:
a. New 5/8 or 3/4 IN 5-ply structural plywood of concrete form grade. b. Built-in-place or prefabricated type panel.
c. 4 x 8 FT sheets for built-in-place type except where smaller pieces will cover entire area.
d. When approved, plywood may be reused.

3. Metal forms:
03100
a. Metal forms excluding aluminum may be used.
b. Forms to be tight to prevent leakage, free of rust and straight without dents to provide members of uniform thickness.

4. Chamfer strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed.

5. Form ties: Removable end, permanently embedded body type with cones on outer ends not requiring auxiliary spreaders.
a. Cone diameter: 3/4 IN minimum to 1 IN maximum.
b. Embedded portion 1 IN minimum back from concrete face. c. If not provided with threaded ends, constructed for breaking off ends without damage to concrete.
d. Provide ties with built-in waterstops at all walls that will be in contact with process liquid during plant operation.

6. Form release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future finishes to concrete surface.

I. Waterstops:

1. Plastic: Corp of Engineers Specification CRD-C572.

2. Serrated with center bulb.

3. Thickness: 3/8 IN.

4. Length (general use): 6 IN unless indicated otherwise.

5. Expansion joints:
a. Length: 9 IN.
b. Center bulb: 1 IN OD x 1/2 IN ID.

6. Provide hog rings or grommets spaced at maximum 12 IN OC along the length of the water stop.

7. Provide factory made waterstop fabrications at all changes of direction, intersections and transitions leaving only straight butt splices for the field.

J. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, and Hangers:

1. Stainless steel, epoxy coated, or plastic coated metal. a. Plastic coated: Rebar support tips in contact with the forms only.

K. Chemical Floor Sealer, Hardener, Densifier:

1. Colorless, no VOC, odorless chemical solution containing alkaline siliconates.

2. Will not support bacteria growth.

3. 10-year manufacturers warranty.Similar to L&M construction Chemicals Inc. "Seal Hard".

L. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I-D.

1. Resin based, dissipates upon exposure to UV light.

2. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of any future coverings, coatings or finishes.
03100

3. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction to be nontoxic and taste and odor free.

M. Expansion Joint Filler:

1. In contact with water or sewage:
a. Closed cell neoprene.
b. ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE41).

2. Exterior driveways, curbs and sidewalks:
a. Asphalt expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D994.

3. Other use:
a. Fiber expansion joint filler.
b. ASTM D1751.

N. Materials.

1. Bonding agent:
a. High solids acrylic latex base liquid for interior or exterior application as a bonding agent to improve adhesion and mechanical properties of concrete patching mortars.
b. Euclid Chemical Co. "Flex-Con".
c. Master Builders Inc. "Acryl-Set".
d. L&M construction Chemicals "Everbond".
e. Thoro System Products "Acryl 60".

2. 3 CONCRETE MIXES
A. General:

1. All concrete to be ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94.

2. Provide concrete of specified quality capable of being placed without segregation and, when cured, of developing all properties required.

3. All concrete to be normal weight concrete.

B. Strength:

1. Provide specified strength and type of concrete for each use in structure(s) as follows:

SPECIFIED
TYPE WEIGHT STRENGTH*
==== ====== ==========
All general use Concrete Normal weight 5000 psi
Precast Concrete Normal weight 5000 psi
*Minimum 28-day compressive strength.
03100
C. Air Entrainment: Provide air entrainment in all concrete resulting in a total air content percent by volume as follows:

MAX AGGREGATE SIZE TOTAL AIR CONTENT PERCENT
==================== ==========================
1 IN or 3/4 IN 5 to 7
1/2 IN 5-1/2 to 8
3/8 pea gravel 5 to 7 (lean concrete and topping only)

1. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or ASTM C138.

D. Slump: 4 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum.

1. Measured at point of discharge of the concrete into the concrete construction member.

2. Concrete of lower than minimum slump may be used provided it can be properly placed and consolidated.

3. Pumped concrete:
a. Provide additional water at batch plant to allow for slump loss due to pumping. b. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum slump specified above.

4. Determine slump per ASTM C143.

E. Selection of Proportions:

1. General - Proportion ingredients to:
a. Produce proper workability, durability, strength, and other required properties. b. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free water on surface.

2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios for concrete to be as follows:

MINIMUM CEMENT, LB/CY
=========================== MAXIMUM WATER

SPECIFIED MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE, IN CEMENT RATIO
STRENGTH 1/2 or 3/8 3/4 1 BY WEIGHT
========= ============================ =============
4000 611 611 611 0.45
5000 --- 686 665 0.40

3. Substitution of fly ash:
a. Maximum of 25 percent by weight of cement at rate of 1 LB fly ash for 1 LB of cement.

4. Sand cement grout:
a. Three parts sand.
03100
b. One part portland cement.
c. Entrained air: Six percent plus or minus one percent. d. Sufficient water for required workability.
e. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 3,000 psi.

5. Submit mix design data as required by this specification section.

6. Normal weight concrete: Proportion mixture to provide desired characteristics using one of methods described below:
a. Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as modified herein. 1) Air content within range specified above.
2) Record and report temperature of trial mixes.
3) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1.
b. Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as modified herein:
1) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this method. 2) Test records shall represent materials, proportions and conditions similar to those specified.

7. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with the requirements of paragraph 5.3 of ACI 318 using the standard deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as described in paragraph 5.3.1 of ACI 318.

F. Allowable 21-day shrinkage for lab mixed trail batches: 0.040 percent per ASTM C157 as modified by SEAOC.
3 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. General:

1. Contractor is responsible for design and erection of formwork.

2. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position.
a. Allowable tolerances: As recommended in ACI 347R.

3. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping foundation base slabs or elevated floor slabs to drains.
a. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs of minimum uniform indicated depth.
b. Do not place floor drains through beams.

B. Openings: Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades.

1. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

C. Chamfer Strips: Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in forms to produce 3/4 IN wide beveled edges on permanently exposed corners of members.
03100
D. Reinforcement:

1. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement.

2. Locate and support with chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.

3. Set wire ties so ends do not touch forms and are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

4. Lap splice lengths: ACI 318 Class B top bar tension splices unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings.

5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges. a. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcement to within 3 IN of the edge.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum concrete cover as follows:
a. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN.
b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth: 2 IN for reinforcing bars #6 or larger; 1-1/2 IN for reinforcing bars less than #6. c. Formed surfaces exposed to or located above any liquid: 2 IN. d. Interior surfaces: 1-1/2 IN for beams, girders and columns; 1 IN or bar diameter, whichever is greater, for slabs, walls and joists.

7. Do not weld reinforcing bars.

E. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints:

1. Provide at locations indicated.

2. Locate wall vertical construction joints at 30 FT maximum centers and wall horizontal construction joints at 10 FT maximum centers.

3. Locate construction joints in floor slabs and foundation base slabs so that concrete placements are approximately square and do not exceed 2500 SF.

4. Install construction joints perpendicular to the planes of their surfaces.

5. At least 48 HRS shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete construction.

6. Thoroughly clean and remove all laitance and loose and foreign particles from construction joints.

7. Before new concrete is placed, coat all construction joints with an approved bonding agent used and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Embedments:

1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by concrete.

2. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions for locating and setting.

3. Secure waterstops in correct position using hog rings or grommets spaced along the length of the waterstop and wire tie to adjacent reinforcing steel.

G. Preparation:

1. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement.

2. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage.
03100

3. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing reinforcing bars in forms.

H. Placing Concrete:

1. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304R and 304.2R.

2. Place in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections.

3. Begin placement when work of other trades affecting concrete is completed.

4. Place concrete by methods which prevent aggregate segregation.

5. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 FT.

6. Where free fall of concrete will exceed 4 FT, place concrete by means of tremie pipe or chute.

I. Consolidation:

1. Consolidate all concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented with hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around reinforcement and embedded items into all parts of forms.

J. Protection:

1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to weather extremes.

2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R except as modified herein. a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or reinforcing bars coated with frost, ice or snow.
b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing:

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE CONCRETE TEMPERATURE AT

PLACEMENT (IN SHADE) AT MIXING
======================= =======================
Below 30 DegF 70 DegF
Between 30-45 DegF 60 DegF
Above 45 DegF 50 DegF
c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80 DegF. d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the concrete temperature at or above 50 DegF for 7 days or 70 DegF for 3 days. e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly.

3. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R except as modified herein. a. At air temperature of 90 DegF and above, keep concrete as cool as possible during placement and curing.
b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90 DegF at placement. c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture. 03100
d. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation rate equals or exceeds 0.2 LBS/SF/HR as determined from ACI 305R, Figure 2.1.5.

K. Curing:

1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from exposed surfaces.

2. Cure concrete by use of moisture retaining cover, burlap kept continuously wet or by membrane curing compound.

3. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to concrete and to prevent moisture loss from concrete during curing period.

4. Provide curing for minimum of 7 days.

5. Form materials left in place may be considered as curing materials for surfaces in contact with the form materials except in periods of hot weather.

6. In hot weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R.

7. In cold weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R.

8. If forms are removed before 7 days have elapsed, finish curing of formed surfaces by one of above methods for the remainder of the curing period.

9. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound: Cover vertical surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound.
a. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat. b. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal. c. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no free water on the surface.
d. A vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal.

L. Form Removal:

1. Remove forms after concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations or lack of support.

2. Where no reshoring is planned, leave forms and shoring used to support concrete until it has reached its specified 28-day compressive strength. a. Where reshoring is planned, supporting formwork may be removed when concrete has sufficient strength to safely support its own weight and loads placed thereon.While reshoring is underway, no superimposed loads shall be permitted on the new construction.
b. Place reshores as soon as practicable after stripping operations are complete but in no case later than the end of working day on which stripping occurs. c. Tighten reshores to carry their required loads.
d. Leave reshores in place until concrete being supported has reached its specified 28- day compressive strength.

3.2 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Tolerances:
03100

1. Class A: 1/8 IN in 10 FT.

2. Class B: 1/4 IN in 10 FT.

B. Surfaces Exposed to View:

1. Provide a smooth finish for exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces that are:
a. To be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. b. Scheduled for grout cleaned finish.

2. Remove fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and honeycomb areas with cement grout.

3. Fill tie holes with nonshrink grout.

C. Surfaces Not Exposed to View:

1. Patch voids, air pockets and honeycomb areas with sand cement grout.

2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink grout.

D. Grout Cleaned Finish:

1. Mix a part portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient bonding agent/water mixture to produce a grout with the consistency of thick paint. a. White portland cement shall be substituted for gray portland cement to produce a color that matches color of surrounding concrete as determined by trial patch for areas not to be painted.

2. Wet surface of concrete to prevent absorption of water by grout and uniformly apply grout with brushes or spray gun.

3. Immediately scrub the surface with a cork float or stone to coat and fill air bubbles and holes.

4. While grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working surface with rubber float, sack or other approved means.

5. After the surface whitens from drying, rub vigorously with clean burlap.

6. Keep final finish damp for a minimum of 36 HRS after final rubbing.

E. Slab Float Finish:

1. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled, do no further work until ready for floating.

2. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation.

3. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface with a 10 FT straightedge applied at not less than two different angles.

4. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during this procedure to produce a surface within Class B tolerance throughout.

5. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture.

F. Troweled Finish:

1. Float finish surface.
03100

2. Next power trowel, and finally hand trowel.

3. Produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects with first hand troweling.

4. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently.

5. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface.

6. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling.

7. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and plane to a Class A tolerance.

8. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings remove any defects of sufficient magnitude that would show through floor covering by grinding.

G. Broom Finish: Immediately after concrete has received a float finish as specified, give it a transverse scored texture by drawing a broom across surface.

H. Apply chemical floor sealer, hardener, densifier to all permanently exposed interior concrete non-vertical surfaces.

1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 GROUT
A. Preparation:

1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout:
a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout.
b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to grouting.

2. Rock anchors:
a. Clean rock anchors of all loose material.
b. Orient hook or bends in anchor bars to clear anchor bolts, reinforcements, and other embedments to be installed later.

3. Epoxy grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface.

B. Application:

1. Nonshrink grout:
a. Mix in a mechanical mixer.
b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable grout. c. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. d. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the bottom of baseplates. e. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not confine grout. f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth.
g. Except where a slope is indicated on Drawings, finish edges flush at the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of equipment.
h. Protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with wet rags or polyethylene sheets.
03100
i. Wet cure grout for 7 days, minimum.

2. Epoxy grout:
a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels and anchors without voids.
c. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as required to ensure proper placement.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor will employ and pay for services of a concrete testing laboratory to perform testing of concrete placed during construction.

1. Contractor to cooperate with Owner in obtaining and testing samples.

B. Tests During Construction:

1. Strength test - procedure:
a. Three cylinders, 6 IN DIA x 12 IN high, will be taken from each sample per ASTM C172 and C31.
b. Cylinders will be tested per ASTM C39:
1) One at 7 days.
2) Two at 28 days.

2. Strength test - frequency:
a. Not less than one test each day concrete placed.
b. Not less than one test for each 50 CY or major fraction thereof placed in one day. c. Not less than one test for each type of concrete poured. d. Not less than one test for each concrete structure exceeding 2 CY volume.

3. Slump test: Per ASTM C143.
a. Determined for each strength test sample.
b. Additional slump tests may be taken.

4. Air content: Per ASTM C231, C173, and C138.
a. Determined for each strength test sample.

5. Temperature: Determined for each strength test sample.

C. Evaluation of Tests:

1. Strength test results: Average of 28-day strength of two cylinders from each sample.
a. If one cylinder manifests evidence of improper sampling, molding, handling, curing or testings, strength of remaining cylinder will be test result. b. If both cylinders show any of above defects, test will be discarded.

D. Acceptance of Concrete:

1. Strength level of each type of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the 03100
following requirements are met:
a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or exceeds the required specified 28-day compressive strength.
b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28-day compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

2. If tests fail to indicate satisfactory strength level, perform additional tests and/or corrective measures as directed by Engineer.
a. Perform additional tests and/or corrective measures at no additional cost to Owner.

3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Form Types:

1. Surfaces exposed to view:
a. Prefabricated or job-built wood forms.
b. Laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with long dimensions vertical and joints aligned.
c. Produce finished surfaces free from offsets, ridges, waves, and concave or convex areas.
d. Construct forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.

2. Surfaces normally submerged or not normally exposed to view:
a. Wood or steel forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar.

3. Other types of forms may be used:
a. For surfaces not restricted to plywood or lined forms. b. As backing for form lining.

B. Grout:

1. Nonshrink grout: General use.

2. Epoxy grout:
a. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. b. Other uses indicated on Drawings.

3. Sand cement grout:
a. Repair of surfaces not exposed to view as specified in 3.02 C.

C. Concrete:

1. Precast concrete: Where indicated on Drawings.

2. Normal weight concrete: All concrete unless otherwise indicated.

D. Concrete Finishes:

1. Grout cleaned finish: Where indicated on Drawings.

2. Slab finishes:
a. Use following finishes as applicable, unless otherwise indicated:
03100
1) Floated finish: Surfaces intended to receive roofing, concrete topping, concrete fill and waterproofing.
2) Troweled finish: Interior floor slabs, exposed roof slabs and base slabs of structures, equipment bases, and column bases.
3) Broom finish: Sidewalks, docks, concrete stairs, and ramps.

END OF SECTION
05501
SECTION 05501

ANCHOR BOLTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:

1. Equipment anchor bolts

2. Structural anchor bolts

3. Expansion anchors

4. Epoxy set anchor bolts
B. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Sufficient to verify compliance with Specifications

1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver anchor bolts and templates in time to permit setting when structural concrete is placed PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Bolts:

1. Stainless steel: IFI-104, Grade 316
B. Nuts:

1. Same material as bolts

2. Self-locking: Prevailing torque, IFI-100, grade A
C. Washers:

1. Same material as bolts

2. Flat: ANSI B27.2

3. Locking: Spring type ANSI B27.1
D. Sleeves:
05501

1. Pipe: ASTM A120

2. Bearing plates: ASTM A36

3. Hot dip galvanize after fabrication
E. Expansion Anchors:

1. In hardened concrete and grouted masonry
a. Type "A": Wedge type, FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1 b. Type "B": Self-drilling, FS FF-S-325, Group III, Type 1, flush type c. Type "C": Non-drilling, internally threaded, FS FF-S-325, Group VIII, Type 1 Drop in d. Type "D": Non-drilling, externally threaded, FS FF-S-325, Group VIII, Type 2

2. In hollow and solid masonry
a. Type "E": Lag shield, FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 1, Class 1 b. Type "F": Split sleeve, FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 3, Class 3

2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. Anchor Bolts:

1. 3/4 inch minimum, except as indicated on the Drawings

2. Type:
a. General use: L-shaped hook type
b. Where indicated on Drawings or specified:
1) Straight bolt with square head
2) Straight bolt with square plate welded to bolt and nut welded to plate and bolt 3) Through-bolt with sleeve and square plate assembly
4) Coupled bolt with sleeve welded to square plate and bolt

3. Material:
a. General use: Stainless steel
b. Submerged service: Stainless steel
c. Where indicated on Drawings: Stainless steel
B. Expansion Anchors:

1. 3/4-inch maximum unless otherwise indicated on Drawings

2. Do not use cinch anchors

3. Length: As required for proper embedment
05501

4. Material:
a. General use: Stainless steel
b. Submerged service: Stainless steel
c. Where indicated on Drawings: Stainless steel
C. Epoxy Set Anchors:

1. FS FF-S-325

2. In hardened concrete and where specifically noted on plans:
a. Parabond capsule anchors
b. Stainless steel studs, nuts and washers
c. Approved manufacturers:
1) Molly Fastener Group by Emhart
2) Hilti, Inc.
3) Or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that holes for anchor bolts in forms and templates match applicable equipment Shop Drawings

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor Bolts:

1. Where installed in cast-in-place concrete, install a nut on the concrete side of the form or supporting template

2. Provide 3 nuts for each anchor bolt for which a lock nut is indicated, 2 for others

3. Sleeved anchor bolts:
a. Centered in pipe sleeve
b. Sleeve ID: Approximately 2 1/2 times bolt OD
c. Sleeve length: Approximately 8 times bolt OD
d. Bearing plate minimum thickness: 1/2 times bolt OD

4. Through bolts:
a. Sleeved with bearing plates
05501
b. Bearing plates welded to bolt and plate welded to sleeve c. Dimensions: As specified for sleeved anchor bolts
B. Expansion Anchors:

1. Install in conformity with the manufacturer's instructions

2. Minimum embedment: 4 bolt diameter or manufacturer's instructions, whichever is greater

3. Minimum distance between expansion anchor centerline and any edge or exterior corner of concrete: 4 l/2 bolt hole diameter
C. Epoxy Set Anchors:

1. Install as per manufacturer's recommendation

2. Minimum hole depth: As per manufacturer's recommendation but not less than 6-5/8 inches

3. Diameter of drilled holes: As per ANSI B94.12

3.03 SCHEDULE
A. Expansion Anchors:

1. In hardened concrete and grouted masonry: Type "A," "B," "C," or "D," Contractor's option, unless type is indicated on Drawings

2. In hollow and solid masonry: Type "E," or "F," Contractor's option, unless type is indicated on Drawings

3. Epoxy set anchors were adhesion or epoxy anchor bolts specifically noted on Drawings

END OF SECTION
05521
SECTION 05521

PIPE RAILING
PART 1- GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
The work of this section consists of furnishing and installing aluminum handrails and guardrails as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01340: Shop Drawings

1.3 GOVERNING CODES AND STANDARDS
A. 2016 California Building Code (CBC)
B. Applicable ASTM Standards
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufactures (NAAMM):

1. Pipe Railing Manual, Including Round tube
D. American Welding Society Standard AWS D1.1
E. Applicable SSPC Standards
F. Applicable OSHA Standards

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: California Building Code, California Industry Safety Orders and manufacturers' printed recommendations.

B. All handrails and guardrails shall be fabricated by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting, and installation components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01340.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit prior to fabrication.

1. Drawings shall show clearly all materials, finishes, connecting and joining methods, dimensions, installation details, and relationship to adjoining work by 05521
others. No fabrication work shall be started until shop drawings have been approved. Any errors in dimensions shown will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Provide structural calculations for the rail system substantiating that the rail system meets the requirements of the California Building Code. The design load shall be a horizontal load of 50 lbs per ft on the top rail and a 200 lb horizontal load anywhere along the top rail. The loads do not need to be concurrent.

Calculations shall substantiate the pipe rail, connections and embeds in concrete where they occur.

C. Manufacturers' installation instruction and recommendations.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. All necessary precautions shall be taken to protect all handrails, guardrails, and components from damage or discoloration. Pack and ship in individual plastic film to protect the anodized finish.

B. Store handrails and guardrails above ground on platforms or other supports to prevent damage.

PART 2- MATERIALS

2.1 ALUMINUM PIPE HANDRAIL AND GUARDRAIL
A. Rails, Posts, and Fitting-assembly Spacers:

1. ASTM B429, 6005-T5, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum pipe of minimum 1.89 inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall thickness.

2. Alloy 6063-T6 may be used for pieces requiring bending only.

B. Kick Plates: 6005-T5 aluminum alloy.

C. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the manufacturer.

D. Other Parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings.

1. Fabrications: ASTM B209 or ASTM B221 extruded bars.

2. Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.

3. Plug Screws or Blind Rivets: Type 305 stainless steel.

4. Other Parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.

E. Finish of Aluminum Components:
05521

1. Anodized finish, 0.7 mil thick, applied to exposed surfaces after cutting.

Aluminum Association Specification M32-C22-A41, mechanical finish-medium satin (wheel or belt polish with aluminum oxide grit size of 180 to 220 size, at speed 6000 fpm, parallel to length of railing), chemical finish-medium matte, anodic coating-clear Class I Architectural.

2. Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before anodizing.

F. Fabrication and Assembly:

1. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.

2. Perform without welding.

3. Do not epoxy bond the parts.

4. Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as indicated on the Drawings.

G. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1. Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail.

2. Julius Blum and Company, Inc., Connectorail.

3. Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.

H. Grout Pockets

1. Existing concrete – As indicated on the Drawings.

2. New concrete – As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Grout - Quick setting hydraulic cement, CraneVeyor No. C5804; Hallemite Manufacturing Company, "Por-Rok", or equal.

I. Gates shall have an all welded pipe frame, aluminum hinges and gate stop. Hinge pins and latch bolt to be Type 300 series stainless steel. Gates shall be self-closing and selflatching.

J. Toe Boards shall be aluminum channel, as indicated on the Drawings.

K. Safety Chains shall be wrought aluminum hand chain, 17/64 inch diameter, non-welded, attached to posts with stainless steel eye bolts, ¼-inch - 20 x 1¾ inches with ½-inch inside diameter and 7/8 inch thread. Chain snaps shall be ½-inch nickel plated bronze harness snaps.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
Before fabrication or installation, verify the dimensions of all areas, spans, spaces, and configurations. 05521

3.2 WORKMANSHIP
All fabrication shall be done to the dimensions shown or approved. All items shall be free from any defects which may affect appearance or impair strength.

3.3 FABRICATION
A. All fabrication in this section shall be done by persons skilled in the required trade.

Fastenings and connections shall impart no stresses or distortion on any members, and allowance for expansion and contraction shall be made where necessary.

B. Assembly of components shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturers' recommendations for assembly.

C. Carbide tipped circular saw blades with approximately four teeth per inch plus chip gap is recommended. Cuts must be free of burrs, nicks, and sharp edges. De-burr with care; do not chamfer edges of cuts.

D. Posts shall be continuous from mounting surface to top rail. The posts shall be evenly spaced at not less than 4 feet or more than 6 feet on centers. Field conditions may require some adjustment of spacing.

E. Bottom and intermediate rails shall be un-spliced lengths between posts.

F. Top rails shall be continuous at corners.

G. Each top rail shall be attached whenever possible, to a minimum of three posts.

H. Top rail splices and expansion joints must be located within 8 inches of post or other support. Fasten only one side of pipe to splice sleeve when used as expansion joint.

Sleeve must be free to move in unfastened railing. For protection from temperature induced stresses, an expansion joint and gap must be provided in every top rail on a maximum of 18 feet. Top rails only must have expansion joints between the fixed points.

Use 1/8 inch gap between bottom and intermediate rails and each fitting.

Expansion Joint Gap Table
Temperature (°F) Time of
Installation
Gap Dimension each Expansion
Joint(On 18'-0" Centers)
-20 to 0 ½"
0 to +20 7/16"
20 to 35 3/8"
35 to 50 5/16"
50 to 70 ¼"
05521
70 to 90 3/16"
90 to 120 1/8"
Top of upper railing shall be 42 inches above the working surface. Toeboards shall be installed not more than ¼-inch off the working surface and shall be provided where specified or required by code, and as shown on the drawings.

For all exterior installations, provision must be made to drain water from the railing system to prevent damage caused by freezing of entrapped water. Likewise, for interior installations subject to high humidity, provision must be made to drain off water from the railing system. Pre-drill 15/64" diameter weep holes in all posts set in concrete or otherwise closed at bottom, and in bends and elbows at low points.

3.4 DISSIMILAR MATERIALS
A. All surfaces of railing components in contact with concrete and other materials and permanently exposed to moisture shall be painted with a coating of asphaltic paint to prevent contact between the two surfaces. All railing components shall be installed so that no drainage over them has previously been contaminated from copper, caustics or alkalies.

B. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials electrolysis, care should be taken that none of the protective materials is visible when assembly is completed.

3.5 PROTECTION
Protect the railing component finish from scratches, gouges, nicks, dents, etc. during storage, assembly and installation. Insofar as possible, the plastic film shall be left intact on the pipe until inspection and acceptance.

END OF SECTION
05600
SECTION 05600

FIBERGLASS FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as required to properly install all of the FRP products specified herein:

1. FRP Structural Fabrications.

2. FRP Ladders.

3. FRP Stairs, Walkways, and Platforms

4. FRP Strut.

5. FRP Grating.

6. FRP Covered Grating.

1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contract drawings.

B. Additional requirements specified elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340.

2. Quality Control: Section 014000.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All FRP Products and Fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm who has continually engaged in the manufacture and/or fabrication or fiberglass reinforced plastic, with minimum of five years experience.

B. The Installing Contractor shall; assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect a proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations are followed.

C. Referenced Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
a. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
b. A14.3, Safety Requirements for Fixed Ladders.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum Sheet and Plate, Alloy 6061-T6. b. B211, Standard Specification for Aluminum Rod and Bar Stock, Alloy 6061-T6. c. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum Rolled Sections, Alloy 6061-T6. d. D256, Standard Specification for Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.
e. D570, Standard Specification for Water Absorption of Plastics. f. D638, Standard Specification for Tensile Properties of Plastics. g. D695, Standard Specification for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. h. D696, Standard Specification for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between – 30C and 30C.
i. D790, Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Material.
j. D792, Standard Specification for Density and Specific Gravity of Plastics by Displacement.
05600
k. D1929, Standard Specification for Ignition Properties of Plastics. l. D2583, Standard Specification for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.
m. E84, Standard Specification for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
n. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. o. F594, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts. p. D 635 Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position
q. E 84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. OSHA – 29 CFR as it pertains to worker safety and walking-working surfaces for stairs, ladders, handrail and platforms.

B. All fabrications shall meet requirements of OSHA Regulations and 2016 California Building Code C. FRP Structural Shapes shall be designed into structures that will support all applicable loads.

Deflection shall not exceed L/D of 240.

D. Design Loadings:

1. FRP grating, covered grating, stairs, platforms, and walkways:
a. 200 psf uniform live load.
b. 500 lbs. concentrated load.
c. Maximum deflection of 1/300 of span under a superimposed live load of 50 psf. d. Design for the most severe loading condition noted above.

2. Chemical Facilities: Design FRP platforms for weight of barrels or totes as shown on drawings with Safety Factor of 1.5.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete shop drawings and engineering data for all FRP materials and fabrications as required by this scope of work.

B. Submit structural calculations for fabricated stairs, walkways, platforms, and structural supports stamped by licensed engineer in the State of California.

C. Submit evidence of experience in production of products specified herein.

D. Product Data:

1. Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes.

2. Color chart for strut and clearwell overflow fabrication for Owner selection.

3. Materials of construction including shop applied coatings.

4. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all dimensions, connections, fasteners, tolerances, assembly and installation details as required.

2. Fabrication drawings for stairs, walkways, platforms, and structural supports.

3. Parshall Flume: Project specific drawings, showing:
a. Critical dimensions.
b. Joints, connections, fasteners.
c. Sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, ribs, anchoring clips, and dimensional bracing.
d. Materials and thicknesses of construction.
05600
e. Minimum and maximum flow rates.

F. Samples:

1. Submit samples of each type of grating, channel cover, stair tread, and stair railing proposed.

2. Parshall Flume: Laminate Sample, 6-inch square sample of representative laminate G. Miscellaneous Submittals:

1. Certification of Structural Engineer’s qualifications.

2. Complete design calculations of all supporting structure and fastening conditions. a. Design calculations to be for information only. Engineer will not review or take any action on submittal.

3. Certification that all components and systems have been designed and fabricated to meet the loading requirements specified.

1.06 WARRANTY
A. The FRP manufacturer warrants that the delivered material will conform to approved samples and specifications and will be free from defects in workmanship and material under normal use and conditions for a period of one year from date of product installation. Should defects, attributable to the manufacturer, appear within one year of the date of installation, the manufacturer has the option of replacing or repairing the defective material.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All items to be provided under this Section shall be furnished only by manufacturers having a minimum of ten (10) years’ experience in the design and manufacture of similar products and systems. Additionally, if requested, a record of at least five (5) previous, separate, similar successful installations in the last five (5) years shall be provided.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and handle each item to preclude damage.

B. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately and noted as such to facilitate their movement to a dry indoor storage facility.

C. Store all items on skids above ground. Keep free of dirt and other foreign matter which will damage items or finish and protect from corrosion and UV exposure.

D. Adhesives, resins and their catalysts are to be stored in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees Fahrenheit (21 to 29 degrees Celsius) until they are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Finished laminate shall be as free as commercially practical form defects such as foreign inclusion, dry spots, air bubbles, blisters, pinholes and delamination.

B. All surfaces exposed to view shall be a premium grade polyester based gel coat, containing ultraviolet (UV) inhibitor with minimum thickness of 15-20 mil.

C. All FRP materials shall include ultraviolet (UV) light inhibitors.

D. All structural shapes shall be constructed of strand roving, transverse mat and a synthetic surface veil.

E. All structural shapes shall be flame retardant per ASTM E-84 Class 1 Flame Spread of less than

25. 05600
F. Fiberglass reinforcement shall be continuous roving in sufficient quantities as needed by the application and/or physical properties required.

G. Resin shall be Isophthalic Polyester, with chemical formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as required.

H. All finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes or unreinforced areas. All glass fibers shall be well covered with resin to protect against their exposure due to wear or weathering.

I. All metal components, fasteners, and accessories shall be manufactured of Type 316SS (stainless steel).

J. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes and abrasions shall be sealed to prevent corrosion.

K. FRP Color:

1. Ladders: Safety yellow.

2. Grating: Safety yellow.

3. Stairs, walkways, and platform structures: Grey

4. Covered Grating: As selected by Owner.

5. Parshall Flume: Grey, white, or blue.

6. Strut fabrication: To match surrounding materials.

2.02 FRP STRUCTURAL FABRICATIONS
A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication B. FRP structural shapes shall be premium grade polyester resin pultruded fiberglass shapes. All shapes shall meet ASTM E-84 Class 1 Flame Spread of less than 25 and ASTM D-635 selfextinguishing.

C. The minimum physical properties shall be:

Property ASTM Longitudinal
Direction
Transverse
Direction
Tensile Stress D-638 30,000 psi 7,000 psi
Tensile Modulus D-638 2.5 x 106 psi 0.8 x 106 psi
Compressive Stress D-695 30,000 psi 15,000 psi
Compressive Modulus D-695 2.5 x 106 psi 1.0 x 106 psi
Flexural Stress D-790 30,000 psi 10,000 psi
Flexural Modulus D-790 1.8 x 106 psi 0.8 x 106 psi
Modulus of Elasticity, E Full Section 2.8 x 106 psi
D. All structural shapes shall be fabricated per the drawings with good workmanship, closely fitted joints, and finished true to line and in accurate position to permit installation and proper joining of parts in the field.
05600
E. Use 316 stainless steel bolts and washers.

F. All joint surfaces to be bonded shall be abraded to remove surface gloss and be free of burrs or other foreign materials that would prevent proper adhesion.

G. Use high-strength epoxy adhesives designed for FRP use and mechanical fasteners.

H. All pieces to have easily identified part numbers or piece marks.

I. All components shall be treated with UV inhibitor.

2.03 FRP LADDERS
A. Ladders shall be made from premium grade polyester resin.

B. All ladder components shall be flame retardant per ASTM E-84 Class 1.

C. Ladder rails shall be 2 x 2 x 1/4 square tube.

D. Ladder rungs shall be 1-inch diameter solid round.

E. Ladders are to be safety yellow.

F. Ladder rungs are to penetrate inside wall of ladder rail tube and be countersunk into outside wall of ladder rail tube, providing support for the ladder rung in 4 places. Connection to be fully bonded and with epoxy adhesives and pinned to prevent rung rotation.

G. Ladder rungs to have slip-resistant quartz epoxy grit surface.

H. Ladder stand-off brackets to be FRP and installed at a maximum of 6’-0” on center. Ladder base mount brackets to be FRP. All bolts are to be 316 stainless steel.

2.04 FRP STAIRS, WALKWAYS AND PLATFORMS
A. Designed, engineered and custom fabricated by Manufacturer.

B. Structural Fabrications and Structural Properties as specified above.

C. Fabricated from FRP pultrusions
D. Shapes

1. As required for specified design loadings.

2. Minimum Framing and Stringers: 8" x 3/8" or 10" x 1/2" Channel.

3. Minimum Posts and Clips: 3" x 3" x 3/8" Angle.

4. Minimum Ledgers: 3" x 3" x 3/8" Angle.

E. Connection Hardware = Type 304 stainless steel, 1/2" diameter bolts, nuts and washer.

F. FRP Grating: as specified herein.

G. FRP Stair Treads: 1 1/2" deep Molded FRP stair treads, with nonskid abrasive grit surface and wide molded nosing.

2.05 FRP MODULAR FRAMING SYSTEM (STRUT)
A. Corrosion resistant/UV resistant.

B. Non-conductive, high strength.

C. Channel, 1-5/8” wide, 1/4” thick.

D. Provide in locations as shown on contract plans for pipe supports in corrosive or potentially submerged areas, and for chemical metering pump benches assembly.

E. Accessories:

1. Channel nuts, with spring.

2. Pipe clamps (provide neoprene pipe wrap).

3. U-bolts.

4. Fittings.

5. Bases.

6. Non-metallic threaded hardware.

7. Resin seal kit – apply to all field cut ends.
05600
F. Acceptable Manufacturer’s:

1. AICKIN

2. Enduro Composite Systems

3. Unistrut

4. Or approved equal

2.06 GRATING
A. Minimum grating depth: 1-1/2 in.

B. Bar span: Maximum of 1-1/2 in. center to center.

C. Walking surface: Manufacturer’s standard applied abrasive grit coating.

D. Must have a minimum 62% open area for light transmittance. Open area calculation must include both load and cross bars.

E. Must be ADA compliant with a maximum open space between load bars of 1/2 inch.

F. Manufacture: Grating shall be of a one-piece molded construction with tops and bottoms of bearing bars and cross bars in the same plane. Grating shall have rectangular mesh pattern providing unidirectional strength. Grating shall be reinforced with continuous roving of equal number of layers in each direction. The top layer of reinforcement shall be no more than 1/8 inch below the top surface of the grating so as to provide maximum stiffness and prevent resin chipping of unreinforced surfaces. Percentage of glass (by weight) shall not exceed 35% so as to achieve maximum corrosion resistance.

G. After molding, no dry glass fibers shall be visible on any surface of bearing bars or cross bars. All bars shall be smooth and uniform with no evidence of fiber orientation irregularities, interlaminar voids, porosity, resin rich or resin starved areas.

H. Grating bar intersections are to be filleted to a minimum radius of 1/16 inch to eliminate local stress concentrations and the possibility of resin cracking at these locations.

I. Non–slip surface: Grating shall be manufactured with an integrally applied grit to the top surface of each bar providing maximum slip resistance.

1. Resin used to apply texture shall be cured using infrared (IR) heat for maximum durability.

J. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the contract drawings. Grating openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be field cut or, when shop fabricated, discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section of grating is readily removable
K. Attachment Clips

1. Hold down clamps shall be of type 316 stainless steel

2. Each grating section shall be tied down with clips.

2.067 COVERED GRATING
A. As specified above for FRP grating except with FRP cover plate.

B. The grating cover plate shall be attached to the completed panel of grating by chemical means to ensure integral action of the panel and plate. The panel and grating shall be uniformly clamped together to ensure that all contact surface remain in contact throughout the curing process.

1. Alternatively, cover plate may be molded at the same time as the grating to form a one-piece structure.

2. Manufacturer to provide openings and holes where located on the contract drawings. Grating openings which fit around protrusions (pipes, cables, machinery, etc.) shall be field cut or, 05600
when shop fabricated, discontinuous at approximately the centerline of opening so each section of grating is readily removable
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION
A. Upon receipt of material at job site, Contractor shall inspect all materials for shipping damage.

3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use shipping pallets to move materials. Do not drag FRP material.

B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. Keep material covered to prevent unnecessary exposure to UV.

3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Installing contractor to coordinate and verify that other construction trades and materials have been installed per the contract drawings, and, that they are accurate in location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level.

B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings supplied by the FRP Supplier.

C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level and plumb. Field fabricate as necessary for accurate fit.

D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with sealing resin to prevent corrosion.

3.04 SCHEDULE
A. Structural Fabrications: provide as needed to support fiberglass fabrications.

1. Provide support channels below FRP grating at Chemical Feed Facilities.

B. Ladders:

1. Provide FRP ladders where shown on drawings (if applicable).

C. Strut:

1. Provide FRP modular framing strut and hardware for the chemical metering pump mounting skids as shown on Drawings.

2. Provide FRP modular framing strut for pipe support pieces as shown on drawings.

D. Grating:

1. Provide grating and accompanying structural supports at Chemical Feed Facilities where shown on drawings.

2. At all other locations shown on drawings.

E. Covered Grating: Where shown on drawings.

1. Type 316 stainless steel hold-down clips shall be provided and spaced at a maximum of four feet apart with a minimum of four per piece of covered grating, or as recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Clips shall be screw and grommet type to attach through cover and into SS channel below.

END OF SECTION
05821
SECTION 05821

CHAIN LINK FENCING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Chain-Link Fences.

2. Barbed Wire

3. Chain Link Gates.

4. Cattle Gates.

5. Privacy Slats
B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for site excavation, fill, and backfill where chain-link fences and gates are located.

2. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Comply with all applicable requirements of State of California, DOT.

B. Reference State Standards:

1. Standard Specifications for State of California, DOT.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates.

1. Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

2. Chain-link fabric, barbed wire, reinforcements, and attachments.

3. Gates and hardware.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of fences, gates, posts, braces, tension wires, gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, gate elevations, sections, details of post anchorage, attachment, bracing, and other required installation and operational clearances.

C. American Iron and Steel Certification.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
05821

2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC
A. General: Height indicated on Drawings. Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist. Comply with AASHTO M181, galvanized; and requirements indicated below:

1. Steel Wire Fabric: 11 gage wire.
a. Diamond Count:
1) 72 Inch High Fence: 20-1/2

2. Chain link fence for slatted fence must be minimum 9 gage and have 3-1/4 inch vertical and 5-1/4 inch horizontal mesh.

3. Selvage: Knuckled at both selvages.

2.2 BARBED WIRE
A. Zinc-Coated Steel Barbed Wire: Comply with ASTM A 121, Standard grade for the following two-strand barbed wire:

1. Standard Size and Construction: 0.099-inch- diameter line wire with 0.080-inch-diameter, 2-point round barbs spaced not more than 5 inches o.c.

2.3 FENCE FRAMING
A. Posts and Rails: Comply with ASTM F 1043 for framing, ASTM F 1083 for Group IC round pipe, and the following:

1. Group: Schedule 40, round steel pipe, yield strength 50,000 psi.

2. Fence Height: height of mesh as measured from grade, as indicated on drawings.

3. Post Size and Thickness:
a. 6’ 0” high or less
1) Braces: 2.38 inches OD.
2) Line Post: 2.38 inches OD.
3) End, Corner and Pull Post: 3.5 inches OD.
4) Swing Gate Post: 3.5-inch OD.
b. Above 6’ 0” and less than 10’ 0”.
1) Braces: 2.38 inches OD.
2) Line Post: 2.875 inches OD.
3) End, Corner and Pull Post: 3.5 inches OD.
4) Swing Gate Post: 3.5-inch OD.

4. Galvanized
B. Barbed Wire Arms: Pressed galvanized steel, with clips,slots, or other meansfor attaching strands of barbed wire, integral with post cap; for each post, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Line posts with arms that accommodate top rail or tension wire.

2. Corner arms at fence corner posts, unless extended posts are indicated.

3. Type I, single slanted arm.
05821

2.4 TENSION WIRE
A. General: Provide horizontal tension wire at the following locations:

1. Location: Extended along top and bottom of fence fabric.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Wire: commercial quality 7-gage coil spring steel, and the following:

1. Metallic Coating: ASTM A 116, with the following minimum coating weight:
a. Class 3.

2.5 INDUSTRIAL CHAIN LINK SWING GATES
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for single and double swing gate types.

1. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083 for materials and protective coatings.

2. Galvanized.

B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round tubing with outside dimension and weight according to ASTM F 900 and the following:

1. Gate Fabric: to match fencing.

2. Leaf Width: As indicated.

3. Minimum Frame Members:
a. Tubular Steel: 1.66 inches round.

C. Frame Corner Construction:

1. Welded or assembled with corner fittings and 3/8-inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for gates 5 feet wide or wider.

2. Truss rods shall connect to gusset plate with truss tightener. Truss tightener shall be as shown on State Standard Plan RSP A85B.

D. Hardware:

1. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate.

2. Lockable

3. Combination steel or malleable iron catch and locking attachment that does not rotate around the latch post.

E. Hang each gate with at least 2 steel or malleable iron hinges at least 3 inches in width such that the gate is securely clamped to the gate post and permits the gate to be swung back against the fence. The bottom hinge must have a socket to take the ball end of the gate frame.

F. Construct a center rest with a catch and stops to hold gates open.

G. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame as required to attach barbed wire assemblies.

2.6 CATTLE GATES
A. Tubular Steel Gate

1. 12 FT long by 5 FT high

2. 6 horizontal tubes
05821

3. Minimum 2 IN OD steel 14 gauge tubes with balled ends

4. Heavy duty fully welded vertical stays

5. Chain Latch

6. Heavy Duty J Bolt Post Attachments

7. Complete with Gate Posts each side

8. Powder coated suitable for exterior use

9. Provided with all hanging and latching hardware

2.7 FITTINGS
A. General: Comply with ASTM F 626.

B. Post and Line Caps: Provide for each post.

1. Line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.

C. Braces: Attach braces securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post.

D. Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

E. Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: According to ASTM F 626.

1. Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following:

F. Finish:

1. Metallic Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.

2.8 PRIVACY SLATS
A. Material: Polyethylene tubular slats, not less than 0.03 inch thick, manufactured for chain-link fences from virgin polyethylene containing UV inhibitor, sized to fit mesh specified for direction indicated.

1. Depth: not less than 0.325 inches

2. Privacy: Maximum 75%

3. Length: equal to fence height

4. Properties:
a. Melt Index: ASTM D1238, 0.24
b. Density: ASTM D1505, 0.951
c. Low temperature brittleness: ASTM D748, -76° Fahrenheit d. Tensile Strength: ASTM D638, 3,700 psi
B. Color: Forest Green.

C. Clips: Stainless steel, 0.065 inch thick by 0.375 inch wide, capable of withstanding a minimum 150-lbf pull load to limit extension of coil, resulting in a concertina pattern when deployed.

D. Tie Wires: Stainless steel, 0.065 inch diameter.
05821

2.9 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

2.10 FENCE GROUNDING
A. Conductors: Bare, solid wire for No. 6 AWG and smaller; stranded wire for No. 4 AWG and larger.

1. Material above Finished Grade: Copper.

2. Material on or below Finished Grade: Copper.

3. Bonding Jumpers: Braided copper tape, 1 inch (25 mm) wide, woven of No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.

B. Connectors and Grounding Rods: Comply with UL 467.

1. Connectors for Below-Grade Use: Exothermic welded type.

2. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.
a. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches.

C. Ground gates with jumpers.

D. Ground barbed wire as required to complete grounding of fencing system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements specified.

1. Install fencing on established boundary lines inside property line.

3.2 CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION
A. Post Setting: Set posts in concrete as shown on drawings.

1. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during setting with concrete or mechanical devices. a. Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.

B. Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull 05821
posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment.

C. Line Posts: Space line posts uniformly at 8 feet o.c.

D. Post Bracing: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts.

1. Locate horizontal braces as indicated on drawings. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension.

2. Brace each end, latch, and corner post to the nearest line post with either of the following:
a. Diagonal brace used as a compression member.
b. Horizontal brace used as a compression member and truss rods used as tension members.

3. Equip each steel truss rod with a turnbuckle or truss tightener.

E. Tension Wire: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Pull wire taut, without sags. Fasten fabric to tension wire with 0.120-inch- diameter hog rings of same material and finish as fabric wire, spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. Install tension wire in locations indicated before stretching fabric.

1. Top Tension Wire: Wrap tension wires around terminal posts. The top of the fabric to the top tension wire must be 2 inches.

2. Bottom Tension Wire: Install tension wire within 6 inches of bottom of fabric and tie to each post with not less than same diameter and type of wire.

F. Chain-Link Fabric: Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released.

G. Barbed Wire: Install barbed wire uniformly spaced, angled toward security side of fence as indicated on Drawings. Pull wire taut and install securely to extension arms and secure to end post or terminal arms.

1. Gates to also be fitted with barbed wire.

H. Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 12 inches o.c.

I. Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at 1 end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing.

1. Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c.

J. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side.

3.3 CHAIN LINK GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- 05821
resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.

1. Hang each gate with at least 2 steel or malleable iron hinges at least 3 inches in width such that the gate is securely clamped to the gate post and permits the gate to be swung back against the fence.

2. The bottom hinge must have a socket to take the ball end of the gate frame.

3. Provide stops to hold gates open and a center rest with catch.

3.4 CATTLE GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference, and as shown on drawings.

B. Install gate posts in concrete foundations, size as recommended by gate manufacturer.

3.5 GROUNDING AND BONDING
A. Grounding Method: Drive a grounding rod vertically until the top is 6 inches below finished grade. Connect rod to fence with No. 6 AWG conductor. Connect conductor to each fence component at the grounding location.

B. Bonding Method for Gates: Connect bonding jumper between gate post and gate frame.

C. Connections: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.

Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.

4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized-steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps.

5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

B. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

END OF SECTION
05999
SECTION 05999
MISC. METALS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:

1. Items fabricated from metal shapes, plates, sheets, rods, bars, or castings.

2. Checkered floor plate.

4. Grating and grating treads, galvanized.

5. Edge angles.

6. Stairs, aluminum.

7. Nosings cast in stair steps.

8. Lintels.

9. Metal specialties as specified herein.

11. And all other miscellaneous metals shown on drawings.

B. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340.

3. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors: Section 05501.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Handrail, steps, and ladders shall comply with all applicable provisions of OSHA.

B. Reference Standards:

1. AISC "Steel Construction Manual".

2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings".

3. ASTM A1: Carbon Steel Tee Rails.

4. ASTM A36: Structural Steel.

5. ASTM A366: Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.

6. ASTM A569: Steel, Carbon (0.15 Max, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.

7. ASTM A325: High Strength Bolts for Structural Joints. 05999

8. ASTM A307: Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

9. IFI-100:

10. ASTM A490: Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

11. FS WW-F-461: Floor Plate, Steel, Rolled.

12. ASTM A500: Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.

13. ASTM A501: Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless, Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.

14. FS RR-G-661: Grating, Metal, Bar Type (Floor, Except for Naval Vessels).

15. ASTM A48: Gray Iron Castings.

16. ASTM A167: Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.

17. ASTM B36: Brass Plate, Strip and Rolled Bar.

18. ASTM B61: Steamer Valve Bronze Castings.

19. ASTM B140: Copper-Zinc-Lead (Leaded Red Brass or Hardware Bronze) Rod, Bar and Shape .

20. ASTM B97: Copper-Silicon-Alloy Plate, Strip and Rolled Bar for General Purposes.

21. ANSI A202.1: Metal Bar Grating Manual for Steel and Aluminum Gratings and Stair Treads.

22. ASTM A120: Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses.

C. Tolerances:

1. Structural steel:
a. All members level, plumb and aligned within 1:500.
b. Top elevation of roof and floor members within 1/16 inch of that indicated on Drawings. c. Girt faces and other supporting members in vertical planes within 1/8 inch.

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Product Data describing each manufactured metal specialty.

2. Shop Drawings describing each fabricated item.

3. Erection Drawings for structural steel.
05999

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store on Blocking So That No Metal Touches the Ground and Water Cannot Collect Thereon.

B. Protected From Bending Under Its Own Weight or Superimposed Loads.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Guardrail, steps and ladders shall comply with all applicable provisions of OSHA.

B. Compliance with the requirements specified herein may necessitate modification to the manufacturer’s standard materials or equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel:

1. Plates and shapes: ASTM A36.

2. Sheets: ASTM A366 or A569, zinc coated.

3. Pipe: ASTM A120.

4. Bolts:
a. High strength: ASTM A325.
b. Unfinished: ASTM A307.
c. Self-locking nuts: Prevailing torque type; IFI-100, Grade A. d. Flat washers: ANSI B27.2.
e. Lock washers: Spring type, ANSI B27.1.
f. Beveled washers: Table 1 of Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, AISC Steel Construction Manual.

5. Welds:
a. Part 5 Specifications and Codes, AISC Steel Construction Manual. b. AWS D1.1-77 American Welding Society.
c. Welding Electrodes: AWS 5.20 E70TX.

6. Checkered plate: FS QQ-F-461.

7. Structural tubing: ASTM A500 or A501.
05999

8. Rails:
a. Crane: AISC Steel Construction Manual.
b. Railroad: ASTM A1.

9. Railings, hand and guard:
a. Structural Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36.
b. Steel Bars and Bar-size Shapes: ASTM A36.
c. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46,000 psi) (317MPa). d. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.
e. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, Grade as selected. f. Steel Pipe: ATM A53, type as selected, Grade A standard weight (Schedule 40). g. Paint:
1) Metal Primer: VOC compliant.
a) Interior steel: Tnemec 10-99W (white).
b) Exterior steel (exposed): Tnemec-Zinc 90-97.
2) Galvanizing repair paint: High zinc dust content; MIL-P-21035 (Ships).

B. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 25 or better.

C. Stainless Steel: 18-8:

1. Plates: ASTM A167.

2. Bolts: IFI-104, Grade 303 or 305.

D. Aluminum:

1. Sheet and plate: ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6.

2. Rolled sections: ASTM B308, alloy 6061-T6.

3. Rod and bar: ASTM B211, alloy 6061-T6 or 2017-T4.

4. Extrusions: ASTM B221, alloy 6063-T5 or T6.

5. Pipe: ASTM B429, alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6.

6. Rivets: ASTM B316, alloy 6061-T6.

7. Bolts: IFI-104, Grade 24T4.

8. Castings: ASTM B26 or B85.

9. Checkered plate: Alcoa C102.

E. Specialty and Accessory Items:
05999

1. Chain: FS RR-C-271, Type I, Grade C, Class 5, Style 2, galvanized; welded steel, twist-link style, short link pattern.

2. Guardrail-setting cement: ASTM C595 hydraulic quick setting cement, factory prepared with accelerator.

3. Bird screen: 2 mesh, brass or copper wire cloth, minimum wire diameter 0.063 inch.

4. Body solder: Flux-core wire, ASTM B32, Alloy Grade 20B.

5. Grating saddle clips and flange block:
a. ANSI A202.1.
b. Steel grating: Galvanized steel clips.
c. Aluminum grating: galvanized steel clips.
d. Clip fasteners: Nelson stud type bolts, 1/4-inch minimum, galvanized or corrosion resistant alloy.

F. Safety Nosings:

1. Safety stair nosings, 3 inches wide, 1/4-inch thick single component type with anchor set into concrete. Aluminum base of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum with anti-slip filler containing 65 percent grain aluminum oxide (AL2O3)/silicon carbide (sic) abrasive. Nosings shall be designed for outdoor use, heavy pedestrian traffic. Manufactured by company specializing in fabrication of safety nosings, Manufactured by Wooster Products, Balco Inc., or equal.

2. Provide safety stair nosings at all concrete stairs and steel pain stairs.

G. Shop Coatings:

1. Rust inhibitive shop primer for steel: Tnemec "77 Chem-Prime", Carboline, or approved equal.

2. Zinc rich primer: Tnemec "92 Tnemec- Zinc", Carboline, or approved equal.

3. Coal tar paint: Tnemec "450 Heavy Tnemecol", Carboline, or approved equal.

4. Galvanizing: Hot-dip process:
a. ASTM A123 – Standard Spec for Zinc (Hot Dip) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. ASTM A385 – Standard Practice for Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip). c. ASTM A384 – Practice for Guarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing.

5. Bolt galvanizing:
a. Zinc: ASTM A164, Type GS.
b. Cadmium: ASTM A165, Type NS.

6. Aluminum:
05999
a. Standard mill finish.
b. Clear anodize.

H. Metal Framing Strut:

1. As shown on Pipe Support Details.

2. Non-submerged locations: Stainless steel or FRP.

3. Submerged locations: Stainless steel.

4. Provide accessory fittings, clamps, spring screws, etc. as required.

5. Tyco, Alsco, or equal.

2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE
A. General:

1. In accordance with dimensions, arrangement, sizes and weights or thicknesses indicated on the Drawings or specified.

2. All members free of winds, warps, local deformations or unauthorized bends.

3. Holes and other provisions for field connection accurate and shop checked for proper fit.

Holes shall be neatly drilled or punched. Torch cut hole are not acceptable.

4. Mark each piece according to the erection Drawing.

5. Provide all field connection materials.

B. Connections:

2. Structural:
a. If not indicated on the Drawings, as defined in Part 4 “Connections” of the AISC Manual Ninth Edition.
b. Shop connections may be bolted, welded, or riveted.
05999
c. Bolted connections for girts with slotted or oversized holes for adjustment.

3. All others: If not indicated on the Drawings, unfinished bolts with self locking nuts or lock washers.

C. Shop Coating:

1. Preparation:
a. All surfaces to be at the proper temperature, dry, and free of grease, oil, dirt, dust, grit, rust, loose mill scale, weld flux, slag, weld spatter, and other objectionable substances. b. Scrape, chip and brush welds as required to remove all spatter. c. Dull sharp corners of cut or sheared edges with at least one pass of a power grinder.

2. Galvanizing: Hot dipped after fabrication.

3. Castings: Hot dip in asphalt varnish or coat with coal tar paint, 6 mils minimum.

4. Steel:
a. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, coat with rust inhibitive primer, 1 1/2 mils minimum.
b. Apply after fabrication.
c. Coat as soon after cleaning as practicable.
d. Apply in a heated structure if outside air temperature is below 50 Degrees F. e. Do not move or handle until coating is dry and hard.

5. Aluminum: Coat all surfaces to come in contact with concrete, cement, mortar, or dissimilar metals with coal tar paint, 6 mils minimum.

6. Other surfaces: Do not shop coat galvanized steel, stainless steel, or bronze.

D. Checkered Floor Plate:

1. As indicated on Drawings.

2. If not indicated on Drawings: Aluminum.

3. Provided with lifting hole if not bolted or welded in place.

4. Shop straighten warped or bent plates to lie perfectly flat.

5. Supporting steel members hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Hand and Guard Railings:

1. Galvanized, hot dipped after fabrication.

2. All railings provided of the same type and design, except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings.

3. Steel:
05999
a. 1-1/2-inch standard weight steel pipe.

4. Connections:
a. Welded railing:
1) Make connection angles, offsets or other changes in alignment in pipe railings with prefabricated railing cells and welding connectors, R.B. Wagner, Julius Blum. b. Prefabricated railing: As recommended by railing manufacturer.

5. Fabrication:
a. Smooth with all projecting joints and sharp corners ground smooth. b. Make welded joints flush.
c. Neatly cope members and continuously weld or connect mechanically at all junctions. d. Dress weld fillets to uniform radius, remove excess metal and grind smooth. e. Removable guardrail sections to have two (2) posts each.

6. Sleeves:
a. Fixed posts:
1) Standard weight steel pipe.
2) 6-inch minimum, or larger as required to provide 1/4-inch minimum clearance around post.
b. Removable posts:
1) Outer sleeve: Standard weight black steel pipe.
2) Inner sleeve: Schedule 40 PVC pipe.

7. Safety chain:
a. Provide where indicated on Drawings.
b. 1/4-inch chain, length as required by opening.
c. Fastened to one post with cadmium plated or stainless steel eyebolt. d. Fastened to other post by a 2-1/2-inch heavy duty cadmium plated harness strap engaging a similar eyebolt.

8. Toe boards:
a. All railings to have minimum 1/4-inch by 4-inch toe boards. b. Plates to have slotted holes to allow for alignment and avoid warpage after installation.

F. Grating and Grating Treads:

1. Galvanized.
05999

2. Depth of bearing bars as indicated on Drawings.

3. If not indicated on Drawings: Galvanized steel grating, and galvanized stair treads.

4. Laid out with openings centered on a joint between sections.

5. 3/16-inch toe plates around openings extending the full depth and 4 inches above top of grating.

6. Weld toeplates to each bearing bar.

7. 3/16-inch thick, full depth bands at ends of bearing bars in grating floor sections.

8. Weld bands to first, last and every fourth intermediate bearing bar.

9. Cut cross bars flush with outside face of side bars.

10. Cutting:
a. All cuts: Sawed or sheared.
b. Clean and smooth without fins, beads or other projections.

11. Fabricate in easily handled panels equally spaced or area covered.

12. Maximum weight of each panel: 40 lbs. Submit panel weights with panel layout drawing.

13. Align cross bars and edge bars of adjacent panels.

14. Maximum clearance between panels: 1-1/4 inches.

15. Make all bearing bars parallel.

16. Make all grating flat with no tendency to rock.

17. Tolerance:
a. Length: 3/16-inch.
b. Width: 1/8-inch.
c. Maximum difference on opposite diagonals: 1/4-inch.
d. Bearing bar spacing: 1/32-inch.
e. Band and toeplate vertical and horizontal alignment: 1/8-inch.

18. Grating:
a. Pressure locked - swaging process.
b. Bearing bars: 3/16-inch thick minimum at 1-3/16-inch centers maximum.

19. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication steel frames to be cast in concrete.

G. Aluminum Stair Treads

1. Stair treads:
05999
a. With carrier plates and abrasive nosing.
b. Fastened to stringers with galvanized bolts.
c. Aluminum nosing: Non-slip nose tread.

G. Aluminum Stairs:

1. Erect true to line and slope.

2. Support rigidly and brace and tighten against movement.

3. Install treads level and to perfect alignment and spacing.

4. Attach handrails rigidly and to perfect alignment:
a. Rigid with no noticeable sway or deflection under ordinary foot traffic. b. If necessary, provide additional supports and bracing to prevent noticeable movement.

H. Door Frames: Not Applicable
I. Castings:

1. Manhole covers:
a. Cast iron frame and lid, Neenah R-1769A, Deeter Foundry, McKinley Iron Works, or approved equal.
b. 24-inch clear opening, or as required on Drawings.

J. Galvanized Ladders:

1. Provide in locations shown on contract plans.

2. Vertical dimensions as required and measured in field.

3. Galvanize after fabrication.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Field Measurements: Verify existing conditions by taking field measurements as required.

B. Before assembly, thoroughly clean all parts that will be in contact with each other.

3.02 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Assemble all parts accurately as indicated on the Drawings. 05999

2. Set baseplates level and grout in place.

B. Connections:

1. General:
a. As indicated on the Drawings.
b. Where welding is permitted or required:
1) Butt and miter welds continuous.
2) Exposed welds ground smooth.
3) Intermittent welds:
a) Minimum effective length: 2 inches.
b) Max spacing: 6 inches.
c. No field welding to package factory water treatment plant permitted. d. Light drifting is permitted to draw parts together.
e. No drifting to match unfair holes.
f. Enlarge holes, if necessary, by reaming with twist drills. g. No burning to enlarge holes.

2. Structural steel:
a. High strength bolts:
1) Turn-of-nut tightening as described in "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" in the AISC manual.
2) Use beveled washers when the bearing faces of bolted parts have a slope of 1:20 or greater with respect to a plane perpendicular to the bolt axis. b. No field welding of structural steel, except as indicated on the Drawings:
1) By certified welders.

C. Aluminum Stairs:

1. Erect true to line and slope.

2. Support rigidly and brace and tighten against movement.

3. Install treads level and to perfect alignment and spacing.

D. Handrails and Guard Rails:
05999

1. Install with posts plumb and longitudinal members parallel to each other and to floor or slope of stairs.

2. All members in a section or in true alignment in the same vertical plane.

3. Provide wall brackets where indicated or required, anchored with stainless steel bolts and expansion anchors.

4. Rigidly attach fixed handrail posts to supporting structure:
a. Attach to concrete structure by setting in sleeves, except as otherwise indicated. b. Rigidly support sleeves in accurate alignment in forms. c. Position vertically so sleeve is held below the finished concrete surface. d. Measure the location of each sleeve before fabricating handrail. e. Wedge post in accurate alignment and fill annular space with handrail set in cement. f. Finish top surface of cement smooth and sloping away from post. g. Where indicated, attach to structure with flanges and other special attachments or anchorages.

5. Set removable sections in double sleeves:
a. Set inner sleeve in outer sleeve as specified for fixed posts. b. Take special care that inner sleeves are accurately spaced and plumb so handrail sections will stand in proper alignment and will be removable without binding.

6. Field connections: Locking mechanical splice fittings, R. B. Wagner, Julius Blum and Co., or equal.

7. Slip joints for expansion and contraction:
a. Provide at 30-foot maximum intervals.
b. Gap: Between 1/8 inch and 3/8 inch.

8. Post spacing:
a. Steel: 5 feet maximum.

E. Grating:

1. Do not damage during installation.

2. General areas:
a. Securely anchor in place.
b. Fasten with saddle clips or flange blocks in accordance with ANSI A202.1. 05999
F. Door Frames: Anchor steel clip angles to concrete floors with 1/2-inch bolts and expansion anchors, except as otherwise indicated.

G. Guardrail and Lattice: Tube steel of sizes indicated.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Structural Steel Connections:

1. Provide a platform or other means of access for inspection of each field connection.

2. Leave in place until inspected by Engineer.

B. Guardrail:

1. Check final alignment with a tightly drawn reference wire.

2. Max misalignment allowed: 1/8 inch.

3. Replace bent, damaged or deformed railings.

END OF SECTION
07900
SECTION 07900

SEALANTS AND CAULKING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope: Provide caulking and sealing.

B. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340.

C. Definitions: The terms "caulking" and "sealing" are used on the Drawings and in the Specifications synonymously. Either or both terms indicate the materials specified herein.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards:

1. ASTM C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Polyurethane Sealant:

1. One or two part components.

2. Paintable.

3. Meet ASTM C920 Type S or Type M, Grade NS or P, Class 25, Use NT, T, M, A and O.

1. Pecora Dynatrol-IXL, Dynatrol 11, Urcxpan NR-200, NR-20 1.

2. Sika Chemical Corporation Sikaflex-1 a, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL.

3. Sonneborn Sonolastic NP-1, NP-11 , SL-1 SL-2.

4. Tremco Dymonic or Dymeric, Vulkem 116,227,45,245.

B. Silicone Sealant:
a. One ( 1) component.
b. Meet ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G, A, 0. a. General Electric: Silpruf, Silglaze II.
b. General Electric: Sanitary 1700 sealant for sealing around plumbing fixtures. c. Dow Coming: 786 for sealing around plumbing fixtures. d. Dow Coming: 790, 795.

2. Tremco: Spectrem I, Spectrem 3, Tremsil 600.

4. Mildew resistant for scaling around plumbing fixtures.

C. Compressible Sealant:

1. Size so that width of material is twice joint width.

2. Foamed polyurethane strip saturated with polymerized polybutylene waterproofing coated on front face with nonreactive release agent that will act as bond breaker for applied sealant.
07900
a. Polytite Manufacturing Corp. "Polytite-B."

3. Fire rated where required.

D. Joint Cleaner, Primer, Bond Breaker: As recommended by sealant manufacturer .

E. Sealant Backer Rod and/or Compressible Filler:

1. Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or other flexible, nonabsorbent, non-bituminous material recommended by sealant manufacturer to:
a. Control joint depth.
b. Break bond of sealant at bottom of joint.
c. Provide proper shape of sealant bead.
d. Serve as expansion joint filler.

F. Adhesive, Compressible Sealant: As recommended by sealant manufacturer.

G. Expanding Foam Sealant:

1. One (I) or two (2) component fire rated moisture cured expanding urethane.

2. Shall not contain formaldehyde.

3. Density: Minimum 1.5 pcf.

4. Minimum 70 percent closed cell content.

5. R-value minimum 5.0/JN.

6. Flame spread: Less than 25.

7. Smoke developed: Less than 25.

H. Polysulfide Rubber Sealant:

1. One (I) or two (2) component.

2. Meet ASTM C920.
a. Pecora Synthacalk GC2+.
b. Sonneborn- Sonolastic- two-part polysulfide sealant
c. Morton Polymer Systems - Tbiokol Sealants.

I. Polyurea Joint Filler:

1. Two (2) component, semi-rigid material for filling control, sawcut and construction joints in interior concrete floors.
a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp. "Joint Fill, Joint Seal, Joint Saver II" as required for condition and recommended by manufacturer. b. Euclid Chemical Co. "EUCO QWIK" joint.
c. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. "Joint Tite 750". d. Sonneborn "TF-100" conrroljoint filler.

2. Comply with ACI 302.1 R performance recommendations regarding control and construction joints.

3. Color: Gray.

2.02 MANUFACTURE
A. Colors: Manufacturer's standard colors to best blend in with location. 07900
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning:

1. Clean surfaces to receive sealant of all dust, grease, oil, or wax.

2. Wipe surfaces with clean rag soaked in xylol or suitable solvent.

B. Backup Material:

1. Where required to control depth of sealant, install backup material.

2. When compressed 25 percent to 50 percent fills the joint space.

3. Rolled or pressed into place avoiding lengthwise stretching.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install Sealants Before Painting.

B. Install Sealants Only When the Air and Surface Temperatures are Above 50 Degrees F.

C. Tool Each Joint to a Smooth, Even Finish, Flush with the Edges of the Sealing Recess.

D. Keep Adjacent Surfaces Clean and Free of Overlapping Sealant.

E. Apply to a Depth Equal to Joint Width, But Not Less Than 1/2 Inch.

F. Remove Sealant and Reseal Joints at Which:

1. Excess sealant is outside the joint and feathered onto surfaces.

2. It is not possible to paint adjacent surfaces to a clean line.

3.03 SEALING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Areas:

1. Polyurethane.

B. Interior Wet Areas:

1. Silicone.

C. Interior Corrosive Areas:

1. Polyurethane.

D. Submerged or prolonged contact with wastewater:

1. Polysulfide.

E. Around plumbing fixtures and casework:

1. Silicone
F. Penetrations through exterior wall above grade

1. Expanding Urethane foam with polyurethane sealant

2. In corrosive areas finish with polysulfide sealant.
07900
G. Interior floor joints or sawed joints:

1. Polyurea joint filler
H. Silicone:

1. Where type not otherwise specified.

END OF SECTION
09900
SECTION 09900

PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1. 1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included: Field painting of all new non-prefinished items provided in Contract including surface preparation and surface protection:

1. Repair of shop-painted surfaces damaged during shipment, handling, or installation.

2. Field priming of all new surfaces that are not shop-primed.

3. Field finishing of all shop-primed surfaces.

4. Field finishing of all field-primed surfaces.

5. Field finish of all above grade process piping, yard piping and pumping equipment.

B. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Section 01340.

2. Delivery Storage and Handling: Section 01600.

3. Operating and Maintenance Data: Section 01340.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acceptable Paint System Manufacturers:

1. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec Company and Carboline as the basis of minimum acceptable material specification and quality.

2. Subject to compliance with Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are approved as acceptable equivalents, and the appropriate paint type equivalent to that originally specified may be submitted:
a. Ameron
b. Pittsburgh Paints
c. DeVoe
d. Tnemec
e. Or approved equal
09900
B. Referenced Standards:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. A224.1, Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.
b. Z53.1, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

3. National Bureau of Standards (NBS):
a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards.

4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. 101, Life Safety Code.
5 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
a. SP-1, Solvent Cleaning.
b. SP-2, Hand Tool Cleaning.
c. SP-3, Power Tool Cleaning.
d. SP-6, Commercial Blast Cleaning.
e. SP-10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.
f. TR-3/NACE 6A192 - Dehumidification and temperature control during surface preparation, application and curing for coatings/linings of steel tank.

C. Include on Label of Containers:

1. Manufacturer's name.

2. Type of paint.

3. Manufacturer's stock number.

4. Color.

5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.

6. Label analysis.

7. Federal specification number.

D. Sampling of Material:

1. Provide test samples at random from sealed containers stored on-site.

E. Paint Used in Successive Field Coats by Same Manufacturer.

F. Field Coats Should Not Damage Shop Applied Undercoats. 09900
G. Water Reducible Alkyd Primers are not Permitted.

H. Film Thickness Gauges:

1. Painter to maintain onsite one wet film thickness gauge for use by Owner during all painting activities.

2. Painter to maintain one magnetic style dry film thickness gauge onsite for use by Owner during all painting activities.

3. Painter to maintain onsite for use by Owner calibration plates for the dry film thickness gauge.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Approval of Applicator.

B. Applicator Experience Qualifications.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. See Section 01340.

2. Provide VOC (gm/l) emittance concentrations for all paint types submitted. and certification of compliance with the local County Air Quality requirements.

3. Complete Manufacturer's Product Data, Certificates, and Test Data.

4. Label each paint submittal with paint type and the intended use for that specific paint type.

5. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions.

D. Color Samples:

1. Furnish color chips for color selection by Owner.

2. Prepare stained wood samples on type and quality of wood specified for use on Project.

3. Engineer will prepare color schedule after submittals. Contractor will provide colors in accordance with Schedule. Selections by Owner may exceed manufacturer's standard range of colors.

E. Maintenance Data: Include in Materials and Finishes Manual; see Section 01340.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver Materials in Original, Sealed Containers, Labeled as Follows:

1. Name or type of material.

2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number.
09900

3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents.

4. Warning labels.

5. VOC content.

6. All labels legible and intact.

B. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable Project materials on Project site.

2. Store in a suitable location inside and protect from freezing.

3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment.

4. Comply with health and fire regulations.

5. Provide necessary ventilation of entire storage area.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be applied.

2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.

3. Air and surface temperature within those recommended by manufacturer for coating being applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Use Product of Single Manufacturer for Coating Systems for Each Type of Surface.

B. Use Paint Compatible with Shop Coating or Primer for Field Coating of Shop-Painted or Primed Surfaces.

C. Use Only Mercury-Free, Fume-Proof Paint for Intermediate and Finish Coats.

D. Use Only Lead-Free Paint or Paint That Does Not Cause Discoloration.

E. Provide Tie Coats Where Recommended by Manufacturer. 09900
F. Use Only Paint Which Complies with VOC Limits Defined by the Local Air Quality Regulations.

G. Provide Surface Preparation for Each Paint Type and Surface Type in Accordance with Manufacturer's Recommendations.

H. Paint of same type and color to be from the same manufacturing ‘lot’ or ‘run’ number to ensure color continuity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and that cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work as included in Preparation of Surfaces.

B. Do Not Proceed with Surface Preparation or Coating Application Until Conditions Are Suitable.

C. Engineer to Inspect and Approve Surface Preparation of all Areas Prior to Painting.

D. Engineer will confirm paint film thickness using thickness gauge provided by contractor.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
A. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, per Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, "Systems and Specifications:"

1. Complete fabrication, welding or burning prior to beginning surface preparation:
a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other laminations left from welding. b. Remove mill scale.
c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections.

2. Steel: Structural, tanks, pipe, and equipment:
a. Nonsubmerged: SSPC-SP-6.
b. Submerged or partially submerged: SSPC-SP10.
c. High temperature surfaces subject to heat in excess of 600 Degrees F: SSPC-SP10.

3. Mill-coated steel pipe:
a. Exterior nonsubmerged: Clean and dry.
09900
b. Exterior submerged: SSPC-SP10.

4. Galvanized steel: SSPC-SP1 for dry surfaces; SSPC-SP7 for damp surfaces.

5. Steel pipe receiving fusion bonded epoxy: SSPC-SP10.

6. Stainless steel: Solvent clean.

7. Sandblast exterior bituminous coating off of DIP sections scheduled to receive epoxy paint coating:
a. All above grade sections of DIP.

B. Wood:

1. Clean soiled surfaces with alcohol wash

2. Except where rough exterior surface is specified, sand to smooth and even surface, then dust or vacuum off

3. Apply knot sealer to all knots, pitch, and resinous sap wood before priming coat is applied

4. Fill nail holes, cracks, open joints, and other defects with wood filler or putty compatible with type of finish after priming coat has dried. Color to match finish color.

5. Do not paint creosote-treated wood or wood treated with colored metallic naphtenates, unless otherwise indicated

6. Mildewed wood:
a. Treat with hypochlorite solution.
b. Mix: 8 parts hypochlorite household bleach and 1 part detergent to 32 parts water. c. Thoroughly rinse after application.
d. Allow to dry before painting.

C. Gypsum Wallboard:

1. Fill narrow, shallow cracks and small holes with spackling compound.

2. Rake deep, wide cracks and deep holes:
a. Dampen with clear water.
b. Plaster; fill with thin layers of patching plaster.
c. Gypsum wallboard; fill with thin layer of drywall joint cement.

3. Allow to dry.

4. Sand smooth; do not raise nap of paper on wallboard. 09900

5. Apply drywall texturing by spray to achieve an orange peel texture.

6. Do not texture walls to receive wall coverings or tile.

D. Concrete, Masonry and Cement Plaster:

1. Remove all dirt, dust, stains, and grease before painting.

2. Fill cracks and irregularities in concrete surfaces with portland cement grout to provide uniform
surface texture.

3. Etch floors with 25 percent solution (by weight) muriatic acid, then rinse thoroughly.

4. Fill concrete masonry unit surfaces with block filler, except interior building surfaces to be painted with latex which do not need to be filled.

5. Fill all voids prior to painting.

6. Do not paint until moisture content falls below 8 percent.

7. Cure 28 days minimum prior to coating.

8. New concrete in submerged or partially submerged applications or exposed to fumes: Brushoff blast in accordance with SSPC-SP-7.

E. Aluminum:

1. Clean surface with mineral spirits.

2. Where in contact with concrete: Apply coal tar epoxy after cleaning.

F. Copper:

1. Buff or polish to bright color.

2. Remove flux residue from joints in copper tubing.

3. Clean surface with mild phosphoric acid cleaner.

4. Apply finish while surface is clean and bright.

G. PVC Plastic:

1. Remove all wax and oil with solvent in accordance with recommendations of primer manufacturer.

H. Hardware:

1. Remove any visible dirt, corrosion, or foreign material.

I. Sandblasting Procedures:
09900

1. Per OSHA.

2. Do not allow surfaces to become wet after blasting and before painting.

3. Apply primer same day as blasting.

4. Depth of sandblasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or greater than 2 mils.

5. Air free of water and oil.

6. Confine sandblast sand to area being prepared.

7. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, motors, and other damageable items.

8. Do not reuse sand.

9. Plug pipe, holes, or openings before sandblasting. Keep covered until sand removed.

J. Surface Preparation of Previously Painted Surfaces:

1. Remove existing paint that has tendency to powder, peel, or shatter when scraped with a knife.

2. Remove all paint from entire surface that is less than 75 percent intact.

3. The modular treatment units (Unit #6) exterior will be factory primed prior to shipment.

Remove all chalked or hazed primer and prepare to accept finish coat in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

K. Protection of Surfaces:

1. Use drop cloths, masking tape, and other measures to protect all surfaces from accidental spraying, spattering, or spilling of paint.

2. Contractor to repair all damage caused by painting to other items of Work.

3. Immediately remove paint deposited on surfaces not being painted.

4. Surface clean bituminous paints spilled or dropped and spot paint with aluminum paint prior to specified paint.

5. Remove and rebuild concrete surfaces damaged by paint, or where authorized by Engineer, paint with 2 coats masonry paint.

3.3 MIXING AND TINTING
A. Deliver Paints and Enamels Ready-Mixed to Job Site.

B. Mix Only in Mixing Pails, Suitably Sized, Nonferrous or Oxide Metal Pans.

C. Use Tinting Colors Recommended by Manufacturer for Specific Type of Finish.

D. Do Not Add Any Adulterants or Unauthorized Thinners.

E. Thoroughly Mix Each Time Paint Withdrawn From Container.

F. Keep Containers Closed Tightly, Except While Paint is Withdrawn.

G. All Paint Factory Mixed.
09900
H. Thinning Only Permitted to Obtain Recommended Coverage at Lower Application Temperatures.

I. Do Not Thin Paint Below Recommended Coverage Rate.

J. Two Part Epoxy Paint Systems:

1. Painter shall notify Engineers/Owner’s onsite inspector prior to mixing of each batch of two-part epoxy paint.

2. Contractor shall verify for inspector that appropriate "sweat in" time has been provided for each batch in accordance with paint manufacturer's specifications.

3.4 APPLICATION
A. General Requirements:

1. Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within moisture limitations of paint manufacturer.

3. Apply paint with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment:
a. Rate of application shall not exceed that as recommended by paint manufacturer for the surface involved.
b. Keep brushes, rollers, and spraying equipment clean, dry, free from contaminants and suitable for the finish required.

4. Comply with recommendation of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats.

5. Vary slightly the color of successive coats. Final coat color to be uniform.

6. Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet.

7. Finish coats shall be smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps or pile up of paints, and skipped or missed areas.

8. Inspection:
a. Do not apply additional coats until completed coat has been inspected by the Engineer. b. Only inspected coats of paint will be considered in determining number of coats applied.

9. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

10. Leave all parts of moldings and ornaments clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners or depressions.

11. Apply primer on all work before glazing.

12. Refinish whole wall where portion of finish color is not uniform or has been damaged or is not acceptable.
09900

13. Surfaces to be painted with water-thinned paint: Spot prime exposed nails and other ferrous metals with aluminum paint.

14. Application temperatures:
a. 60 Degrees F to 100 Degrees F for epoxy based coatings. b. 45 Degrees F to 100 Degrees F for all other paint.

15. Relative humidity: Provide dehumidification control in accordance with 3.04 A 2 above.

B. Painted Work:

1. Back prime all exterior woodwork with oil-base primer.

2. Back prime all interior trim.

3. Runs on face not permitted.

C. Stained and Natural Finish:

1. Adjust natural finishes as necessary to obtain identical appearance on all woodwork of a similar type.

D. Rate of Application:

1. Coverage not greater than value recommended by manufacturer.

2. Use of paint thinner not to be used as means of extending coverage of paint.

F. Touch-up:

1. Touch-up paint to be applied with roller or spray to provide similar texture to original primer or finish coat. Brush apply touch-up only for small areas approved by Engineer, or where original prime or finish coats approved to be brush applied.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Touch-Up and Restore Finish Where Damaged.

B. Remove Spilled, Splashed, Splattered or Overspray Paint from All Surfaces.

C. Do Not Mar Surface Finish of Item Being Cleaned.

D. Leave Storage Space Clean and in Condition Required for Equivalent Spaces in Project.

3.6 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Metal Surfaces:

1. All non-submerged surfaces of structural and miscellaneous steel in exterior locations, handrails (unless galvanized), structural steel and miscellaneous steel supports for piping and 09900
walkways, exterior of fusion bonded epoxy steel process piping and pumps and motors except as specified elsewhere:
a. Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboguard 890 at 5.0 mils. b. Finish: Tnemec Series 1075 Urethane or Carbolline Carbothane 134 VOC at 5.0 mils.” c. Total dry film thickness: 10.0 mils.

2. All non-submerged surfaces of structural and miscellaneous steel inside buildings except as specified elsewhere.
a. Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboguard 890 at 5.0 mils. b. Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboguard 890 at 5.0 mils. c. Total dry-film thickness: 10.0 mils.

3. All submerged or partially submerged and buried surfaces, not in contact with potable water and unless otherwise specified, including valves, valve boxes, cast iron and steel pipe, supports, fittings, flanges and bolts, excluding piping laid in the ground:
a. Primer: Series 69 at 6.0 mils or Bitumastic “Superservice Black” at 10 mils.” b. Finish: Series 69 at 6.0 mils or Bitumastic Superservice Black at 10 mils. c. Total dry film thickness: 20.0 mils.

4. All exposed surfaces of cast iron and steel piping inside buildings and above-grade outdoors, including valves, fittings, flanges, bolts, supports, and accessories therefor, including galvanized surfaces:
a. Primer: Tnemec Series 135 Chembuild or Carboguard 890 at 5.0 mils. b. Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboguard 890 at 6.0 mils. c. Total dry film thickness: 11.0 mils.

5. All exposed surfaces of electrical conduit inside buildings, except banks of conduits in multiple layers hung from ceilings, including fittings, boxes, supports, and accessories therefore:
a. Finish: Two coats Series 135-1243 Chembuild or Carboguard 890 at 3.0-4.0 mils each. b. Total dry film thickness: 6.0-8.0 mils.

6. All metal harness anchorage for buried piping:
a. Primer: None.
b. Finish: Tnemec 46H413 Fibertar or Carboline Bitumastic 300M at 16 - 20 mils. c. Total dry-film thickness: 16 – 20 mils.

7. Miscellaneous castings, including manhole rings, covers and steps:
a. Primer: None.
09900
b. Finish: Tnemec 46H413 Fibertar or Carboline Bitumastic 300M at 16 – 20 mils. c. Total dry-film thickness: 16 – 20 mils.”

8. Surfaces of aluminum or galvanized sheet metal ductwork exposed inside buildings:
a. Primer: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Rustbond PS/FC at 2.0-2.5 mils. b. Finish: Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboguard 890 at 3.0-4.0 mils. c. Total dry-film thickness: 5.0-6.5 mils.

9. Copper tubing: Not painted.

10. Polished brass or bronze: Minimum of 2 coats clear satin varnish, 2 mils dry film.

11. Precast vaults and manholes: Section 02513
B. Concrete Surfaces: Not Painted except for precast vaults and manholes below grade: Section 02513 C. Wood:

1. Interior wood trim and interior wood doors for opaque finish:
a. Finish: Two coats Series 6 Tneme-Cryl or Carboline Sanitile 120/155 at 2.0-3.0 mils each.
b. Total dry-film thickness: 4.0-6.0 mils.

2. Interior wood trim and interior wood doors for transparent finish:
a. Primer: Wood stain - color selection by Owner.
b. Finish: Two coats clear satin varnish.
c. Total dry-film thickness: 2.0 mils minimum.

3. Interior wood casework for transparent finish:
a. Primer: Wood stain - color selection by Owner.
b. Finish: Two coats clear satin varnish.
c. Total dry-film thickness: 2.0 mils minimum.

4. Exterior trim, exterior side of wood doors:
a. Primer: Exterior wood stain.
b. Finish: Exterior wood stain.

OR
a. Finish: Two coats Series 6 Tneme-Cryl or Carboline Sanitile 120/155 at 2.0-3.0 mils each.
b. Total dry-film thickness: 4.0-6.0 mils.

5. Exterior siding:
09900
a. Primer: Not used.
b. Finish: Not used.

6. Interior wood casework for opaque finish:
a. Finish: Two coats Series 6 Tneme-Cryl or Carboline Sanitile 120/155 at 2.0-3.0 mils each.
b. Total dry-film thickness: 4.0-6.0 mils.

E. Miscellaneous Surfaces:

1. Gypsum wallboard:
a. Primer: Tnemec Series 6 Tneme-Cryl or Carboline Sanitile 120. b. Finish: Tnemec Series 6 Tneme-Cryl or Carboline Sanitile 155. c. Total dry-film thickness: 4.0-6.0 mils.

2. Gypsum wallboard in restrooms:
a. Primer: Tnemec 201 Epoxoprime or Carboline Santile 120 at 4.0-5.0 mils. b. Finish: Tnemec 280 Tneme-Glaze or Carboline Sanitile 555 at 4.0-5.0 mils. c. Total dry-film thickness: Minimum 8.0-10.0 mils.

3. Insulated piping:
a. Finish: Two coats Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboline Carboguard 890 at 4.0-6.0 mils each.
b. Total dry-film thickness: Minimum 8.0-12.0 mils.

4. PVC piping:
a. Finish: Two coats Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline or Carboline Carboguard 890 at 4.0-6.0 mils each.
b. Total dry film thickness: Minimum 8.0-12.0 mils.

3.7 SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED
A. Except As Otherwise Required or Directed, Do Not Paint the Following Surfaces:

1. Exposed surfaces of aluminum, except ductwork and conduit.

2. Polished or finished stainless steel. Unfinished stainless steel shall be painted.

3. Nickel or chromium.

4. Galvanized surfaces, except piping, conduit, duct work, and other items specifically noted.

5. Piping concealed in inaccessible plumbing chases and above suspended ceilings.

6. Rubber and plastics, including fiberglass-reinforced plastics. 09900

7. Exterior concrete.

8. Surfaces specified to be factory finished.

3.8 PIPING
A. Paint All Exposed Piping and Piping in Accessible Places in Accordance with Color Schedule in Section 10400.

B. Paint any piping not scheduled to be color-coded to match adjacent wall or ceiling surface, include appropriate service identification and flow direction arrows.

C. Do not paint uninsulated stainless steel or PVC pipe, except where PVC pipe is exposed to sunlight; for color-coding, use bands of specified color on surface of pipe.

D. Paint pipe labeling in accordance with Section 10400. Locate lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not less than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe.

E. Provide metal tags instead of lettering for all pipes with outside diameter or pipe covering diameter 5/8-inch or smaller. Tags are to be of stainless steel or aluminum with identifying lettering stamped in and fastened to pipe with suitable chains.

END OF SECTION
10400
SECTION 10400

IDENTIFYING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work Included:

1. Signs and Tags:
a. Safety, caution, danger and hazard signs.
b. Stamped metal tags for field equipment and instruments. c. Tagging of valves, pumps, motors, conduit, instrumentation and process equipment.

2. Pipeline marking tape to identify buried pipe:
a. All pressure lines.
b. All drain lines 4 inches or larger.

3. Locating wire:
a. All non-metallic buried pipe.

4. Color coding, labeling, stenciling, and tagging of all exposed process, water and air piping.

5. Identification and tagging of electrical and instrumentation equipment.

6. Wire numbering standards: See Division 16 specifications.

B. Additional Requirements Specified Elsewhere:

1. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples: Section 01340.

2. Painting: Section 09900.

3. Piping: Section 15500 – Piping Schedules

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340.

B. Product Technical Data Including:

1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced.

2. Identification register listing all items to be identified, type of identification system to be used, lettering, location and color.

3. Catalog information for all tagging systems.

4. Updated, complete, identification register with non-conflicting numerical assignments submitted prior to project acceptance.
10400
C. Drawings and Data:

1. Signs: Submit schedule of all signs, including data describing size, colors, materials, letter sizes, mounting and schedule of signage.

2. Tape: Material, size, color, detectability.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Signs:

1. Indoor installation; wall, bracket or pipe mount as directed by Engineer.

2. Outdoor installation; wall mount, direct sunlight, locate as directed by Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Paint: As specified in Painting Section 09900.

B. Metal Tags and Attachment Wire:

1. Tags: Aluminum or stainless steel.

2. Stamped-in identifying letters.

3. Colors: Two colors, lettering on separate background color. Colors as selected by the Owner.

4. Size: 3 inch diameter, minimum, or larger as required.

5. Wire: 32 mil, nylon coated, stainless steel, no substitution.

6. Tag numbers in accordance with valve and equipment schedules in respective sections and numbering shown on P&ID’s.

7. WH Brady Company, Carlton Industries, or equal.

C. Snap-on Markers: Plastic sleeves, Seton Name Plate "Setmark," WH Brady Company, Carlton Industries, or equal.

D. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Signs:

1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers:
a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-120, Carlton Industries, or equal.

2. Material: Fiberglass reinforced plastic.

3. Size:
a. Surface: As scheduled.
b. Thickness: 0.10 inch.
10400

4. Fabrication:
a. Rounded corners.
b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets.

5. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded.

E. Phenolic Nameplates:

1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers:
a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-1, Carlton Industries, or equal.

2. Materials: Phenolic.

3. Size:
a. Surface: As required for text.
b. Thickness: 1/16 inch.

4. Fabrication:
a. Three layers laminated.
b. Legend engraved through top lamination into center lamination. c. Drilled holes with grommets for mounting.

2.2 SAFETY SIGNS
A. General:

1. Material: Fiberglass reinforced resin/glass.

2. Construction:
a. Graphics laminated between resin glass shields.
b. Thickness: 1/16 inch.
c. Grommeted corner holes.

3. Abrasion and impact resistant.

B. Standards:

1. All safety signage must comply with the OSHA 1910.145 standard

2. Danger placards must comply with the NFPA 704 “Fire Diamond” standard C. Required Signs:

1. Sodium Hypochlorite danger placard on each tank, at top of stairs, and near fill station

2. Emergency shower and eyewash identification placards 10400

3. PPE requirements sign visible at fill station

2.3 PIPELINE AND ELECTRICAL CONDUIT MARKING TAPE
A. Material: Mylar Encased Aluminum.

B. Width: 2 inches.

C. Color: Orange or Yellow.

D. Printed Identification:

1. Pressure lines: "Caution: Buried Water Line Below".

2. Drain lines: "Caution: Buried Drain Line Below".

3. Electrical: “Caution: Electrical Below”.

4. Sodium Hypochlorite- Utilize appropriate identification indicating corrosive hazard E. Capable of Being Located From Above Ground With Metal Locator.

2.4 LOCATING WIRE
A. No. 10 AWG, Continuous, Solid Copper, with UF Coating.

2.05 TANK LABELS
A. Provide identification labels
a. Durable 4 mil self-adhesive vinyl labels
b. Adhere quickly and firmly
c. Labels are for outdoor use and will not fade in sunlight d. Labels come in a variety of color combinations
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Location of Identification:

1. Lettering and flow direction arrows:
a. Near equipment served.
b. Adjacent to valves.
c. At each branch or tee.
10400
d. At intervals of not more than 50 feet on straight runs, unless otherwise indicated by the Engineer.

2. "Caution," "Danger," and identification signs located at direction of Engineer.

B. Metal Tags:

1. Provide tags in lieu of stenciling/lettering on pipe 5/8 inch or smaller outside diameter (including covering).

2. Color code as specified.

3. Attach with stainless wire and stainless crimps.

C. Lettering:

1. Self adhesive or snap-on style markers.

2. Letter size as follows:

Outside Diameter of Pipe or Covering Minimum Height of Letters 5/8 inch or smaller Metal tags – 1/4 inch
3/4 inch through 4 inches 3/4 inch
5 inches or larger 2 inches
D. Scheduled Color Coding:

1. All 12 inch pipe and smaller.

2. Bands where scheduled: 6 inches wide, at 5 foot intervals.

3. Provide only bands of color on uninsulated stainless steel, CPVC, and PVC, elsewhere natural finish.

E. Piping Not Scheduled:

1. Paint to match wall or ceiling, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

2. Appropriately identify and place flow arrows

3. Uninsulated stainless steel and PVC:
a. Natural finish.

F. Pipeline Marking Tape:

1. Install continuously above all buried pipe.

2. Depth: 4 inches, 6 inches.

3. Terra Tape, or equal
G. Pipeline Locating Wire:
10400

1. Install continuously, tape to all non-metallic buried pipe.

2. See details on plans for continuation at valve boxes.

H. Piping Not Scheduled:

1. Paint to match wall or ceiling, unless otherwise directed by Engineer.

2. Appropriately identify and place flow arrows.

3. Uninsulated stainless steel, CPVC and PVC:
a. Natural finish.

3.2 SCHEDULES
A. Piping Color Schedule:

Pipe Color of Pipe Lettering
Potable Water Light Blue Black
Non-potable Water Purple White
Hypochlorite Yellow Black
B. PVC Piping (Chemical Feed Systems) to be labeled and banded only.

C. Paint Vent Lines to Match Surfaces They Adjoin.

D. Specially Paint the Following Items:

Item Color
Valve handwheels and levers Red
E. Danger Signs:

1. Size: 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.

2. Standard OSHA header, "Danger," white letters on red background in upper half of sign.

3. Baked enamel on 0.063 inch aluminum.

8. Mount in location directed by Engineer.

F. Pipeline Labeling Markers:

1. Label all process piping as listed below.

2. Peel and press self-adhesive style labels.

3. White lettering on green background.

4. Size markers for pipe size per label manufacturer=s recommendations.

5. Secure each pipeline label marker with self-adhesive flow arrow tape, one full wrap minimum at each end of label. White arrows on colored background, same color as pipeline label.

6. Legend:
10400
Label Quantity
Potable Water As shown on drawings
Hypochlorite As shown on drawings
G. Metal Tags:

1. Schedule:
a. All field instrumentation in accordance with the P&ID plan sheets. b. All motors in accordance with the P&ID plan sheets.
c. All pumps in accordance with the P&ID plan sheets.

O. Valve Tags:

1. Provide valve tags
P. Conduit Tags:

1. Conduit tags in accordance with conduit schedules on contract electrical plan sheet.

Q. Instrumentation Tags:

1. Instrumentation tags in accordance with instrumentation schedules in Division 13, and as shown on P&ID plan sheets.

END OF SECTION
11010
SECTION 11010

BULK CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS
PART 1-GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS

1. The VENDOR shall provide two vertical, high density cross-linked polyethylene tanks and accessories per section 2.05, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

2. Unit Responsibility: The VENDOR shall be responsible for furnishing and delivering the vertical tank(s) and its accessories for the chemical storage tanks as described herein. The VENDOR shall be responsible for unloading the tanks onsite at a location specified by the OWNER.

1.02 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS
A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).

1. D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics

2. D883 Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics

4. D1505 Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique

5. D1693 ESCR Specification Thickness 0.125" F50-10% Igepal

6. F412 Standard Terminology Relating to Plastic Piping Systems B. ANSI Standards: B-16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings C. Building Code: International Building Code, IBC 2018 / 2021 D. ARM: Low Temperature Impact Resistance (Falling Dart Test Procedure).

E. NSF/ANSI Standard 61, AWWA – Drinking Water System Components F. ASTM D-1998, Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks

1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall be approved by the engineer or contractor prior to the manufacturing of the vertical tank(s). Submit the following as a single complete initial submittal. Sufficient data shall be included to show that the product conforms to the Specification requirements. Provide the following additional information:

1. Vertical tank and Fitting Material
a. Resin Manufacturer Data Sheet
b. Fitting Material
c. Gasket style and material
d. Bolt material
e. Fitting sizes and connection types as applicable.

2. Dimensioned Tank Drawings
a. Location and orientation of openings, fittings, accessories, restraints and supports. b. Details of manways, flexible connections, and vents. 11010

3. Calculations shall be stamped and signed by a registered, third-party engineer in the State of California.
a. Tank restraint system. Show seismic and wind criteria and include required embedded anchorage.

B. Manufacturer’s warranty
C. Manufacturer's unloading procedure
D. Manufacturer's installation instructions
E. Supporting information of Quality Management System.

F. Electrical heat tracing and foam insulation data sheets as required.

G. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Submit to engineer a list of 5 installations in the same service as proof of manufacturer's qualifications.

H. Factory Test Report

1. Wall thickness verification.

2. Fitting placement verification.

3. Visual inspection

4. Impact test

5. Gel test

6. Hydrostatic test
I. Coating and insulation system information.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Vendor shall provide a vertical tank of high density cross-linked polyethylene. Tanks furnished under this Section shall be supplied by a Vendor who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of chemical storage tanks for over 10 years.

B. Tanks shall be manufactured from virgin materials.

1.05 WARRANTY
A. Vendor to provide a minimum 5-year tank warranty per Section 01740.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Tanks shall be rotationally-molded, vertical, high density cross-linked polyethylene, onepiece seamless construction, cylindrical in cross-section and vertical with flat bottoms.

Tanks shall be adequately vented. Where indicated, tanks shall be provided with ancillary mechanical fittings and accessories. Tanks shall be marked to identify the manufacturer, date of manufacture, and serial numbers which must be permanently embossed into the tank.

2.02 Not used.

2.03 POLYETHYLENE STORAGE TANKS
A. Service: Chemical storage tanks shall be suited for the following operating conditions:
a. Exposed to an open-air environment and full sunlight exposure. b. Climatic conditions for the Lakeport Area (Obtained from “timeanddate.com”) i. Frequent summer days with temperatures above 100˚ F in direct sunlight ii. Average Temperature: 60˚ F
11010
iii. Average December Daily Minimum Temperature: 36˚ F
iv. Average July Daily Maximum Temperature: 93˚ F
v. Average Inches of Annual Rainfall: 34.7”
vi. Average Humidity: 61%
B. High Density Cross-linked Polyethylene resin used in the tank manufacture shall be crosslinked polyethylene and shall contain ultraviolet stabilizer as recommended by resin manufacturer. The tank material shall be rotationally molded.

C. For sodium hypochlorite, tank resin shall include an antioxidant polyethylene system bonded to the interior surface during the manufacturing process.

D. Wall thickness for a given hoop stress is to be calculated in accordance with ASTM D 1998. In NO case shall the tank thickness be less than design requirements per ASTM D 1998.

1. The wall thickness of any cylindrical portion at any fluid level shall be determined by the following equation:

T = P x OD/2SD or 0.433 x SG x H x OD/2SD
Where: T = wall thickness, in
P = pressure, psi
SG = specific gravity, gm/cc
H = fluid head, ft
OD = outside diameter, ft
SD = hydrostatic design stress
a. The minimum wall thickness shall be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without external support but shall not be less than 0.187” thick.

2. On closed top tanks the top head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall. Its minimum thickness shall be equal to the thickness of the top of the straight sidewall. In most cases, flat areas shall be provided for attachment of large fittings on the dome of the tank.

3. The bottom head shall be integrally molded with the cylindrical wall. Knuckle radius shall be:

Tank Diameter, ft Min Knuckle Radius, in
less than or equal to 6 1
greater than 6 1-1/2

4. Tanks shall have at least 3 lifting lugs. Lugs shall be designed for lifting the tank when empty. VENDOR to provide crate to offload tanks onsite. a. Manways shall be 24-in diameter or greater and equipped with a combined manway and vent to prevent over pressurization of tank. Manway must be capable of relieving a volume flow rate of up to 2650 ACFM. Gaskets shall be FKM Viton or equal.

NOTE: Tanks must be vented to allow for performance at atmospheric pressure. The minimum vent diameter is 6”.
11010
E. Tank color shall be white. Tank resin shall contain titanium dioxide based white pigment and ultraviolet (UV) radiation protection.

2.04 TANK ACCESSORIES
A. Not used.

B. Restraint System:

1. Metal components to be stainless steel with stainless steel cables and clamps.

2. Tank restraint system shall be supplied and the design certified by a Structural or Civil Engineer registered in the State of California. Design shall conform to the most recent edition of the IBC code for seismic and wind load. Anchor bolts, as required by the calculations, shall be supplied by the tank manufacturer. Calculations to assume that the concrete will have a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. VENDOR to verify minimum tank pedestal edge distance to develop the full strength of the restraint system and include it in an initial submittal.

C. Not used.

D. Insulation:

1. Insulation used shall be polyurethane foam with a density of 2.5 lb/ft3 with a minimum an “R” value of 6.3/in. The foam shall be applied with a nominal thickness of 2” to the external tank surfaces except the tank bottom.

2. Upon completion of application and curing of the insulation, 2 full coverage coats of white latex mastic coating shall be applied to the surface of the insulation in such manner as to seal the insulation from the outside environment.

2.05 TANKS:

A. Tank Schedule per the following specifications:
a. Approximate overall height: 12’ 6” to 13’ 2” as measured along the straight cylindrical portion of the tank and including the dome top b. Minimum working volume 5,500 gallons
c. Tank height to provide adequate freeboard per ASCE 7-16 seismic sloshing requirements
d. Outer diameter 9’ 10” to 10’ 2”
B. Fittings

1. Threaded fittings shall use American Standard Pipe Threads. If tanks are insulated, fittings shall be installed at the factory prior to application of the insulation.

2. Bolted flange fittings shall be constructed of one 150 lb. flange with ANSI bolt pattern, one flange gasket and stud bolts with gaskets. Stud bolts to have chemical 11010
resistant polyethylene injection molded heads and gaskets to provide a sealing surface between the bolt head and the interior tank wall. Stud bolt heads are to be color coded for visual ease of identifying the bolt material by onsite operators. a. Green- 316 Stainless Steel
b. Black- Titanium
c. Red- Alloy C-276
d. Blue- Monel.

All materials shall be compatible with chemical service. VFKM Viton or equal gaskets shall be supplied.

3. For sodium hypochlorite and sulfuric acid storage, Bolted One-Piece Sure Seal (B.O.S.S.), double flange fittings constructed of virgin polyethylene shall be supplied. Bolts will be welded to a common backing ring and encapsulated with polyethylene preventing fluid contact with the metal material. Flange will have one full face gasket to provide a sealing surface against inside tank wall. All materials shall be compatible with chemical service and as indicated in the fitting schedule above. FKM Viton or equal gaskets shall be supplied.

4. Down Pipes and Fill Pipes: Down pipes and fill pipes shall be supported at 6-ft max intervals by the CONTRACTOR. Down pipes and fill pipes shall be PVC or material compatible with the chemical stored. VENDOR to provide internal antifoam fill elbow.

5. All fittings on the 1/3 lower sidewall of tanks shall have 100% virgin PTFE Flexijoint® or equal expansion joint. Expansion joint to have a minimum of 3 convolutions, stainless steel limit cables and FRP composite flanges. Galvanized parts will not be accepted.

Expansion joint to meet the following minimum performance requirements:

Axial Compression ≥ 0.67”
Axial Extension ≥ 0.67”
Lateral Deflection ≥ 0.51”
Angular Deflection ≥ 14º
Torsional Rotation ≥ 4º

2.06 LEVEL INDICATION
A. Float Indication: Clear level sight glass to be installed and provided by CONTRACTOR.

B. Ultrasonic Level Indicator: CONTRACTOR to install and provide ultrasonic level indicator.

The ultrasonic level indicator shall be a Flowline or equal ultrasonic level transmitter, level controller with one 4-20 mA or 0-10 VDC continuous level input and NEMA 4X box. VENDOR to verify appropriate mounting surface for level device.

2.07 FACTORY TESTING
A. Material Testing

1. Perform gel and low temperature impact tests in accordance with ASTM D 1998 on condition samples cut from each polyethylene chemical storage tank. 11010

2. Degree of Crosslinking. Use Method C of ASTM D 1998- Section11.4 to determine the ortho-xylene insoluble fraction of cross-linked polyethylene gel test. Samples shall test at no less than 60 percent.

B. Tank Testing

1. Dimensions: Take exterior dimensions with the tank empty, in the vertical position.

Outside diameter tolerance, including out-of-roundness, shall be per ASTM D 1998.

Fitting placement tolerance shall be +/- 1/2-in vertical and +/- 1 degree radial.

2. Visual: Inspect for foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pimples, crazing, cracking, and delamination.

3. Hydrostatic test: Following fabrication, the bottom tanks, including inlet and outlet fittings, shall be hydraulically tested with water by filling to the top sidewall for a minimum of 1 hour and inspected for leaks. Following successful testing, the tank shall be emptied and cleaned prior to shipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. The tank shall be shipped upright or lying down on their sides with blocks and slings to keep them from moving and protected from damage to the insulation and coating. AVOID sharp objects on trailers.

B. All fittings shall be installed and, if necessary, removed for shipping and shipped separately unless otherwise noted by the contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation will be inspected by manufacturer at the time of the sodium hypochlorite system startup to verify the entire system, flexible connections, venting and fittings are properly installed. In addition to on-sight inspection tank system(s) to be reviewed using tank manual check list as supplied by manufacture as listed below.

B. Manufacturer to provide a training session to prepare operators to service and maintain the tank system. Included in training session will be four copies of operations and maintenance training manuals.

C. Manufacturer’s trained technician to do an onsite inspection of installation. Inspection will verify chemical application, plumbing connections, venting, and applicable ancillary equipment such as ladders, restraints, etc. A verification of proper installation certificate will be supplied when equipment passes installation checklist.

D. Tank manuals will consist of installation check lists, tank drawing(s) as builts, fitting drawings referencing nozzle schedule on tank drawing, materials of construction, and recommended maintenance program.

3.03 FIELD TESTING
11010
A. Tanks to be hydro-tested by CONTRACTOR with clean potable water for 24 hours before commissioning.

END SECTION
11020
SECTION 11020

SKID-MOUNTED SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE DISINFECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
The work of this section consists of furnishing two skid mounted peristaltic pumps with all accessories for a complete system including local control panels, fiberglass outdoor-rated, insulated, and climate-controlled NEMA 4 enclosure cabinet, and seismic anchorage per ASCE 7-17. There shall be no common piping between chemical storage Tank 1 and Tank 2 upstream of the peristaltic pumps.

1.2 TAG NUMBERS
A. PMP 1PP Peristaltic Pump 1
B. PMP 2PP Peristaltic Pump 2

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. SECTION 01300: Submittals
B. Division 15: Piping materials
C. Division 16: Electrical

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 01300
B. Manufacturer’s literature and certificates of compliance with these and referenced specifications.

C. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, parts list, and operating and maintenance instructions.

D. Submit local control panel front layout and schematics for sump pumps PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.0 PUMP SCHEDULE

SERVICE TAG
NUMBER
FLOW
RANGE gph

INITIAL
TUBING SIZE, in
NORMAL

OPERATING

PRESSURE
FLUID TEMP.
deg. F
Sodium
Hypochlorite
PMP 1PP 0- 20+ 2-20 psi 35-90 deg.

Sodium
Hypochlorite
PMP 2PP 1- 20+ 2-20 psi 35-90 deg.
11020

2.1 GENERAL

1. Pumps shall be a positive displacement, peristaltic type tubing pump with a brushless variable speed motor, non-spring-loaded roller assembly located in the pumphead, integral tube failure detection system, tube life roller revolution counter with user alarm set-point and flexible tubing with attached connection fittings. Pumps shall utilize a flexible tube and be capable of pumping the flow ranges specified in the pump schedule. Pumps using hoses or fixed occlusion (nonadjustable) rollers are not acceptable. a. There shall be no valves, diaphragms, springs, or dynamic seals in the fluid path.

Process fluid shall contact the pump tubing assembly and connection fittings only. b. Pump shall be capable of 24-hour continuous duty, self-priming and operating in either direction of flow at the rated maximum pressure of up to 125 PSI (8.6 bar). c. Pump shall be capable of running dry without damage. d. Pump shall be capable of operating in either direction without output variation.

2. Pumphead- Shall be a single, unbroken track with a clear removable cover a. Tube failure detection sensors shall be constructed of two Hastelloy C pins that are located at the bottom of the pump head. The Hastelloy C pins shall act as electrical contacts. When both Hastelloy C pins are immersed in a conductive fluid, a circuit shall be completed between the pins and indicate a tube failure has occurred. Tube failure detection system shall not trigger with water contact from rain or condensation. Float type switches shall not be used.
b. Squeeze rollers with encapsulated ball bearings shall be directly coupled to a one-piece thermoplastic rotor. Four nylon rollers shall be provided; two squeeze rollers for tubing compression shall be located 180 degrees apart and two guide rollers that do not compress the tubing shall be located 180 degrees apart. The roller diameters and occlusion gap shall be factory set to provide the optimum tubing compression; field adjustment shall not be required. Spring-loaded or hinged rollers shall not be used. c. Rotor assembly shall be installed on a D-shaped, chrome plated motor shaft and removable without tools.
d. For tubing installation and removal, rotor assembly shall be rotated by the motor drive at 6 RPM maximum when the pumphead cover is removed. Hand cranking of the rotor assembly shall not be required.
e. Pump head and tubing compression surface shall be corrosion resistant Valox thermoplastic.
f. The pump head cover shall be clear, polycarbonate thermoplastic with an integral ball bearing fitted to support the overhung load on the motor shaft. Cover shall include an imbedded magnetic safety interlock which will limit the motor rotation speed to 6 RPM when removed.
g. Cover shall be positively secured to the pump head using a minimum of four thumb screws. Tools shall not be required to remove the pump head cover.

3. Pump Tube Assembly
a. To ensure pump performance and accuracy, only tubing provided by the manufacturer is acceptable.
b. Pump tube shall be assembled to connection fittings of PVDF material. c. Connection fittings shall be permanently clamped to the tubing with stainless steel clamps or over molded directly to the tubing. To prevent tubing misalignment and ensure accuracy, fittings shall insert into keyed slots located in the pump head and secured in place by the pump head cover.
d. Tube sizes and connections shall be measured in inches. 11020

4. Drive System:
a. Motor
i. Reversible, brushless DC gear motor rated for continuous duty. ii. Motor shall include overload protection.
iii. The maximum gear motor RPM shall be 125 RPM.
iv. Drive shall be rated for continuous 24-hour operation at ambient temperature to 120 degrees F.
b. Enclosure
i. Bottom housing shall be pressure cast aluminum with acidic liquid iron phosphate three-stage clean and coat pretreatment and exterior grade corrosion resistant polyester polyurethane powder coat.
ii. Top housing shall be structural foam molded Noryl engineered thermoplastic. iii. M12 receptacles shall be located at the rear of the pump for input and output signals.
iv. RJ45 receptacle shall be located at the rear of the pump for use with EtherNet/IP and Modbus TCP/IP
v. One M12 receptacle shall be located at the rear of the pump for use with Profibus
c. Control Circuitry. All control circuitries shall be integral to the pump. i. All control circuitries shall be integral to the pump and capable of adjusting the pump motor speed from 0.01% to 100.0% in 0.01% increments less than 10% motor speed, in 0.01% and in 0.1% increments greater than 10% motor speed (10,000:1 turndown ratio).
ii. The pump output shall be capable of being manually controlled via front panel touchscreen. The pump motor speed shall be adjustable from 0.01% to 100.0% in 0.01% increments less than 10% motor speed and in 0.1% increments greater than 10% motor speed.
iii. The pump output shall be capable of being remotely controlled via 4-20mA analog input. The input resolution shall be 0.01 of input value and capable of adjusting the pump motor speed from 0% to 100.0% motor speed in 0.1% increments. Four values shall be user configurable to define the low and high points on the output slope: a low input value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the low input value, a high input value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the high input value.
iv. The pump output shall be capable of being remotely controlled via TTL/CMOS digital high-speed pulse type input and an AC sine wave type pulse input in the range of 0 to 1,000 Hz. The frequency resolution shall be 1 Hz and capable of adjusting the pump motor speed from 0% to 100.0% motor speed in 0.1% increments. Four values shall be user configurable to define the low and high points on the output slope: a low input value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the low input value, a high input value, the required pump percentage of motor speed at the high input value.
v. The pump output shall be capable of being remotely controlled via pulse triggered batching. The pump shall accept a TTL/CMOS digital pulse type input and a contact closure type pulse input in the range of 1 to 9,000 pulses per batch. The batch time shall be adjustable from 1 to 500,000 seconds. The pump motor speed during the batch shall be adjustable from 0% to 100.0% motor speed in 0.1% increments.
11020
vi. The pump output shall be capable of being controlled via EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP/IP, or Profibus DP.

5. Each pump shall be capable of self-priming when completely dry with a suction lift capability of up to 30 feet of water. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging effects to the pump or tubing.

6. The pump shall use no check valves or diaphragms and not utilize any dynamic seals in contact with the process fluid/pumpage.

7. No special tools shall be required for regular maintenance.

2.2 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT

1. TUBING: For each pump provide spare tubing as required for an estimated three years of maintenance.

2. CALIBRATION COLUMNS: Provide one 500 ml transparent plastic calibration column for each pump (2 total). Units shall have threaded connections.

3. PUMP SKID MOUNTING: Provide both pumps within a packaged dual-pump “skid” mounted configuration that fits inside a manufacturer-provided NEMA 4 rated air-conditioned enclosure as shown on the drawings with related piping, valving and appurtenances.

2.3 SKID CABINET ENCLOSURE AND VENTILATING FAN
The two skid-mounted pumps and all accessories shall be entirely contained within a fiberglass NEMA 4 rated cabinet as shown on the project drawings. The cabinet shall be insulated and ventilated to maintain a year-round internal temperature between 40 and 100 degrees Fahrenheit.

The enclosure cabinet exterior dimensions shall not exceed 28” deep x 55” wide x 64” tall. A ventilating fan unit shall be installed on the left side of the cabinet. The unit may extend beyond the maximum 55” width given that there are no conflicts with other equipment in the vicinity.

The Skid Cabinet Enclosure manufacturer shall provide a seismic anchorage system designed and stamped by a registered civil or structural engineer. The anchorage system is to be cast-in-place in the enclosure cabinet concrete pedestal. The anchorage system shall be on-site at the time of concrete pouring.

1. Air Ventilating- Fan Air ventilating fan shall be an outside-intake unit with a minimum unit airflow of 26 CFM and a minimum fan airflow of 47 CFM. The unit shall be 115 V, 0.08 input amps, 4.3 watts. The fan exterior shall be NEMA 4 rated. Guardian KNP36FL or equal shall be accepted. An IP55 rated filter shall be installed at the fan intake.

2.4 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing Pumps
Motor Size ¼ HP Brushless DC
11020
Maximum Working Pressure 125 psig
Maximum Suction Lift 30 ft water
Ambient Operating Temperature 14 to 115 F
Motor Adjustment Range 10,000:1
F. SHAFT SEALS

1. Provide tandem mechanical shaft sealing system.

2. Moisture sensing system: Intrinsically safe types that signals seal leakage.

G. CABLE ENTRY SEAL AND JUNCTION CHAMBER

1. Cable entry seal design shall not require specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal.

2. Cable entry shall consist of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flaked by stainless steel washers.

3. The entry body shall perform compression and strain relief that is separate from the sealing function.

4. The cable entry junction chamber shall be separate from the motor chamber to prevent foreign material from gaining access to the motor interior through the top of the pump.

H. CONTROLS
See Division 13 Specifications

2.5 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
All special tools required for three years of normal operation and maintenance shall be furnished with the equipment. Furnish two (2) each of all piping sizes, and one (1) each of critical fittings and valves.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the drawings.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE
Equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of qualified factory-trained field service engineer for the inspection of pump system during start-up and certification is installed correctly.

3.3 TESTING
Perform factory testing and field testing

END OF SECTION
11303
SECTION 011303

SUMP PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.4 SUMMARY
The work of this section consists of furnishing sump pumps at the RAS Pump Station with all accessories for a complete system including local control panels.

1.5 TAG NUMBERS
C. PMP 1HD Secondary Containment Basin Dewatering Pump
(See section 11303 for pump specifications).

1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
D. SECTION 01340: Submittals
E. Division 15: Piping materials
F. Division 16: Electrical

1.5 SUBMITTALS
E. In accordance with Section 01340
F. Manufacturer’s literature and certificates of compliance with these and referenced specifications.

G. Manufacturer’s installation instructions, parts list, and operating and maintenance instructions.

H. Submit local control panel front layout and schematics for sump pumps PART 2 – MATERIALS

2.6 GENERAL
Pumps shall be capable of handling 12% hypochlorite and wash-down water with 0-2% solids. The Pumps shall be bolted to the sump floor as shown on the drawings and recommended by manufacturer. The pump motors shall be constant spend and capable of running continuously and indefinitely in a partially or non-submersible conditions.

Contractor is responsible for supplying the pumps and motors, power cables, control panels, and all other appurtenances, as specified herin and shown on the drawings. See electrical specs for panel requirements and drawings.
11303

2.7 DESIGN CRITERIA
B. Hypochlorite dewatering pump basin
Motor size 2.3HP
Discharge Size 2-inches (at discharge elbow outlet)
Maximum Motor Speed 3320 RPM
Power Requirements 230V, 1 Phase
Operating Conditions 200 gpm @11 to 13 feet,
25% minimum hydraulic efficiency
90 gpm @ 32 to 25 feet,
25% efficiency
130 gpm @ 25 feet,
20% minimum hydraulic efficiency
C. Pump and Motor Casing

1. TYPE: Water tight, air filled.

2. MATERIAL: ASTM A 48, minimum Class 35B, cast iron.

3. WATER-TIGHTNESS: Able to run submerged up to 65 feet.

4. MOTOR COOLING: Adequate for continuously submerged.

5. DESIGN WORKING PRESSURE: Minimum 1.10 times maximum shutoff total dynamic head with maximum diameter impeller at maximum operating speed plus maximum suction static head or minimum 20 pounds per square inch gauge.

6. O-RING SEALS: Capable of sealing mated surfaces (major components) watertight; with machined surfaces and grooves.

D. IMPELLERS

1. TYPE: Non-clog.

2. MATERIAL: Hard Iron. (ASTM A-532 25% chrome cast iron)

3. NUMBER OF VANES: Maximum 3.

E. WEAR RINGS AND WEAR PLATES
Provide brass volute wear ring and stainless steel impeller wear ring or a cast iron wear plate system.

F. PUMP SHAFTS

1. MATERIAL: ASTMA479 S43100-T Stainless Steel; turned, ground, and polished.

2. Pump and motor shaft shall be a solid continuous shaft. 11303
I. BEARINGS
Pump shaft ashall rotate on a a minimum of two (2) permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings. Upper bearing of ra combined axial and radial forces shall be angular contact ball type.

J. SHAFT SEALS

3. Provide tandem mechanical shaft sealing system.

4. Seals shall be tungsten-carbide or silicon-carbide

5. Moisture sensing system: Intrinsically safe types that signals seal leakage.

K. MOTOR

5. Motor Characteristics:
b. Type: Squirrel cage induction motor, shell type design. c. All electrical parts in air filled watertight housing. d. Horsepower, voltage and phase: As described herein.
e. Frequency, Hertz: 60
f. Service Factor: 1.15
g. NEMA Design Type: B
h. Motor Insulation: Class F, moisture resistant, able to withstand 40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature plus 105 degrees Celsius temperature rise.

2. Provide motors that are rated suitable for continuous operation in 40 degrees Celsius ambient temperature at project site altitude.

3. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40 degrees Celsius and capable of a minimum of fifteen (15) evenly spaced starts per hour.

4. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation under load with the motor submerged, partially submerged, or exposed, without derating the motor.

5. Motor Sealing: Design motor case and seals to withstand 65 feed of submergence.

6. Thermal Protection: Provide thermal protection

7. Moisture Detection: Moisture protection Type 1 or 2
L. CABLE ENTRY SEAL AND JUNCTION CHAMBER

1. Cable entry seal design shall not require specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal.

2. Cable entry shall consist of a single cylindrical elastomer grommet, flaked by stainless steel washers.

3. The entry body shall perform compression and strain relief that is separate from the sealing function.

4. The cable entry junction chamber shall be separate from the motor chamber to prevent foreign material from gaining access to the motor interior through the top of the pump. 11303
M. CONTROLS
See electrical specs by JSP
N. MANUFACTURER

1. Flygt Model 3069 or equal

2.8 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS
All special tools required for normal operation and maintenance shall be furnished with the equipment. Furnish two (2) each of all gaskets, and one (1) each of all mechanical seals.

Part 3: EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as shown on the drawings.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICE
Equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of qualified factory trained field service engineer for the inspection of pump system during star-up and certification is snstalled correctly.

3.3 TESTING
Perform factory testing and field testing

END OF SECTION
11304
SECTION 11304

OUTDOOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE
A. The requirements of this section apply to the supply and installation of luminaries, supports, and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL1598 Luminaires
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting fixtures of the types and capacities required; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.

B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.

C. Provide luminaires and poles that have been approved, listed, and labeled by 3rd party agency.

1.04 COORDINATION
A. Confirm compatibility and interface of other materials and construction with luminaire and the –V–Spring assist (or equal) lowering pole. Report discrepancies to site engineer.

B. Coordinate with mechanical and plumbing contractors to avoid conflicts between luminaires, support fittings and mechanical or plumbing equipment.

1.05 SUBMITTALS - FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL
A. The following information will be submitted to the engineer.

1. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature and technical specifications for each product

2. Manufacturer’s product drawing (2D or 3D), when requested

3. Manufacturer’s installation and maintenance document

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer’s unopened packaging until ready for installation. 11304
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Product Construction- Telescoping, factory-sealed, and pre-wired B. Installed Height- Adjustable raised height as shown on contract drawings C. Environmental Ratings- Dust tight, NEMA 4, IP 66
D. Materials- 316 Stainless Steel with Xylan 1400 coated hardware for corrosion protection E. UV-Resistant weather cover
F. Eaton C65H-SC-JM5 or equal with stainless tubular rail mounting kit and LED floodlight

2.02 LOWERING POLES FOR STANCHION LUMINAIRES
A. During installation or when performing visual, electrical, or mechanical inspection or maintenance the contractor shall avoid working from ladders, and use a lowering pole that brings the fixture to the worker.

B. When the fixture is lowered to the maintenance position, the path of motion of the pole shall not exceed max dimensions of the fixture it supports; to prevent interference with infrastructure
C. Contractor shall ensure the light fixture does not invert or deviate from the intended mounting when the lowering pole is in a maintenance position; as the fixture’s cover module hinge hook is intended to hang ballast to allow contractor to wire the fixture.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 ALIGNMENT
A. Align luminaries and clean lens before final acceptance; ensure pole height is as indicated in the Lighting Fixture Schedule on the install details or as approved by the engineer.

1. The –V–Spring (or equal) assist light pole shall be fully adjustable for alignment and be capable of being locked into any position along its operational length. 11030
SECTION 11030

SAFETY EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – EMERGENCY SHOWERS AND EYEWASH

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Emergency Shower and Eyewash Stations (Emergency Shower and Eyewash Station or “Eyewash Station”)

1.2 STANDARDS
A. Install emergency eyewash and shower per ANSI Z-358.1-2104

1.3 MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Eyewash station must be specifically designed to avoid freezing B. Eyewash plumbing shall not be in contact with sodium hypochlorite containment pit walls C. Dimensions:

1. Showerhead shall be between 82” and 96” above the surface where the user stands

2. Eyewash spray shall be 33” to 53” from the surface the user stands, exact dimensions where indicated on the drawings

3. Nozzles shall be at least 6” away from a wall or any type of obstruction D. Eyewash station to be Bradley S19-304XSN insulated stainless steel or equal E. Full-bowl stainless steel eyewash dust cover requried F. Eyewash station and materials shall have a minimum useful life of 10 years in direct exposure to typical Lakeport weather conditions
G. Eyewash station shall be resistant to corrosion

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit eyewash #2 plumbing and support shop drawing for approval by OWNER prior to construction

END OF SECTION
13300
SECTION 13300

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Work of this Section includes the general specification and requirements for the instrumentation and control systems under this and other applicable specifications.

B. The general scope of work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to the furnishing, installing, programming and testing the following:

1. Equipment
a. Modify Existing PLC Control Panel
b. Drain Pump Control Panel
c. Tank Fill Monitoring and Control Panel
d. Field Instruments

2. Application Programming
a. Existing Plant PLCE
b. Existing SCADA
c. Existing Communications Network

3. Start-Up and Testing
a. Factory Testing
b. Instrument Calibration
c. Field Testing
d. Commissioning
e. Training
f. Final Acceptance
C. Instrumentation and Control Systems specified in Division 13 shall be furnished, manufactured, wired, and tested as a complete system by a qualified Control Systems Supplier (CSS). The CSS shall provide all equipment, materials, instrumentation, and assemblies complete. The CSS shall provide, but not necessarily be limited to, installation coordination, factory testing, PLC/SCADA programming, test programs, configuration, pre-commissioning, system commissioning, testing and final acceptance.

D. The CSS shall be responsible for the detailed design, procurement, installation coordination, testing, commissioning, training, and documentation of instrumentation and control systems provided under this CONTRACT. The CSS shall be responsible for coordination and interfacing with the Owner to provide a coordinated 13300
communications interface with the Plant SCADA Control Systems and the Owners existing SCADA system. The CSS shall provide all hardware, application software, configuration, installation, factory testing, commissioning, and training.

E. The CSS shall note that the equipment loop, logic, system, PLC, and elementary diagrams are not necessarily manufacturer, model, or part # specific and are based on non-certified, owner, existing system supplier and vendor information to indicate a general scope of supply. The Specifications address functional requirements, features and operation that may require additional options or components from the CSS to provide for a complete and functional system.

F. The CSS shall coordinate all requirements with the equipment manufacturers at bid time to provide for a complete and operable system and shall include all costs in its bid to add additional instruments, wiring, programmable controller inputs/outputs, controls, drawing revisions etc., into the design based on Equipment Manufacturer’s requirements and final certified prints to meet the specifications. Such changes to instrumentation and control work to meet the Specification requirements shall be incorporated into the “SCOPE OF WORK” at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Per specified submittal requirements the CSS shall be responsible for the generation of panel wiring diagrams equipment interconnection diagrams, network diagrams and loop drawings which depict the interconnection between existing instruments, control panels, field panels, electrical equipment, control equipment, motorized equipment, packaged systems, and Motor Control Centers (MCC).

H. The wiring diagrams and PLC Input/Output Lists are complimentary and supplemental to each other, what is indicated in one may not necessarily be indicated in the other documents. The wiring diagrams and Input/Output list comprise the requirements for PLC input and output wiring. The CSS shall generate a complete I/O list.

I. The CSS shall generate a complete analog and digital loop drawing for each measuring and/or control loop. The loop drawing shall include information as specified in the submittal requirements for loop drawing preparation.

J. All control system field tests including factory tests, loop tests, site commissioning, operational readiness testing, plant startup, and final acceptance shall be the responsibility of the CSS.

K. The CSS shall perform field engineering as required for mounting and supporting all field mounted components. The CSS shall develop any additional schematic and interconnection diagrams required to interface with existing systems, PLC, and instrumentation equipment, which may be required for a complete and operable instrumentation and control system.

L. The CSS shall design, procure, configure for testing, factory test, install, commission, and support a PLC hardware system that shall integrate all process controls required to provide for a complete and operational system. The PLC system shall be designed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements for SCADA and PLC system communications. The CSS shall coordinate the final I/O arrangement and configurations at the time of submittal with the Owner. 13300
M. The CSS shall field verify all new and existing control systems, instrumentation, and logic systems prior to implementing the specified systems. The operation of switches and interlocking logic shall be confirmed to operate in either the Normally Open or Normally Closed states. The CSS shall provide interposing relays and wiring modifications necessary to meet the operational requirements specified and to properly interface with existing system and equipment supplied as a part of the mechanical systems.

1.02 EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. The CSS shall be responsible for coordinating, validating, modifying, interconnecting, and commissioning all existing equipment referenced in the Contract Documents.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Reference Bid Documents for additional information on qualification requirements.

B. The instrumentation, control and communications system shall be furnished by a Control System Supplier (CSS) who shall assume responsibility for the satisfactory performance of the system. Minimum criteria.

1. Provide references (including contact name and telephone number) for at least five (5) projects where the following tasks were performed by personnel directly employed by your firm as a system supplier; system engineering and documentation including panel assembly, schematics, and wiring diagrams; software configuration and documentation; field testing, calibration, and startup; and operating instructions and maintenance training.

C. The Project Engineer for the CSS shall be an Electrical Engineer Registered in the State of California. The Project Engineer shall attend all project meetings and be an active participant in project development and implementation. Submit Project Engineer Resume at the time of Bid.

D. Document that the company is actively in the business of furnishing integrated instrumentation, telemetry, PLC control systems, and electrical equipment for the environmental, water and wastewater industries.

E. Have a qualified service facility with permanent employees located within 150 miles of the job site. Facility to include all tools, spare parts, and test equipment to repair, calibrate, test and start-up the equipment to be provided on this contract.

F. The Control System Supplier shall have a UL authorized manufacturing facility.

1.04 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply.

B. The Work of the following Sections applies to the Work of this Section. Other Sections of the Specifications, not referenced below, shall also apply to the extent required for proper performance of this Work with respect to interfacing electrical and control systems packaged under any associated mechanical and civil specification sections.

C. Related Divisions/Sections shall include but not be limited to the following:
13300

1. Division 13

1.05 CODES
A. Work of this Section shall comply with the current editions of the following codes:

1. Uniform Fire Code

2. National Electrical Code

1.06 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, the current editions of the following apply to the Work of this Section:

1. ISA-RP60.6 Nameplates, Labels, and Tags for Control Centers

2. ISA-RP12.6 Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) Locations

3. ISA-S5.1 Instrument Symbols and Identification

4. ISA-S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

5. ISA-S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation; Primary Elements and Control Valves.

1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be supplied in accordance with the Owners general conditions and as supplemented or modified by this specification section.

B. Control panel submittals

1. Submit the following:
a. Complete Submittal to Include:
(1) Marked Specifications to indicated compliance
(2) Table of Contents
(3) Bill of Material
(4) Scaled Elevation Drawings
(5) PLC Wiring and I/O Connection Diagrams
(6) Communications Diagrams
(7) Calculations
(8) Technical Data Sheets

2. Control panel submittals shall be grouped by location, area, and process. Bill of Materials and fabrication drawings shall be individually grouped by Facility, Area, and control panel.
13300

3. A separate technical brochure, data sheet or bulletin shall be included for each instrument, component and equipment item, system, and other element.

The data shall be indexed by systems or loops. If, within a single system or loop, a single item is employed more than once, one brochure may cover all identical uses of that item in the system. Each brochure shall include a list of tag numbers to which it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags.

4. Schematic and wiring diagrams for control circuits shall be submitted in two stages. Initially, schematic control diagrams shall show complete details on the circuit interrelationships of all devices within and outside each Control Panel. Subsequent to acceptance of all schematic control diagrams, by the Owner interconnection piping and wiring diagrams shall be submitted. The diagrams shall consist of component layout drawings to scale, showing numbered terminals on components together with the unique number of the wire to be connected to each terminal. Piping and wiring diagrams shall show terminal assignments from all primary measurement devices, such as flow meters, and to all final control devices, such as pumps, valves, chemical feeders, and local control panels. Wiring diagrams shall include MCC Panel, circuit, and breaker number for each power feed

5. Assembly and construction drawings for each control panel, local indicating panel, hand control stations and for other special enclosed assemblies for field installation. These drawings shall include dimensions, identification of all components, surface preparation and finish data, and nameplates. These drawings also shall include enough other details, including photographs, to define exactly the style and overall appearance of the assembly; a finish treatment sample shall be included.

6. Installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all field instruments and components and assemblies to be field-mounted, including conduit connection or entry details.

7. Complete control panel layouts, all drawn to a 1-1/2 inch=1 foot scale showing:
a. Physical arrangements which define and quantify the physical groupings of, PLC components, annunciators, handstations, recorders, indicators, pilot lights and all other instrumentation devices associated with control panel sections, auxiliary panels, subpanels, and racks. b. All cutout locations fully dimensioned.
c. All outside panel dimensions shall be shown.
d. Locations of back-of-panel stiffeners.
e. Backpanel equipment layout and terminal point locations for all panel and back-of-panel piping and wiring connections. Terminations shall be coded with identifiers for wiring and piping connections for all electric, hydraulic, and pneumatic terminations.

8. Bill of Material
13300
a. A complete and detailed bill of material (BOM) list shall be submitted for each field mounted device or assembly as well as cabinet assemblies and subassemblies. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure. An incomplete submittal shall be rejected, and no further evaluation performed until a complete and detailed bill of material is submitted.
b. The BOM shall be prepared specific to each panel, with a separate listing for each panel, subsection, and assembly.

9. Calculations
a. Panel Power: Provide power load calculations and determine the maximum power required. Power requirements shall state required watts, voltages, currents, and phases. Power supplies shall be supplied to provide for a minimum of 150 percent at maximum load. b. Panel Heat Load Calculations: Provide panel heat load calculations and determine heat dissipation, and operating temperature. Heat dissipation shall be at maximum load and shall be stated in BTU per hour or watts.

Operating temperature shall be calculated at the specified ambient temperatures or at 40 degrees C if no other ambient temperature is specified. If ventilation fans are used, provide audible sound level for the fans.
c. Panel wireway fill calculations. Panel wireway fill shall not exceed 60 percent fill.

C. FIELD INSTRUMENTATION

1. Instrumentation Summary/Schedule and Bill of Material

2. Technical brochures, bulletins and data sheets containing:
a. Fully completed ISA S20 data sheets
b. Technical Specification Data Sheets
c. Component functional descriptions
d. Locations or assembly at which component is to be installed e. Materials of a component's parts which will be in contact with process fluids or gases

3. Instrumentation Loop Diagrams per ISA S-5.4

4. Hazardous Location (Intrinsically Safe) Control Diagrams

5. Field Installation and Mounting Drawings. Detailed installation drawing shall be submitted for all field sensor installations.

D. PLC CONFIGURATION

1. Reference PLC Hardware and Software Requirements Per Section 13350 and 13370

2. A PLC I/O database (Excel Spreadsheet) shall be submitted and reviewed prior to the generation of the final PLC wiring diagrams. The PLC I/O database shall be coordinated with the Owner.
13300

3. Review and revise existing control strategy based on field investigations.

Submit updated control strategy and I/O revisions for review and discussion in the specified workshop(s).

E. SCADA CONFIGURATION

1. Submit Wonderware System Platform SCADA System Graphic Screens for review.

F. FACTORY OPERATIONAL TEST

1. The CSS shall submit comprehensive factory testing procedures, forms and reports complete. Testing submittals shall address all the factory testing requirements.

2. Reference Section 13320 for additional requirements.

G. SYSTEM START-UP AND COMMISSIONING

1. The CSS shall submit comprehensive testing procedures, forms and reports complete. Testing submittals shall address the testing and commissioning requirements for instrumentation and control and those referenced in Divisions 16.

2. Start-up test forms shall be submitted as follows:
a. Installation Verification Forms
b. Discrete I/O Point Testing Forms
c. Analog I/O Point Testing Forms
d. Loop Testing Forms
e. Instrument Calibration Forms
f. Equipment Operational and Configuration Forms
g. Process and operational testing
h. Communication Test

3. Reference Section 13320 for additional requirements.

1.08 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. The CSS shall attend all required meetings associated with the procurement, fabrication, and commissioning of the control systems. At a minimum, the CSS shall attend:

1. Pre-submittal Conference

2. Submittal Review Meetings (Until Submittals are Approved)

3. Control Strategy Workshop

4. SCADA System Configuration Workshop

5. Two Coordination Meetings in addition to those specified.

6. Pre-Commissioning Start-up Meeting
13300

7. Weekly start-up and commissioning meetings during the commissioning phase.

1.09 PROJECT COORDINATION
A. The CSS shall assign a project engineer that shall be responsible for, but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Coordinating communications interface requirements between the Equipment Suppliers and the Plant PLC and SCADA.

2. Updating and maintaining an excel spreadsheet I/O list for all systems.

3. Coordinating hardwired interlocks and signal interface requirements.

4. Start-up and testing requirements with the Owner.

1.10 INTERCONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS
A. The CSS shall prepare all interconnection diagrams for the entire project. Include all vendors’ equipment, existing systems, and electrical panels as a point to point connection diagram showing all wiring with filed wire labels.

1.11 OPERATIONS MANUAL
A. Information included in the Owner’s MANUAL shall comply with the requirements of the Specifications with the following exceptions:

1. Two copies of the Owner’s Manual shall be submitted after acceptance of all submittals under Paragraph 1.5. One set will be returned to the CSS with comments.

2. Final copies (6) of the Owner’s Manual, after revision, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER 15 days prior to startup.

3. The following shall be included in the Owner’s Manual:
a. Installation, connection, operating, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions from the manufacturer.
b. Exploded or details views of all instruments, assemblies, and accessory components.
c. Parts lists and ordering instructions.
d. Wiring diagrams.
e. A list of spare parts for 1 year operation recommended by the manufacturers of all analog equipment.

B. AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

1. As-built drawings shall be prepared in accordance with Section 16010 with the following exceptions and changes:
a. The CSS shall keep current an approved set of complete analog and digital loop diagrams and schematic diagrams which shall include all field and panel wiring, all piping and tubing runs, all routing, all 13300
mounting details, all point-to-point diagrams with cable, wire, tube, and termination numbers.
b. One set of original drawings and two copies of each as-built drawing under this Section shall be submitted to the ENGINEER after completion of field checkout but before placing the systems in service for the Owner’s use.
c. Drawings shall also be submitted in electronic format as both an Autocad and PDF file.
d. The operations manual shall be provided in PDF format with a user interactive table of contents (TOC) that navigates from the TOC to the selected document.

1.12 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Calibration, Testing and Startup: The CSS shall provide the services of a technical service representative of the manufacturer who shall visit the site and perform the following on all flow meters, DO Analyzers and Chemical System Analyzers.

1. Installation Inspection

2. Instrument check-out and calibration

3. Instrument programming and configuration

4. Startup and field testing for proper operation.

5. Performing field adjustments to ensure that installation and operation comply with the Specifications.

B. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel: The manufacturer's technical service representative shall instruct the Owner’s personnel on:

1. Equipment Operation

2. Maintenance

3. System Diagnostics

4. Calibration

1.13 SPECIAL GUARANTEE
A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee the Work of this section for one year following substantial completion of the Work. In making any warranty repairs, the CONTRACTOR shall utilize technical service personnel designated by the manufacturer of the failed device. Repairs shall be completed within 5 days after written notification by the Owner.

1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery of Materials: Products delivered to the site for incorporation into the Work of this Section shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer.

B. Storage: Products shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is protected from the elements.
13300
Installed Equipment: Equipment installed in place for periods exceeding 24 hours prior to the field wiring and commissioning of electrical and electronic equipment shall be protected from dust and exposure to the elements.

C. Shipment: Panels shall be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids.

Panel sections shall be cushioned to protect the finish of the instruments and panel during shipment. Instruments, which are shipped with the panel, shall have suitable shipping stops and cushioning material installed to protect instrument parts from mechanical shock damage during shipment. Each panel crate shall be provided with removable lifting lugs to facilitate handling.

1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. General: All instrumentation and control system components and associated wiring shall be suitable for use in an environment where there may be high energy AC fields, DC control pulses, and varying ground potentials between transducers and system components. The system design shall be adequate to provide proper protection against interferences from all such possible situations.

B. Field Situated Equipment: The system design shall be adequate to provide proper protection in the environment typically associated with these facilities. As a minimum, the instrumentation and control systems shall be designed and constructed for satisfactory operation and low maintenance requirements under the following environmental conditions:

1. Temperature Range: 0 through 60 degrees C (32 - 144 degrees F)

2. Thermal Shock: 0.55 degrees C per minute (1.0 degrees F per minute)

3. Relative Humidity: 20 - 95 percent (non-condensing)
C. Control Room Situated Equipment: Control rooms shall be air conditioned to achieve the environmental noted in item B herein. (No positive control of relative humidity is provided.) In the event of a failure of the air conditioning system, all components of the instrumentation and control system shall be rated to operate in an environment where the ambient temperature is 15 through 35 degrees C (59 through 95 degrees F) and the relative humidity is 20 to 95 percent (non-condensing).

D. Noise Tolerance: The instrumentation and control system components shall not exceed a db level of 55 when monitored 3-feet away from the devices. If upon testing it is found that this limit is exceeded at the option of the ENGINEER and at no additional cost to the Owner, devices shall be replaced in order to achieve a maximum level of 55 db or sound absorption materials shall be added.

1.16 FIELD CABLE AND CONDUCTOR NUMBERING
A. All cables and conductors shall be provided with a unique cable identifier.

B. The first characters shall denote the facility or area number.

C. The second group of characters identifies the field device being served by an ISA or equipment tag reference.

D. The third section is the loop or equipment number.

E. The fourth section uses one of the four suffixes in the table below. Where multiple circuits of the same type are routed to the same endpoint, the suffix will be P1, P2, as required.
13300
F. At each device or termination point, the circuit identification number is appended with the individual wire number. For Direct Current (DC) circuits only, wire polarity is shown in parentheses as (+) or (-). Spaces are not allowed, and letters are not casesensitive, and written in upper case.

SUFFIX CIRCUIT TYPE EXAMPLE
(S) Analog (4-20 mA) FIT2101-S1(+)
(C) 120 volt AC control LSH2101-C1
(D) 24v dc digital status or control YIM2101-D1
(P) Power (480 v, 5 kv, 15 kv, etc.) 50F11FA-P1
(L) Power (120 v, 208 v, 240 v) RW2101-L1
(T) Communications 20MCP01-T1

1.17 GENERAL
A. All meters, all instruments, and all other components shall be of the most recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise indicated.

B. Outdoor instrumentation shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions at the equipment installation locations. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be incorporated with the outdoor instrumentation in order to maintain it within its rated environmental operating ranges.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all power wiring for these devices.

D. Outdoor enclosures suitable for the environment shall be provided at the specified locations. Sunshields shall be provided for all outdoor equipment with operator displays.

E. All instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be intrinsically safe or be approved for use in the particular hazardous classification in which it is to be installed.

F. Mercury switches and components containing liquid mercury shall not be used.

G. Analog measurements and control signals shall be electrical and shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable, except as indicated. Electrical signals outside control board(s) shall be 4-20mA DC except as noted.

H. The accuracy of each instrumentation system or loop shall be expressed as a probable maximum error; this shall be the square-root of the sum of the squares of certified "accuracies" of the designated components in each system, expressed as a percentage of the actual span or value of the measured variable. Each individual instrument shall have a minimum accuracy of ± 0.5 percent of full scale and a minimum repeatability of ± 0.25 percent of full scale unless otherwise indicated.

Instruments that do not conform to or improve upon these criteria are not acceptable.

I. Each instrument and control loop shall be individually fused. 13300

1.18 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL PANELS
A. GENERAL

1. Control panels shall be provided as specified in Section 13340.

2. Equipment Framework and Supports:
a. The rear of each control panel section or Instrument wall panel shall have a steel framework for supporting conduit, tubing, wireways, switches, air piping and all instrument accessory items such as relay or terminal enclosures, transducers, pressure switches, valves, and air relays. The main framework shall be constructed of standard structural shapes. Special shapes such as "Unistrut" may be used for secondary supports. Framework must not interfere with instrument connections or access needed for maintenance or adjustments.
b. Equipment framework shall be 316 Stainless Steel in Corrosive Area listed in the Area Classification drawings or schedules. Chemical system equipment framework in chlorine areas shall be Fiberglass, PVC Coated or composite materials conducive to the chemical systems c. Preparation: The front and rear face of the panel, both sides and the edges of all flanges, and the periphery of all openings shall be prepared as follows:
(1) All high spots, burrs, and rough spots shall be ground smooth. (2) The surfaces shall be sanded or sandblasted to a smooth, clean bright finish.
(3) All traces of oil shall be removed with a solvent.
(4) All welds, grinds and filed surfaces shall be appropriately treated to prevent corrosion.
d. Finishing:
(1) A 3-mils dry coat of Amercoat 185 or equal primer shall be applied over the entire panel surface immediately after solvent cleaning.
(2) Wet sand, dry, and then quick glaze spot putty on the front of the panel only. Dry, then wet sand again and dry.
(3) Apply a second 3-mils dry coat of alkyd enamel primer to the front of the panel.
(4) Wet sand to smooth clear finish, then dry.
(5) At least two 3-mil dry coats of air-dry, satin finish, alkyd enamel shall be applied over the entire surface. Color to be as selected by Owner.
(6) The CONTRACTOR shall furnish two 1-pint containers of the enamel to the Owner.
13300

1.19 INSTRUMENT MOUNTING
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide field cut-outs, installation mounting racks, bracing, shelving, and stanchions, and shall mount all instrument and control items indicated, including any instruments indicated to be furnished by the Owner, other manufacturers, and packaged system suppliers.

B. Installation details are not manufacturer specific and provide for general installation requirements. Details shall be modified per the actual field equipment, site requirements and methods to meet instrument tolerances and seismic restraint.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall also mount, behind existing panels or panels supplied by others, other instrument accessory items as indicated or necessary for interfacing with equipment.

D. Control Panel Requirements:

1. Controls panels shall be wired and fabricated in accordance with section 13340.

2. Field modifications of panels or electrical equipment shall adhere to the requirements of Section 13340.

3. The CSS shall provide all wiring, conduit, wireways, and switches required to make instruments and other panel electrical devices operational.

4. Conduit, wireways, junction boxes and fittings shall be installed for all instrument power, signal, and control wire. Provide in accordance with Division 16.

5. Each terminal connection shall have a plastic plate with a terminal and instrument tag number. All wiring shall be identified with machine stamped tubular heat shrink wire markers.

6. Unless otherwise specified, wiring methods and materials for all panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements.

7. Wire for 115-volt control circuits shall be No. 14 AWG stranded with Type THWN/THHN insulation. All terminals for external wiring connections shall be suitable for No. 10 AWG wire.

8. Flexible seal tight (SLT) conduit shall be utilized only for short transitions (36 “) from instrument or equipment.

9. Soldered or pressure crimped wire splicing in conduits, wireways, ducts, and pullboxes shall not be acceptable.

10. For case grounding, panels shall be provided with a 1/4-inch by 1-inch copper ground buss completed with solderless connector for one No. 4 AWG bare stranded copper cable. The CONTRACTOR shall connect the copper cable to a system ground loop.

E. INSTRUMENT TUBING

1. Instrument tubing shall be installed level and parallel with, or at right angles to panel interiors. Vertical runs shall be straight and plumb and installed with adequate strain relief to prevent damage.
13300

2. All tubing installations shall allow clear and unobstructed access to equipment, controls, and instruments. Tubing installations shall allow easy removal of components or equipment. Components on tubing runs shall not be supported by the tubing, but shall be separately supported by rear panel mounting plates or adapters.

3. All installations of tubing shall be measured prior to panel fabrication. Any significant discrepancies between drawings and field conditions shall be reported to the ENGINEER. The Owner will not be responsible for any costs to the CONTRACTOR for rework because of CSS failure to take measurements prior to fabrication.

F. INSTRUMENT REQUIREMENTS

1. Instruments located on a single panel section that serve one process unit may be connected to a common branch power circuit. The number of branch circuits shall be such that no circuit load exceeds 10 amps. Different panel sections and instruments serving different process units shall not use common branch circuits. A 15-amp, two-pole circuit breaker shall be provided in each branch circuit.

2. When instruments not equipped with integral fuses, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install fuses as required for the protection of individual instruments and equipment against fault currents. Fuses shall be mounted on the back of the panel, in a fuseholder, with each fuse identified by a service name tag.

3. Each potentiometer type instrument, electronic transducer, controller, or analyzer shall have an individual disconnect switch. Disconnect switches shall have metal or plastic tags listing the associated instrument tag numbers.

Individual plug and cord set power supply connections may be used without switches when indicated.

G. FIELD SIGNAL WIRING

1. Signal cable shall be constructed of No. 16 AWG copper signal wires with THWN insulation.

2. Control conductors shall be 14 AWG minimum routed in conduit or troughs.

Control conductors shall be THWN insulation.

3. Wire color code for instrument signal wiring shall be:
a. 120 VAC Hot – Black
b. 120 VAC Neutral – White
c. 120 VAC UPS Hot - Orange
d. Positive - White (+)
e. Signal Ground Negative - Black (-)
f. Equipment Ground – Green
g. Ungrounded – Red
h. Energized by voltage found external to panel – Yellow i. 24 VDC Power - Pink
13300
j. DC circuit – Dark Blue
k. Control – Violet
l. DC Common – Grey
m. Intrinsically Safe – Light Blue

4. Multi-conductor cables where indicated shall consist of No. 18 AWG copper signal wires twisted in pairs, with 600 volt fault insulation. A copper drain wire shall be provided for the bundle with a wrap of aluminum polyester shield. The overall bundle jacket shall be PVC. Multi-conductor cables, wireways and conduit shall provide for 20 percent allocation of spare, unused signal wires in addition to the indicated requirements.

5. Remote I/O (RIO), Ethernet I/O (EIO), Distributed I/O (DIO) and Ethernet cabling shall be provided, installed, and terminated in accordance with the manufacturers cabling and termination procedures. The CSS shall furnish and install all necessary cable taps, termination devices and connectors required to provide for a complete communications interface. Field taps or terminators required to meet distance and interconnection requirements shall be furnished and installed by the CSS.

H. INDICATION

1. Color Conventions: Lens covers/LED’s for indicating lights on all panels will be colored as follows:
a. Red-ON when;
(1) Motor not running (STOPPED)
(2) Valve CLOSED (not opened)
(3) Device not energized.
(4) Circuit breaker OPENED
b. Green-ON when;
(1) Motor running in forward direction (fast speed for multi-speed motors).
(2) Valve OPEN (not fully closed)
(3) Device energized.
(4) Circuit breaker CLOSED
c. White-ON when;
(1) Power available
(2) System in AUTOMATIC mode.
(3) Monitoring taking place.
d. Amber-ON when;
(1) Malfunction trip.
(2) Equipment locked out.
13300
(3) Alarm condition

1.20 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates shall be provided for instruments, function titles for each group of instruments, and other components mounted on the front panel(s) as indicated. A nameplate shall be provided for each signal transducer, signal converter, signal isolator, and electronic trip mounted inside the panel(s). Nameplates shall be descriptive to define the function and system of such element. These nameplates shall be of the same material as those on the front of the panel(s). Screws shall be used for attaching nameplates. Nameplates shall be fabricated from black face white-center laminated engraving plastic. Painted surfaces shall be prepared to allow permanent bonding of adhesives. Colors, lettering, styles, abbreviations, and sizes shall be in conformance with ISA_RP60.6 with an intended viewing distance of 3 feet to 6 feet.

B. Equipment Interior Nameplates - Nameplate material shall be clear plastic with black machine printed lettering as produced by a KROY or similar machine; except caution, warning, and danger nameplates shall have red lettering. The size of the nameplate tape shall be no smaller than 1/2” in height with 3/8" lettering unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Securely fasten nameplates in place on a clean surface using the adhesion of the tape. Add additional clear glue to hold the nameplate securely in place when necessary. For each device with a specific identity (relay, module, power supply, fuse, terminal block, etc.) mounted in the interior of a piece of equipment provide a nameplate with the inscription as shown in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Where no inscription is indicated in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, furnish nameplates with an appropriate inscription providing the name and number of device used on the submittal drawings. Stamp the nameplates with the inscriptions as approved by the ENGINEER in the submittal. 13300
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Equipment and materials shall be products of reputable, experienced manufacturers.

Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade, a standard of construction, shall be of sturdy design and manufacture, and shall be capable of long, reliable, trouble-free service.

B. The field equipment panels shall be fabricated to house, controllers, instrumentation, and communications equipment specified elsewhere and as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Control panels shall be fabricated and wired in accordance with Section 13340 and applicable Specification sections.

C. Instrumentation and control equipment shall be UL listed.

2.02 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
A. Provide Instrumentation in accordance with Section 13330, Instrumentation.

2.03 COMPONENTS GENERAL
A. Field Terminal Blocks: Terminal blocks shall be molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals, and shall be rated 25 amperes at 600 volts. White marking strips, fastened securely to the molded sections, shall be provided and wire numbers or circuit identifications shall be marked thereon with permanent marking fluid.

B. Indicators: Indicators shall be provided at the locations specified and shall be rated for the voltage required. Indicators shall be full-voltage Push-To-Test LED.

2.04 GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION COMPONENTS
A. General instrumentation components shall be provided as specified in Section 13330 Instrumentation and 13340 Control Panels.

B. Signal Isolators, Converters, and Power Supplies: Signal isolators shall be provided in each measurement and control loop, wherever required, to match adjacent component impedances, provide signal amplification, or where feedback paths may be generated or to maintain loop integrity when the removal of a component of a loop is required. Signal converters shall be provided where required to resolve any signal incompatibilities. Signal power supplies shall be provided to supply sufficient power to each loop component.

C. Power supply and conversion modules shall be supplied as required to provide the required equipment operational voltage and current. Power supplies shall be sized to provide 150 percent of the maximum current requirements.

D. General Purpose Relays: General purpose relays in the Control Panels shall be plug-in type with contacts rated [10] amperes at 120 volts ac; quantity and type of contacts shall be as indicated. Each relay shall be enclosed in a clear plastic heat and shock resistant dust cover with LED status indicator. Sockets for relays shall have screw type terminals.
13300
E. Industrial Control Relays: Industrial control relays shall be 20 Amp rated with fourpole convertible contacts. The coil voltage shall be as required to interface with the required control logic. The ICR shall be capable of providing eight contacts with the addition of a four-pole module mounted to the deck assembly.

F. Time Delay Relays: Time delay relays shall be electronic on-delay or off-delay type with contacts rated 10 amperes at 120 volts AC. Units shall include adjustable dials with graduated scales covering the indicated time range. Timers shall be provided with status and timing LED indication.

G. Slave Relays: Slave relays shall be provided when the number or type of contacts indicated exceeds the contact capacity of the indicated relays and timers.

H. Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be single pole, 120 volt, 15 ampere (minimum) rating or as required to protect wiring and equipment. Circuit breakers shall be mounted inside the panels as shown.

I. Intrinsically Safe Relays and Barriers: Intrinsically safe relays and barriers shall be installed at equipment locations and utilized where required to meet the defined area classifications.

J. Moisture Relays and Thermal Protection Relays. Moisture and thermal protection relays furnished or required by equipment manufacturers shall be coordinated by the CSS and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. 13300
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. The CSS shall employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all PLC control systems.

B. The CSS shall install all control components according to manufacturer's installation instructions and provide the following:

1. Prepare any additional schematic and interconnection diagrams required for installation.

2. Assemble and interconnect instrument and control components disconnected for shipping purposes.

3. Remove all temporary supports, bracing, and padding inserted in instrument control panels and other equipment to prevent damage during shipping, storage, or installation
C. Monitoring and control system configurations are diagrammatic only. Locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned on the DRAWINGS. The CSS shall determine exact locations and routing of wiring and cables, which shall be governed by existing field wire termination points.

D. The CSS shall provide for installation by the CONTRACTOR all necessary process connectors, fittings and adapters required to connect the instrument to the process piping or process stream.

3.02 FIELD SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING
A. Were field wiring of equipment and components is necessary, the installations shall be in accordance with Section 13340 for equipment installation. The CSS shall verify all field wiring terminations to the PLC.

B. All field wires shall be routed in dedicated field plastic wireways.

C. Wiring from components on a swing-out panel to other components on fixed panels shall be tied into bundles with nylon wire ties, and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that conductors are not strained at the terminals.

D. Wiring to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals with nylon wire ties and secured to the inside face of the panel using adhesive mounts.

E. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the instruments.

F. Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal using white numbered wire markers which shall be permanently marked heat-shrink plastic.
13300

3.03 INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL CABLE TESTS
A. General: The following tests shall be performed on each instrumentation and control system cable. All tests shall be end-to-end tests of installed cables with the ends supported in free air, not adjacent to any grounded object. All test data shall be recorded on test forms-. Complete records of all tests shall be made and delivered to the Owner. The Owner’s Representative who witnessed the testing shall sign each form.

B. Continuity tests shall be performed by measuring wire/shield loop resistance of each signal cable as the wires, taken one at a time, are shorted to the channel shield. No loop resistance measurement shall vary by more than plus or minus 2 ohms from the calculated average loop resistance value.

3.04 FACTORY TESTING
A. All systems shall be factory tested prior to shipment to the job site.

B. Reference Section 13320 for Factory Operational Readiness Testing requirements.

3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Installation and Connection:

1. All wire and all cable shall be connected from terminal to terminal without splices, arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable groups.

All wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners.

2. After all installation and connections have been completed, a technical field representative of the CSS shall check the Work for polarity of electric power and signal connections and shall certify in writing to the Owner that each loop and system meets requirements.

3. At least 30 days before installation testing begins, the CSS shall submit to the Owner a detailed description, in duplicate, of the installation tests to be conducted to demonstrate correct installation of the instrumentation and control system and the anticipated dates the testing will occur.

3.06 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. All systems shall be inspected, tested, configured, calibrated, pre-commissioned and commissioned by the CSS.

B. Control system testing for PLC and SCADA system operation shall be a joint effort between the CSS and Owner to facilitate the start-up and commissioning effort.

C. The CSS shall coordinate all testing and commissioning efforts with the Owner.

D. Reference Section 13320 for System Commissioning requirements. 13300

3.07 TECHNICAL SERVICES
A. In addition to the services required for start-up, commissioning, testing, and other services described in these and other specifications necessary for a complete and operational system, the CSS shall provide additional field technical and configuration services to be utilized at the direction of the Owner. The services to be performed shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Field Technical Services
a. The CSS shall provide for an additional 16 hours of field technical services to include:
(1) Instrument verification and calibration of equipment not shown, or existing or added during the course of construction by the Owner and Control System Suppliers.
(2) Modification of control systems to interface desired options or additional interlocks with packaged system suppliers and motor control centers not indicated or required for operation of the system.
(3) Include new I/O points as required for proper operation and alarm notification.
(4) Additional technical services to be directed by the Owner.

2. Commissioning Technical Services
a. Reference Section 13320

3. PLC Technical Services
a. Reference Section 13350.

B. Written tasks will be initiated by the Owner to identify the work to be performed as a part of the field technical services. The hours shall be directed by the Owner and tracked on a time basis. The time deducted shall be the actual field time provided to accomplish the required task.

3.08 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. The CSS shall furnish to the Owner 6 complete (Electronic PDF and Hard Bound) sets of operation and maintenance manuals. The manuals shall include date, information drawings, etc., for the system, subsystem, and all components, and shall include names, addresses and telephone numbers of equipment suppliers, representatives, and repair facilities.

B. This shall include a complete description of the recommended operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and spare/replacement parts list for equipment items with catalog data, diagrams, and drawings or cuts describing the equipment. Each set shall include full size assembly and wiring diagrams; drawings showing "as-built" conditions shall be furnished to the Owner.
13300

3.09 TRAINING
A. Instruction: The CSS shall train the Owner’s maintenance personnel in the maintenance, calibration and repair of all instruments provided under this contract.

B. Reference Section 13320 for additional training submittal requirements.

C. The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the instrument manufacturers and shall be specific to each instrument model provided. Instructors shall have at least 2 years of training experience.

D. Each training class shall be a minimum of [4] hours in duration and shall cover Operational Theory, Maintenance, Trouble Shooting/Repair, and Calibration of the instrument.

E. Within 10 days after the completion of each lesson the CSS shall present to the Owner the following:

1. A list of all Owner personnel that attended the lesson.

3.10 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT)
A. The CSS shall perform a 5 day operational readiness test.

B. All equipment is to be placed into operation and monitored and exercised by the CSS for 5 days without failure or malfunction.

C. The Owner may also be allowed to run tests in conjunction with the CSS to ensure proper operation during the ORT testing period.

3.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)
A. After startup and commissioning has been completed, the System shall undergo a 30-day Final acceptance test (FAT).

B. The FAT shall not commence until all training is complete and the operations and maintenance manuals approved as-noted
C. The System must run continuously for 30 consecutive days. During this period, all System functions shall be exercised by the Owner. Any System interruption and accompanying component, subsystem, or program failure shall be logged for cause of failure, as well as time of occurrence and duration of each failure.

D. When the cause of a failure has been corrected, a new 30-day acceptance test shall be started. Each time the CSS technician is required to respond to a System malfunction, he must complete a report that shall include details concerning the nature of the complaint or malfunction and the resulting repair action required and taken.
- END OF SECTION -
13320
SECTION 13320

SYSTEM TESTING, COMMISSIONING AND QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The Control System Supplier (CSS) shall provide the following:

1. Site inspection for field wire verification and as-built documentation

2. Prepare and submit for approval, factory test forms and procedures

3. Conduct the Factory Acceptance Test

4. Conducti a site Pre-Commissioning Test

5. System Commissioning

6. Operational Readiness Testing

7. Training

8. Final Acceptance Testing
B. Factory, functional and operational testing shall be a collaborative effort between the CSS and the Owner to verify all system operations related to the SCADA and PLC control systems.

C. The CSS shall assign a project engineer to the commissioning process for the coordination of and scheduling. The CSS project engineer shall be the single point of contact for all start-up and commissioning efforts related to the instrumentation and control systems. The Project Engineer shall attend all Onsite commissioning meetings.

1.02 SITE INSPECTION
A. The CSS shall field verify the drawings and confirm all field wire connections and labels. The CSS shall submit drawings marked up with wire revisions.

B. The CSS shall submit wire label list and connection diagram showing the existing wire label and its new termination block reference within the control panel.

1.03 COORDINATION
A. The CSS shall coordinate all testing with the Owner and Owners representative o verify operation between all systems.

B. Meetings:

1. Pre-Commission Meeting

2. Commissioning Meeting
13320

1.04 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CSS to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.

B. Reference Division 13, for additional testing and commissioning requirements.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. The CSS shall prepare both factory and field testing and quality control submittals specific for the project: The CSS shall submit the following:

1. Loop Commissioning Forms

2. PLC I/O point testing forms

3. Analog Input Calibration Forms

4. Automatic Control Testing Procedures

5. Test Reports

6. Checklists and Sign-Off Sheets
B. Factory Operational Readiness Test Procedure

1. The CSS shall submit comprehensive testing procedures, forms and reports complete. Testing submittals shall address all the factory testing requirements.

2. Factory test forms shall be submitted as follows:
a. Manufacturing and Assembly Verification Forms
b. Point I/O Testing Forms
c. Analog Loop Testing Forms
d. Communications Testing Forms
e. Process Control Test Forms

3. Reference Section 13300 for additional requirements.

C. Pre Commissioning Test Plan

1. The CSS shall develop and submit to the ENGINEER for approval a PreCommissioning test plan to address SCADA communications and control verification with test screens that will operate in parallel with the existing system prior to system removal and conversion.

D. Commissioning Test Plan

1. The CSS shall develop and submit to the ENGINEER for approval a Commissioning Test plan which describes detailed test procedures, checklists, blank forms, and data to be recorded, test equipment to be used and calculated tolerance limits.

2. Testing plan shall be broken out per the various test sequences to address:
a. Digital Point Testing
13320
b. Analog Loop Testing
c. Instrument Loop Tests
d. Instrument and Equipment Calibration Forms
e. PLC I/O Point Test Forms
f. Functional equipment testing
g. Communications System Testing
h. Operational Readiness Testing
i. Operational Testing
E. Commissioning Schedule

1. A system commissioning schedule shall be provided. The schedule shall indicate the testing of each system, subsystem and component including the control systems of the packaged system suppliers.

F. Reference Section 13300 for additional submittal requirements.

G. Reference Section 13350 for PLC and software testing requirements.

PART 2 - TEST EQUIPMENT

2.01 GENERAL
A. Test equipment shall be provided to allow the operators to fully diagnose and test plant functions including instrumentation, PLC’s, electrical systems, and equipment configurations.

2.02 PROCESS TEST EQUIPMENT (N/A)

2.03 COMMUNICATIONS TEST EQUIPMENT (N/A)

2.04 DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT (N/A)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 FACTORY OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST
A. General:

1. It shall be the responsibility of the CSS to furnish all facilities, necessary testing devices and sufficient manpower to perform the tests required by the Owner to determine conformance to the requirements of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

2. The CSS facility shall be located within 100 miles of the project.

3. The CSS shall coordinate the delivery of all packaged control systems to their facility for testing. The CSS shall, receive, open, assemble, set-up, and test in accordance with the project requirements.

4. The CSS shall coordinate the delivery of all control systems from the CSS facility to the job site for installation.
13320
B. Factory Inspection:

1. Instrumentation and control panels shall be inspected for compliance with specified requirements at the factory prior comprehensive system factory testing and before shipment to the CSS and from the CSS facility to the job site. The CSS shall notify the ENGINEER six weeks in advance of the testing date. A representative of the Owner and Owner’s representative will visit the factory to make the inspection.

2. A preliminary factory test shall be provided by the CSS. The CSS shall perform the following inspection and tests prior to arrival of the ENGINEER:
a. All alarm and interlock circuits rung out to determine their operability. b. Electrical circuits checked for continuity and where applicable, operability.
c. Basic panel operation
d. Nameplates checked for correct spelling and correct size of letters. e. Other tests deemed necessary by the Owner that are required to place the panel in an operating condition.

C. Factory Testing:

1. The CSS shall set-up, configure and interconnect all PLC panels and computer equipment in an environmentally controlled area with sufficient space and access for PLC and SCADA system testing by the Owner.

2. The CSS shall furnish and install all temporary interconnection cables and terminations for loop testing, PLC and SCADA communications and analog signal tests.

3. The CSS shall provide the services of a qualified PLC technician during the factory test. The PLC technician shall setup, configure and test each PLC system to verify equipment operation prior to the FORT. The technician shall be experienced in the programming, configuration and testing of PLC systems employing the communications protocols utilized.

4. Tests shall be conducted to exercise all process variables and confirm setpoint trip points, process permissive, process interlocks, alarming, and control functions. The CSS shall provide the necessary personnel to operate, simulate, test, and confirm all SCADA and PLC associated functions pertaining to graphical displays, setpoint interaction, PLC control strategies, alarm monitoring and manual control of the equipment.

5. The CSS shall prepare a FORT test procedure in the form of I/O checklists, calibration sheets for analog I/O tests that exercise all normal, emergency, and alternative control modes. I/O checklist shall reference each I/O by type, tag, and description with a checkbox to verify PLC operation, Communication, SCADA Display, Alarm Function and Command function with a comment field for testing notes.

6. The CSS shall prepare process control test forms for each control strategy subdivided into individual process loops and modes of operation contained within the process control strategy. The test procedure shall be provided on a 13320
step-by-step basis addressing each process on a loop-by-loop and functionby-function basis.

D. Factory Test

1. The Factory test shall be include:
a. System Point Testing
(1) Communications Integrity Testing
(2) System Input/Output Point Testing
(3) Analog Input, Range, Scale and Trip point testing
(4) Control Output Testing

3.02 SYSTEM PRE-COMMISSIONING
A. General

1. Pre-commissioning testing shall be conducted prior to any system commissioning efforts to verify general equipment installation, instrument calibration and equipment configurations are per the specified requirements.

2. The CSS shall provide all necessary labor, tools, and equipment to field test, inspect, and adjust each instrument to its indicated performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any CONTRACT requirements, or any published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, whether or not indicated in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, shall be recalibrated, repaired, or replaced, at the discretion of the ENGINEER at no additional cost to the OWNER.

3. Prior to System Commissioning all cable testing shall be complete as follows:
a. Fiber Optic Communications Cable Testing
B. Equipment Installation Verification

1. The CSS shall confirm all equipment is installed and terminated in conformance with the CONTRACT DRAWINGS, approved interconnection drawings and manufacturers recommended procedures.

2. The CSS shall verify:
a. Operational Voltages
b. Fuse Sizes
c. Equipment Terminations
d. Ventilation
C. Basic Operational Testing

1. All equipment shall undergo a basic individual equipment operational test to confirm the following:
a. Operator Switches are functional
b. Indicators are operating correctly
13320
c. Equipment displays do not indicate failure
D. Communications Cabling Test

1. The CSS shall test all plant communications links utilizing communications test equipment and diagnostic software to verify that a viable communications link is established.

E. Instrument Signal Verification

1. All analog and discrete instrumentation and all control system equipment shall be field verified and tested after installation to verify that requirements are satisfied.

2. The CSS shall provide all necessary labor, tools, and equipment to calibrate and test each instrument in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Each instrument shall be calibrated at a minimum of three points using test equipment to simulate inputs and read outputs.

3. All test equipment and all instruments used to simulate inputs and read outputs shall be suitable for the purpose intended and shall have accuracy better than the required accuracy of the instrument being calibrated. Test equipment shall have accuracies traceable to the NIST as applicable. All analog instruments shall be calibrated and tested in place without removal.

4. Test data, applicable accuracy requirements, and all instrument manufacturer published performance specifications and all permissible tolerances at each point of calibration shall be entered on submitted test forms. These test forms shall verify compliance with all.

5. The Owner’s field representative shall witness all instrument calibrations.

6. A calibration report shall be delivered to the ENGINEER for each instrument, certifying that the instrument has been calibrated in the presence of the Owners’ designated representative and meets Contract and system requirements.

F. Filed Point Testing

1. Field Wiring Point Testing: Prior to testing and commissioning with the Owner, all wiring shall be end-to-end point tested from the field device to the PLC input/output channel and verified to be connected in accordance with the approved interconnection wiring diagrams.

2. Digital Loop Test: The CSS shall be responsible for loop checking and testing all digital instrument, device and equipment status loops including digital loops associated with the packaged system supplier’s equipment. The CSS shall coordinate all loop check functions with the PLC and SCADA system, final element, PLC logic and intermediate equipment to ensure that a single total loop check is conducted. The intent of the loop checks is to confirm and document each loop's component specification conformance up to and including all field-situated devices.

3. Analog Loop Tests: The CSS shall be responsible for loop checking and testing all instrumentation loops including instrument loops associated with the packaged system supplier’s equipment. The CSS shall coordinate all loop check functions with the PLC and SCADA system, final element, PLC logic and intermediate equipment to ensure that a single total loop check is 13320
conducted. The intent of the loop checks is to confirm and document each loop's component specification conformance up to and including all fieldsituated devices.

4. Programmable Controllers, SCADA, and electronic function modules shall be tested and exercised by the CSS with the Owner to demonstrate the correct operation, first individually and then collectively as functional analog networks.

G. Functional Loop Testing

1. Each hardwired analog control network shall be tested to verify proper performance within indicated accuracy tolerances. Accuracy tolerances for each analog network are defined as the root-mean-square summation of individual component accuracy tolerances. Individual component accuracy tolerances shall be as indicated by CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS, or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever CONTRACT accuracy tolerances are not indicated.

2. Each analog network shall be tested by applying simulated inputs to the first element(s). Simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 10 percent, 50 percent, and 90 percent of span shall be applied, and the resulting outputs read to verify compliance to network accuracy tolerance requirements. Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied to verify the proper operation of discrete devices. Temporary settings shall be made on controllers, alarms, etc., during analog loop tests. All analog loop test data shall be recorded on test forms, which include calculated root-mean-square summation system accuracy tolerance requirements for each output.

3. When installation and loop tests have been successfully completed for all individual instruments and all separate analog control networks, a certified copy of all test forms signed by the Owner’s representative as a witness, with test data entered, shall be submitted together with a clear and unequivocal statement that all instrumentation has been successfully calibrated, fully inspected, and fully tested.

4. Functional loop test will be tested end to end with the SCADA/PLC system utilizing a diagnostic test screen to verify range, scale and I/O channel from the instrument to the PLC.

3.03 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. General

1. System commissioning shall be a joint effort between the CSS and Owner to facilitate the plant start-up.

2. The CSS shall provide qualified start-up and testing representatives on-site, assisting and participating in the testing full-time, for the duration of System Commissioning.

3. Provide additional staff as needed to operate equipment, provide safety, verify field signals, verify equipment operation, etc.

B. Functional Testing
13320

1. All equipment shall be functionally tested to be ready for full operation operational as a part of the operational readiness test and prior to process testing.

2. General equipment items shall be functionally tested to be operational by the CSS.

C. Process Control Testing (PCT)

1. Process Control Testing shall proceed after all equipment has been functionally tested and commissioned per the operational readiness testing requirements including those systems provided by the Packaged System Suppliers and the CSS to be operational.

2. Process Testing: The CSS shall furnish their own personnel, electrical personnel, and any instrument manufacturer’s representatives as required during the testing period to produce and maintain a fully operational system.

3. Process testing shall be conducted by the CSS in conjunction with the Owner to operate the system under various load and operational conditions. The operational testing shall include all normal modes of operation, alternate models of operations, demonstrate all back-up control systems, demonstrate all emergency power systems, and operate the system under various control scenarios. The CSS shall provide field personal to exercise all modes of operation and demonstrate the system to the owner.

3.04 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT)
A. The CSS shall be responsible for demonstrating the operability of all electrical controlled and monitored equipment provided under this and other related specifications. The ORT shall commence after acceptance of all wire, all calibrating and loop tests, and all inspections have been conducted. The ORT shall demonstrate proper operation of all sub-systems with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under actual operating conditions possible.

B. Operational readiness testing activities shall include the use of water to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal final control element operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges, and environmental conditions. Final control elements, control panels, and ancillary equipment shall be tested under start-up and steady-state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using motor control center and local field mounted control circuits. All hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational.

C. The control of final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. The stable steadystate operation of final control elements running under the control of field mounted automatic analog controllers or software based controllers shall be assured by adjusting the controllers, as required, to eliminate oscillatory final control element operation. The transient stability of final control elements operating under the control of field mounted, and software based automatic analog controllers shall be verified by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations (if any), and making necessary controller adjustments, as required, to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. 13320
D. All electronic control stations incorporating proportional, integral, or differential control circuits shall be optimally tuned, experimentally, by applying control signal disturbances and adjusting the gain, reset or rate setting(s) as required to achieve a proper response. Tuning shall be based on the ¼ amplitude response method.

E. Equipment functional testing:

1. All individual equipment items shall be functionally tested in hand, local auto and auto to verify proper equipment configuration and operating status.

2. Functional tests shall include verification of hardwired interlocks with other equipment.

F. Measured final control element variable position/speed setpoint settings shall be compared to measured final control element position/speed values at 10 percent, 50 percent and 90 percent of span and the results checked against indicated accuracy tolerances. Accuracy tolerances are defined as the root-mean-square summation of individual component accuracy tolerances.

G. Individual component accuracy tolerances shall be as indicated in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS or as specified by published manufacturer accuracy specifications whenever not indicated.

3.05 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND OPERATINAL TESTING
A. Upon completion of Operational Readiness Testing, the entire system shall undergo a 30 day Final Acceptance Test (FAT). The acceptance test shall be performed by the owner to exercise all systems.

B. The FAT shall not commence until all Operations and Maintenance Manuals, AsBuilt Drawings and Field Interconnection Drawings have been submitted and approved; Owner’s personnel have been fully trained; and all spare parts have been provided.
- END OF SECTION -
13330
SECTION 13330

FIELD INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. This section includes provisions for all field instruments and devices to be supplied by the Control System Supplier (CSS) as a complete and operational field instrumentation system.

B. Provide all devices, tubing, wiring, terminal blocks, mounting brackets, accessories, and enclosures as specified herein and as shown on contract E and I series drawings for the instrumentation system. The Contract Documents are intended as an outline for the work and are descriptive of the type of instrument hardware and software configurations to be provided.

C. Provide and install all process instrumentation including but not necessarily limited to analytical equipment, flow transmitters, level transmitters, process switches, temperature transmitters, pressure transmitters, intrusion switches, gas monitoring and control components. This includes all necessary piping and valves to complete the installation.

Provide all miscellaneous devices such as signal isolators and interposing relays to maintain signal compatibility and integrity necessary to complete the wiring interface.

D. The contract documents are not intended to cover every detail for miscellaneous or incidental materials, software, hardware, configuration, or construction necessary to complete the instrumentation system. The Contractor shall furnish all tools, temporary utilities, materials, setup, parts, labor, and other incidentals necessary to fully complete the entire work, whether or not said details are particularly shown or specified, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. The Instrumentation shall be furnished and installed as indicated on the contract drawings and listed in the Instrumentation Schedule, Section 13330-A.

1.02 RELATED WORK
A. Installations of primary elements which require placement into or taps off of a process flow line are included under Division 13 Instrumentation and Division 11 and 15 Mechanical.

Reference mechanical drawings for mechanical system requirements associated with process taps, flanges and sensor connection requirements. Reference mechanical details for process piping attachment.

B. Electrical equipment interface and conduit for instrumentation is covered in Division 16 Electrical. All of the wiring and component requirements of Division 16 apply to this Section.
13330
C. Instrumentation included and specified under Divisions 11, 15 and 13 shall be coordinated with the equipment suppliers to insure compatibility with the PLC and SCADA control systems. The CSS shall coordinate the I/O monitoring and interface requirements with the equipment suppliers to provide for a complete and operational system.

D. Related instrumentation work, but not necessarily limited to the following specification sections:

1. Division 15

2. Division 11

1.03 SOFTWARE
A. All instruments that require software or has software available to program, test and maintain the instrument shall have their software provided as a part of the instrument supply.

B. The software shall be licensed to the owner and furnished on disk.

C. The software shall be configured in conformance with Section 13320.

1.04 COORDINATION
A. The CSS shall coordinate the installation of all instruments with the contractor.

B. The CSS shall engineer, fabricate and furnish all mounting assemblies and brackets for installation of instruments by the contractor.

1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide submittals and drawings as specified in Section 13300 Instrumentation and Control and as modified by the following
B. Submit instrument manufacturer specific installation detail drawing for each instrument assembly and sensor connection point. Details shall be specific to the process and the manufacturer supplied components indicating all installation requirements and process connections.

C. Instrument Data Sheets per ISA requirements.
13330

1.06 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Provide operating instructions as specified in Section 13300 Instrumentation and Control and as required per the related General Conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 QUALITY
A. Quality including that specified in Section 13300 Instrumentation and Control.

B. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder shall resume normal operation without manual resetting or operator interaction when power is restored. Instruments shall be provided with nonvolatile memory cards were required to maintain system configuration.

C. Signal transmission from remote or field electric and electronic devices shall be 4-20 mA, sourced by externally powered equipment and/or by a 24 VDC loop supply from the panel that is to receive the signal. Nonstandard transmission methods such as impulse duration, pulse rate, and voltage regulated will not be permitted except where specifically noted.

D. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, shall have the output immediately raised and/or converted to compatible standard signals for remote transmission.

E. All instrument outputs from 4 wire devices shall be isolated; the CSS shall furnish all necessary signal isolators to maintain loop integrity.

2.02 CONDUCTORS AND WIRE MARKERS
A. Conductors and wire markers shall be as specified in Division 13 and Division 16.

2.03 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER
A. Chemical storage tank level transmitter shall be a combined sensor transmitter unit with integral display and electronics. The sensor housing shall be NEMA 4X, PVDF Kynar.

B. Transmitter shall have automatic temperature compensation and produce a 4 – 20 mA signal proportional to the monitored level. The electronics shall be provided with a display and pushbuttons for set-up and calibration of the sensor. Calibration and configuration shall be stored in non-volatile memory
C. The electronics and sensor shall be compatible with the chemical being monitored and classified as intrinsically safe. The sensor shall meet the following:

1. Process Mounting: 2” NPT

2. Narrow Beam: 8 Degrees
13330

3. Temperature: -40 to 140 Degrees F

4. Pressure: 30 PSI

5. Power: Two Wire, 12 – 28 VDC

6. Signal Output: Inverse and Direct Acting 4-20 mA

7. Accuracy: 0.25 Percent

8. Range: 0 – 25’
D. Calibration:

1. Provide software calibration via wireless or USB connectivity. Provide all necessary hardware and software required for instrument configuration and calibration.

E. Ultrasonic transmitters shall be Flowline Echotouch LU-23 Series, Endress + Hauser Micropilot, APG LPU-2428, “Or Equal”

2.04 LEVEL SWITCH (FLOAT)
A. Each level switch shall utilize a Polypropylene float which moves with liquid level to actuate a snap action switch. The level switch shall have a minimum electrical switch rating of 500 VA and shall be provided with a SPDT contact. The float shall be mounted in accordance with the contract drawings.

B. Level switches shall be provided with PVC mounting pipe, PVC J-box, brackets and mounting provisions for installation at the wet wells, containment area and channels.

C. Level switches shall be suspend type with weight.

D. The level switch shall be an Anchor Scientific, Mini-Float SM series or approved equal.

2.05 FIELD CONTROL STATIONS
A. FIELD CONTROL PANELS

1. Field panels, Hand Stations (HS), Hand Control Stations (HCS) or (HCK) and Local Control Panels (LCP) shall be stainless steel type with NEMA 4 rating. Panels shall be provided with a hinged outer door and interior deadfront door panel for local operators and controls.

2. Field panels shall be located and placed according to mechanical and structural requirements.

3. Control stations shall be fabricated in accordance with Section 13340 with the operator interface components and wiring interface requirements indicated on the contract drawings.
13330

4. Provide nameplates per Section 13300.

5. Larger Field or Local Control Panels shall be provided to accommodate the installation of motor supplied temperature and moisture monitoring relays supplied by the pump manufacturer at no additional cost to Owner. Provide all associated panel assembly and wiring, in conformance with Section 13340.

6. Provide panel with padlocking capability.

B. HAND STATIONS

1. Hand Stations and Local Control panels located indoors shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Standard hand controls stations shall be NEMA 4 with NEMA 4X operator controls. Enclosures shall be hinged with operators located on the outer door.

2.06 CALIBRATION MATERIALS
A. Calibration materials shall be provided after successful start-up and acceptance of the equipment for operation. Calibration materials and one years supply of buffer solutions, calibration solutions and devices necessary to maintain and calibrate the instruments shall be provided. Calibration materials shall be provided for the following systems as follows:
13330
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 WORKMANSHIP
A. All instrumentation work in this contract shall conform to the codes and standards specified in Division 16 – Electrical and Division 13 Instrumentation and Control.

B. The Contractor shall employ personnel who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all elements, equipment, devices, instruments, accessories, and assemblies. All installation labor shall be performed by qualified personnel who have had experience on similar projects. Provide first class workmanship for all installations.

C. Ensure that all equipment and materials fit properly in their installations.

D. Perform any required work to correct improper installations at no additional expense to the Owner.

E. The Owner reserves the right to halt any work that is found to be substandard or being installed by unqualified personnel.

F. Rejected equipment or equipment without approved submittals shall be immediately removed from the delivery or job site by the Contractor.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install and supply all products necessary to provide an operational system. This shall include the following:

1. Contract Drawings are intended to show the basic functional requirements of the instrumentation system and do not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to provide a complete and functioning system.

2. Provide relays, signal converters, isolators, boosters, power conditioners, circuit cards, and other miscellaneous devices as required for a proper signal interface between the sensor, instrument, operator interface and PLC.

3. Provide analog loop isolators where required to eliminate "ground loops." All instruments that are not provided with isolated signals shall be supplied with an external isolator were required to interface with other equipment.

4. All field wires shall be identified with machine printed labels. Plastic wire gutters shall be used for routing of wire bundles. Wiring shall be neat and laced with plastic tie wraps.

5. The instrumentation and accessory equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and located as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. When manufacturer's installation literature specifies a particular location or orientation in a process line due to measurement accuracy 13330
considerations, the installation shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's instructions.

6. Engineering scales and charts for all instruments shall be provided that match the range of instruments that monitor the process.

B. Instrument installation methods.

1. Install instruments at the location shown on the Plans or approved by the Owner.

Instruments shall be NEMA rated for the installed location.

2. Install level and plumb.

3. All instruments shall be provided with process mounting assemblies, floor stands or wall brackets as shown or required to complete the installation.

4. Mounting hardware, stands, channels, and spacers shall be stainless steel .

Chlorine or chemical room materials shall be PVC or FRP.

C. Wiring and raceway installation methods.

1. Instrumentation wiring shall be carried in conduits provided in compliance with Division 16. All analog circuits shall be run as twisted pairs or triads. In no case shall a circuit be made up using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be used wherever three wire circuits are required. Triads are not to be formed by using two pairs.

2. Terminal blocks shall be provided at all instrument cable junctions and all wires shall be identified at such junctions. Instrumentation wiring shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

3. The number of signal wires listed on the drawings is approximate only, and the Contractor shall determine the required number of signal pairs or triads to properly connect the system furnished, especially when substituting equipment.

D. Wiring, grounding, and shielding methods.

1. It is important to observe good grounding and shielding practices in the generally noisy environment in this application. The following practices shall be observed unless modified by manufacturer's standards:

2. Each electronic equipment chassis shall be grounded to power ground.

3. All analog signals shall be transferred over shielded twisted pair cables.

4. All communication signals shall be transferred over shielded cables.

5. Status and alarm signals routed through noisy environment shall be transferred over shielded twisted pair cables.
13330

6. Each shield which is not connected to ground shall be covered with a heat shrink insulating boot. Shields shall be connected together at each transition from one cable to another for a continuous effective shield circuit. All shields shall be connected on terminal blocks.

3.03 SUPPLIER SERVICES
A. The CSS shall be responsible for each supplier of equipment to provide the following minimum services for each type of instrument supplied. The CSS shall use a qualified instrumentation field technician to perform services listed herein.

1. Advise and instruct Contractor on installation requirements.

2. Inspect all instrumentation systems prior to start-up and verify each instrument is installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturers requirements.

3. Check, calibrate, and place equipment in operation.

4. All programmable instruments shall be programmed and tested prior to startup.

Instrument configurations shall be adjusted or changed as directed by the Owner or Engineer for process tuning requirements, at no additional cost.

5. Coordinate with the Owner and setup all instrument alarm, process, and operation setpoints. Program and configure instrument analyzer systems.

6. Coordinate signal and communication interface requirements with the Owner’s System Programmer.

7. Perform operational and acceptance testing per Section 13300 and 13320.

8. Field calibrate and recalibrate all instruments to the required engineering units provided at start-up. Provide certified and witnessed calibration sheets.

9. Visit the job as often as required and spend as much time as necessary to tune, correct, calibrate and configure instruments to ensure an operational instrumentation system.

10. Be readily available by telephone to answer all questions on supplied equipment.

11. Provide 40 hours of additional calibration and configuration services in addition to those requirements outlined above. These hours shall be directed to calibrate tune or modify systems outside of the CSS scope of supply.

B. The CSS shall engage the services of the manufacturer(s) for the chlorine analyzer, and DO analyzer to set-up, configure and calibrate the analyzer. The manufacture shall be required to make three visits to the job site to verify installation, provide calibration and commission the analyzer for final operation.
13330
C. The Contractor shall insure each supplier of instrumentation assumes the responsibility for providing primary elements in a timely manner, for insertion into the process line, coordinating size and material type, overseeing the actual installation, calibration, and acceptance testing. The instrumentation supplier shall coordinate all process connections and provide all necessary options, fittings and connectors for installation into the process at no additional cost to the owner.

3.04 MAINTENANCE SOFTWARE
A. All instruments or equipment supplied with software for tuning, set-up and configuration shall have the software provided on disk, cataloged and stored in a multi-disk holder. The software shall be loaded and configured on the diagnostic laptop specified in Section 13320.

3.05 TRAINING
A. Each supplier shall provide a minimum of one (1) hour of training to instruct Owner personnel in the use, operation, calibration, programming, and maintenance on each different type of "field" instrument.

3.06 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts shall be provided before site commissioning and start-up.

B. A spare parts list shall be submitted for review and approval prior to shipment of the parts.

C. Spare parts shall be inventoried and crated in a box marked as spare parts, field instrumentation.

D. Provide the following spare parts:

1. Corrosion Inhibitors

2. Hach SC100 Transmitter and Power Supply

3. Dissolved Oxygen Probe

4. PH Probe

5. Pressure Switch (one of each type)

6. Pressure Gauge (one of each type)

7. Differential Pressure Transmitter (0 – 15 psi)

8. Pressure Transmitter (0 – 200 psi)

9. Ultrasonic Level Sensor
13330

10. Hand Control Station (H-O-A)

11. Float Switch

12. Probe Relay

3.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 13300
B. Each time the Supplier's repair person responds to a system malfunction during the warranty period, he or she must contact the designated Owner maintenance supervisor for scheduling of the work, access to the jobsite, and permission to make repairs. Operation of facilities necessary to test equipment shall only be performed by or under the direction Owner staff. The Owner reserves the right at its sole discretion to deny operations requested by the Supplier.

3.08 FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A. Provide final acceptance as specified in Section 13300.

B. At the end of the project, following the completion of the field tests, and prior to final acceptance, the Supplier shall provide the following to the Owner:

1. Each "operation and maintenance" manual shall be modified or supplemented by the Supplier to reflect all field changes and as-built conditions. - END OF SECTION –
13340
SECTION 13340

CONTROL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.00 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Control System Supplier (CSS) shall manufacture and test the following control panels complete as an assembly and provide to the Owner, the following control panel(s):

1. Drain Pump Control Panel

2. Tank Fill Control Panel

3. Existing PLC Control Panel Modifications

4. Chemical Feed Pump Signal Termination Panel

1.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. The CSS shall furnish all necessary control panels complete, assembled, tested and ready for use including all necessary control components, wiring, interconnecting cables, all accessories, and all appurtenances as indicated herein or as required for proper operation of the system. All major components of the system shall be of the same manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, control panels shall be provided with all required taps, fittings, conduit entries, control wiring and alarm interlocks. Dimensions shall be in accordance with the existing space limitations and manufacturer's requirements.

Elevations and horizontal spacing shall be subject to the Owner’s approval.

C. Panels shall be fabricated, assembled, and wired by fully qualified workmen who are professionally trained, experienced, and supervised.

D. All panel meters, all instruments, and all other components shall be of the most recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise indicated.

E. All materials and components making up the control panel shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing. All active electronic devices shall be solid-state.

F. Panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance.

Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be of one manufacturer.

1.02 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY (UL)
A. The Control panels shall be fabricated in a UL authorized labeling facility and all control panels shall bear the UL 508 Label and UL 698A Label for panels containing intrinsically safe relays or barriers.

B. CSS shall submit their UL File #’s as indicated
13340

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The SPECIFICATIONS and PLANS are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply.

B. The CSS shall provide hardware and software compatible with equipment, systems and services specified in Sections:

1. Division 13

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Control panel submittals

1. Reference Section 13300 for additional submittal requirements.

2. Control panel submittals shall be grouped by location, area, and process. Bill of Materials and fabrication drawings shall be individually grouped by Facility, Area, and control panel.

3. Technical Material
a. A separate technical brochure or bulletin shall be included for all materials, each instrument, component, equipment item, system, and other element.
b. The brochures shall be indexed by systems or loops. If, within a single system or loop, a single item is employed more than once, one brochure may cover all identical uses of that item in the system. c. Each brochure shall include a list of tag numbers to which it applies.

System groups shall be separated by labeled tags.
d. Each brochure shall be highlighted and arrowed to signify all parts and options provided. Options not provided shall be crossed out.

4. Drawings:
a. Schematic and wiring diagrams for control circuits shall be submitted.

Initially, schematic control diagrams shall show complete details of circuit interrelationships for all devices within and outside each Control Panel.
b. The diagrams shall consist of component layout drawings to scale, showing numbered terminals on components together with the unique number of the wire to be connected to each terminal.
c. Piping and wiring diagrams shall show terminal assignments from all primary measurement devices, such as flow meters, and to all final control devices, such as pumps, valves, and local control panels. Wiring diagrams shall include MCC Panel, circuit, and breaker number for each power feed
d. Assembly and construction drawings for each alarm annunciator, local indicating panel, process control panel and for other special enclosed assemblies for field installation. These drawings shall include dimensions, identification of all components, surface preparation and finish data, and nameplates. These drawings also shall include enough other details, including photographs, to define exactly the style and 13340
overall appearance of the assembly; a finish treatment sample shall be included.
e. Installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all components and assemblies to be field-mounted, including conduit connection or entry details.
f. Complete control panel layouts, all drawn to a 1-1/2 inch=1 foot scale showing:
(1) Physical arrangements which define and quantify the physical groupings of, space for COUNTY supplied PLC and
communications components, annunciators, handstations,
recorders, indicators, pilot lights and all other instrumentation devices associated with control panel sections, auxiliary panels, subpanels and racks.
(2) All cutout locations fully dimensioned.
(3) All outside panel dimensions shall be shown.
(4) Locations of back-of-panel stiffeners.
(5) Backpanel equipment layout and terminal point locations for all panel and back-of-panel piping and wiring connections.

Terminations shall be coded with identifiers for wiring and piping connections for all electric, hydraulic, and pneumatic
terminations.

5. Bill of Material
a. A complete and detailed bill of material list shall be submitted for each field mounted device or assembly as well as cabinet assemblies and subassemblies. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure. An incomplete submittal shall be rejected, and no further evaluation performed until a complete and detailed bill of material is submitted.

6. Calculations
a. Power requirements shall state required voltages, currents, and phases to determine the actual panel and UPS load requirements. b. Heating: Provide calculations as required, and determine heat dissipation, and operating temperature. Heat dissipation shall be at maximum and shall be stated in BTU per hour or watts. Operating temperature shall be calculated at specified ambient temperatures or at 40 degrees C if no other ambient temperature is specified. If ventilation fans are used, provide audible sound level for the fans. c. Panel wireway fill shall not exceed 60% of the wireway space. Provide calculations for wireway fill.
13340

1.05 CONTROL PANEL ASSEMBLY
A. Rear of panel mounted equipment shall be installed with due regard to commissioning adjustments, servicing requirements and cover removal.

Components, terminal blocks, and equipment items shall be mounted at 9 inches and above from the base or bottom of the control panel.

B. Control panel components shall be arranged on sub-panels and within the panel to optimize weight distribution, heat dissipation and component spacing for wiring and maintenance. Components and terminal strips shall be vertically and horizontally segregated with wire gutters utilizing a 2.0” minimum spacing between the component terminal connections.

C. All fixed position components shall be mounted utilizing stainless steel screws, brackets, and fasteners such that no exterior panel extrusions occur.

D. Backpan components shall be individually identified with a unique identifier per IEEE and ISA recommended practices. Backpanel components shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate riveted to the backpanel and legible with the door.

E. Component DIN rails shall be provided for snap on mounting of terminal blocks, fuse blocks, relays, timers, and signal conditioners. DIN rail shall be zinc plated, yellow chromated steel. Twenty five percent additional rail space shall be provided to allow for system expansion.

F. Front panel components shall be arranged by function and group with a 2” minimum spacing for panel-mounted devices. Operator switches and pilot lights shall utilize a

2.5” on center minimum spacing for wire connections. Where future provisions are necessary control operator switch and pilot light positions shall be pre-punched and plugged for easy modification and expansion. All front panel mounted components shall be provided with a neoprene gasket seal.

G. To ensure proper grounding within the control panel a copper ground bus bar shall be provided. All grounding terminal blocks, equipment chassis and source grounds shall be connected to the ground bus bar to provide a common ground reference within the control panel.

H. All panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion-inhibiting vapor capsules and shall be manufactured by Northern Instruments Model Zerust VC, Hoffman Engineering Model A-HCI, or approved equal.

I. Where indicated on the DRAWINGS; freestanding and wallmount panels shall be provided with louvers and/or forced ventilation as required to prevent temperature buildup due to operation of electrical devices mounted in or on the panel.

J. Intake louvers shall be mounted on the lower side, rear, or front section of an unobstructed panel face. Louvers shall be provided with removable and washable filter grills mounted on the interior side of the louver. Forced-ventilation exhaust fans, where used, shall be provided at an opposing elevated location from the intake louvers. Unless otherwise indicated, fan motors shall operate on 120-volt, 60-Hz power. For control panels located in control rooms, the total audible sound level of the fans shall be less than 45 dB(A).

K. Exterior mounted panels or pain in unconditioned areas shall be provided with a thermal switch for PLC monitoring of the panel interior temperature.

L. Minimum wire bending space at terminals and minimum width of wiring gutters shall comply with the latest revision of the NEC.
13340
M. Future device and component mounting space shall be provided on the door, backpan, and subpanel where detailed on the PLANS. Where no detail is shown, provide a minimum of 15 percent usable future space.

N. Equipment provided with status and diagnostic displays, LED’s, programming pads, buttons or dials shall be mounted with the display and keypad facing the panel front.

Shelving, brackets and associated mounting hardware shall be provided to mount the equipment in readily accessible and viewable location within the panel.

O. Each cabinet interior shall be equipped with an LED panel lamp, 120-volt, one 20- ampere GFCI outlet minimum, and two spare single pole 120-volt, 20-ampere circuit breakers minimum for general power distribution.

P. Provide dedicated 120 VAC control circuit breaker(S) for PLC control systems and controls. Control circuits shall not share miscellaneous power distribution such as lights, heaters, fans, and receptacles.

Q. Provide two spare wired AC and DC fuseblocks for future use.

R. Provide One spare wired 15 amp AC and DC single pole circuit breaker for future use.

1.06 NAMEPLATES
A. Nameplates for all front and rear panel-mounted and back-panel devices shall be laminated plastic, black on white, with engraving through the black surface to form 3/16-inch high white letters.

B. Power Supplies, terminal strips relays and other devices mounted inside the control panels shall be identified with nameplates. All tags shall match device numbers shown on PLANS.

1.07 CONTROL PANEL WIRING
A. Control panel shall be wired per the latest revision of NEC, NEMA, IEEE and UL standard wiring guidelines for electrical systems.

B. WIRE MARKING

1. Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings.

2. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal using white numbered wire markers which shall be permanently marked heat shrink plastic.

3. Wire labels shall be white heat shrinkable, machine printed with permanent black ink.

C. WIRE ROUTING

1. All internal wiring shall be routed through plastic wire ways (panduit) and spiral wrapped when transitions to front panels or additional sections are required.

2. Wire routing shall be separated and grouped by function, voltage, and signal type to minimize noise and maximize maintainability.

3. A 60 percent plastic (panduit) wireway fill of that allowable by the NEC shall be maintained to allow for future expansion and panel modification. A 13340
minimum 1.5 inch clearance shall be maintained in front of each wireway cover to allow for easy access to panel wiring. All interfacing between the cabinets and the field shall be accomplished at a field connection terminal strip (TB). The terminal strip shall have a dedicated field wiring side, no internal panel wiring shall be connected to terminals on the "field side" of TB.

Likewise, no field wiring shall be connected to terminals on the "panel side" of the TB.

4. Wiring run from components on a swing-out panel to other components on a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These shall be tied with nylon wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that conductors are not strained at terminals.
a. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals and secured to the inside face of the panel using Panduit adhesive mounts with Eastman No. 910 adhesive.
b. Wiring to rear terminals on panel-mount instruments shall be run in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets run above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the equipment.

D. WIRE TYPE

1. Control panel wire shall be MTW, UL Listed conductors provided to meet the following:
a. Conductor shall be bare, annealed tin coated copper
b. Voltage Rating 600 VAC
c. Underwriters Laboratories Standards UL-66, UL-83, UL-758, UL-1063, UL Style 1015, UL-1581, UL-2556; ASTM Stranding Class B3; B8; B787;
d. Flame Test VW-1; APWA Uniform Color Code; AWM Spec 1316, 1317, 1318, 1319, 1320, 1321; NFPA 70 (NEC®); NFPA 79 AWM 600V 105°C (75°C in oil);
e. Color-coded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), heat and moisture-resistant, flame retardant compound per UL-1063

2. Instrumentation signal cables shall be of the type used for process control with shielded pairs or triads with polyvinyl jacket and overall shield over the multiple pairs or triads. The instrumentation cable shall be rated 300 volts at 90°C or better. The size of the instrumentation cable shall be AWG No. 18 minimum, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. All instrumentation cables shall meet all the requirements of IPCEA S-61-402 and shall be UL listed. 13340
E. WIRE SIZE

1. Wire shall be sized for all components in accordance with the latest revision of the NEC and UL fabrication requirements

2. The following minimum wire shall be:
a. General 120 VAC Distribution: #12 AWG
b. AC Control Circuits: #14 AWG
c. PLC Input/Input Output Wiring: #16 AWG
d. DC Control Circuits #16 AWG
e. Analog Signal #18 AWG
F. WIRE TERMINATION

1. No more than two conductors shall be terminated at a single termination point.

A common terminal block shall be provided for every two common or neutral conductors contained within the panel.

2. When required precision (1%) 250-ohm resistors shall be installed at the panel wiring side terminal strip when each incoming 4-20 mA analog signal is converted to a voltage signal (1 to 5 volt d-c) as specified.

1.08 WIRE COLOR CODE

1. Black 120 VAC power and Fuseblock

2. White 120 VAC neutral

3. Orange 120 VAC UPS Power

4. Red 120 VAC control circuits

5. Pink 24 VDC Power

6. Blue 24 VDC Control Circuits

7. Blue/White 12 VDC Power

8. Yellow Foreign Voltage, Interlock control circuits,

9. Green Equipment ground

10. Grey DC Common

1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL
A. The control shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 0°C to 60°C dry bulb and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Instrumentation and control elements shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified or normally encountered for the installed location.

B. The control panel shall be environmentally controlled with the use of closed loop air conditioning system and space heaters as required to maintain the environmental conditions specified.

1. Panel Internal Temperature 105 Degrees F
13340

2. Ambient Temperature 100 Degrees F
C. The heating/cooling equipment shall be sized to maintain the temperature below a maximum of 110 degrees and above minimum of 34 degrees Fahrenheit within the control panel. Heating and cooling load calculations shall be submitted for review and approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. Equipment and materials shall be products of reputable, experienced manufacturers. Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade, a standard of construction, shall be of sturdy design and manufacture, and shall be capable of long, reliable, trouble-free service.

B. The control panels shall be fabricated to house PLC’s, controllers, instrumentation, and communications equipment specified elsewhere and as indicated on the plans.

Control panels shall be fabricated and wired in accordance with this and applicable specification sections.

C. The manufacture of the control panels shall be UL recognized facility with current UL procedure files listed with UL. The final assembly shall carry a UL 508/698 listing. All equipment provided shall be UL Listed or recognized for the intended service and application.

2.02 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL AND COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
A. Reference Section 13350 for additional requirements.

2.03 MAIN DISCONNECT
A. The control panel shall be provided with a UL listed main disconnect sized to meet the load requirements. The main disconnect shall disconnect all incoming power and shall be mounted on the inner panel door or panel stand-off clearly identified as the panel main disconnect.

2.04 DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Control panel power and equipment disconnects shall be provided as indicated on the DRAWINGS.

B. Circuit breakers shall be the energy limiting design and shall be UL rated for 120/240 VAC/80 VDC with a minimum interrupting rating of 10 KAIC.

C. Circuit breakers shall be sized in accordance with NEC.

D. Circuit breakers shall be DIN rail mounted.

E. Circuit breakers shall be Allen Bradley 1492-CB, CBI QL Series, Eaton FAZ, or Approved Equal.
13340

2.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. General: Terminal blocks, fuseblocks and disconnects shall be specially designed for safety, installation ease, and ruggedness. Features shall include the following:

1. Finger safe.

2. Nickel-plated terminals and stainless steel screws

3. High copper content copper-alloy

4. Four-sided wire funnel guides for easy wire insertion

5. Finger-safe housings to prevent accidental contact with live circuits

6. DIN Rail mountable shall allow terminal blocks to be placed on the same channel as, relays, timers, disconnects, signal conditioners and other DIN Rail-mounted control devices

7. Self-extinguishing, polyamide 6.6 housing material with UL 94-V2 flammability rating

8. Backed out screws for fast wiring
B. Terminal Blocks:

1. Terminal blocks shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, UL rated for 30 amps at 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals. Terminal marking shall be white marking strips, fastened securely to the molded sections and shall be provided with printed wire numbers. Terminal Block shall accept a minimum of 2 #12 THHN/TWHN conductors.

C. Terminal Color Code

1. Terminal blocks shall be color coded for the voltage and signal type as follows:
a. Foreign Voltage AC – YELLOW
b. AC Control – RED
c. 24 VDC Power/Control - BLUE
d. DC Common - GREY
e. 120 VAC (HOT) - BLACK
f. 120 VAC (NEUTRAL) - WHITE
g. 120 VAC UPS (HOT) - ORANGE
h. Groundings Terminals GREEN/YELLOW
i. Isolated Ground GREEN
j. Analog Signal BEIGE
D. Power Distribution Fuse blocks (250 Volt and below) shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 15 amps at 300 VAC. Fuse-blocks shall be provided to accept 1/4”x1 1/4” fuses. Fuseblocks shall be provided with a swing arm fuseholder for easy removal of fuses. The fuseblock shall be provided with blown fuse indication.
13340
E. Control outputs and foreign control voltages present within the control panel shall be identified and supplied with disconnecting means. Foreign control voltages shall be supplied with pull-apart or knife edge compression clamp or disconnect plug component terminal blocks, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Disconnect terminals shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts.

Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals.

F. Ground termination blocks shall be provided for all signal grounding and shield connections. Ground terminals shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals. Ground terminals shall be color-coded green/yellow for grounding identification.

G. DC Signal and control circuits shall be supplied with pull-apart disconnect fuse plug component terminal blocks, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Disconnect terminals shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts.

Fuseplug shall accept 5 x 20 mm fuses and shall be provided with blown fuse indication. Fuseblocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals
H. Terminal and fuseblock manufacturer shall be Weidmuller, Sprecher and Shuh, Allen Bradley, Entrelec, or Phoenix Contact.

2.06 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Control relays shall be “ice cube” type general purpose relays utilizing 10 amp rated contacts at the specified control voltage. Relays shall be provided as DPDT or 3PDT to meet application requirements. Relay base configurations shall be DIN rail mount and selected such that AC and DC control relays are not interchangeable, thereby preventing accidental damage to relay coils as a result of incompatible voltages.

Relays shall be provided with one spare NO/NC contact. Relays shall be provided with an operational status LED providing positive status of relay energization. Relays shall be IDEC, Allen Bradley or Approved Equal.

B. Control timers shall be solid state adjustable timer circuits supplied as time delay on energize or time delay on de-energize as indicated on the DRAWINGS. Timer control voltages shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall be provided with DPDT, form C contacts (a normally open and normally closed contact). Timers shall be 10-ampere, 240-volt, pin or blade style, plug-in type with dust cover, LED “on” and applicable “timeout” indication, and sockets. Timers shall have an adjustable time range and time setting with indication of the full time range and of the time setting. Time delays shall be provided with LED status indicators for energization and timer function status. Solid-state timers shall be IDEC, Allen Bradley or Approved Equal.

C. Industrial Control Relays (ICR) shall be provided as indicated on the plans and for loads that exceed the normal contact inrush and constant current capacity rating for “ice cube” type relays. Relays shall be provided with convertible cartridges for NO/NC configuration and shall be stackable to a maximum of eight contacts with the addition of a top mounted expansion module. Contacts shall be 20 amp rated bifurcated spanner and nickel-silver plated. Industrial control relays shall be Allen Bradley 700, Type PK series or Approved Equal.

D. Intrinsically Safe Relays (ISR) shall be provided as indicated on the PLANS and for all loads contained in designated hazardous locations. ISR components shall be provided and installed in accordance with UL and NEC requirements for component 13340
spacing and interconnection. Intrinsically safe relays shall be selected for the Class, Division and Group category application of the hazardous equipment location. Input resistance, inductance and capacitance shall be compatible with the switching device and meet the limits for application within the defined hazardous location.

Control circuit interface for non-hazardous equipment side terminations shall be voltage/current compatible with the control equipment. Intrinsically Safe Relays shall be Sycom ISS, Turck, GEMS, SAFE-PAK, or Approved Equal.

E. Moisture Sensing Relays (MSR) shall be provided for all submersible pump moisture sensing applications. the moisture sensing relay shall be provided with adjustable sensitivity and provide a 10 amp rated SPDT for equipment interlocking and alarming. Contact output shall be provided with a 30 second delay to activation.

Relay shall be provided with LED to indicate control state. Moisture sensing relay shall be Warrick 2800, SSAC LLC4 Series or Approved Equal.

2.07 SIGNAL ISOLATORS AND CONVERTERS
A. Signal Isolators, Converters, and Power Supplies: Signal isolators shall be provided in each measurement and control loop, wherever required, to match adjacent component impedances, provide signal amplification, or where feedback paths may be generated or to maintain loop integrity when the removal of a component of a loop is required. Signal converters shall be provided where required to resolve any signal incompatibilities. Signal power supplies shall be provided to supply sufficient power to each loop component.

B. Components shall be DIN rail mount.

C. Conversion modules shall be Action Instruments, Moore Industries CPT Series, or Approved Equal.

2.08 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Operator controls and indicators (switches, pushbuttons, Potentiometers, pilot lights) shall be 30.5 mm, NEMA 4X rated.

1. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights shall be heavy-duty oil tight, manufactured to the requirements of NEMA ICS.

2. Unless noted otherwise, pushbuttons shall be momentary contact and shall have the number and type of contacts as indicated or as required. One spare NO and NC contact shall be provided for each pushbutton.

3. Unless noted otherwise, selector switches shall be maintained contact, shall have the number of positions indicated, and shall have the number and type of contacts as indicated or as required. One NO spare contact shall be provided for each switch.

4. Indicating lights shall be full voltage LED with push-to-test.

5. Emergency Stop pushbuttons shall be provided with a mushroom head and support push-pull operation.

6. Lighting control switches shall be provided with On-OFF-Timed functions with the timed push configured as a momentary return to center operation.

7. Pushbuttons, selector switches, Potentiometers and indicating lights shall be IDEC, Allen-Bradley Bulletin 800T; Westinghouse Industrial Type PB or Approved Equal.
13340

2.09 EMI LINE FILTER AND SURGE SUPPRESSION
A. EMI/RFI Filter

1. Control panels shall be provided with power line filters that are effective in the control of line to line as well as line to ground EMI/RFI interference. The standard line filters shall be rated for 28 dB at 1 MHz. Line filters shall be Corcom 16FC10,
B. Power Surge Protection

1. Surge protection shall be provided at the power input of the control panel.

2. Surge protection shall be DIN rail mount.

3. Voltage as indicated on the PLANS.

4. The surge protectors shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/IEEE C62.41 standards for Categories A, B, and C environments and shall be a UL 1449 listed component.

5. Surge protection components shall be as manufactured by Phoenix Contact SFP-TRAB, MTL Surge Technologies MA15, or Approved Equal.

C. Telco/Data communications Line Surge Protection

1. Surge protection devices shall be supplied for the protection of all communications circuits from the effects of lightning induced currents, substation switching transients and internally generated transients resulting from inductive and/or capacitive load switching.

2. Communication line surge protection shall be UL-497 Listed. The surge protection device shall be sized for voltage, current and frequency requirements listed on the PLANS and shall provide independent conductorground surge protection. Surge protection shall be installed on the incoming communications for the control panel.

3. The protector module shall be failsafe and contain a three-electrode Maximum Duty gas tube, a failshort mechanism, and an air gap back-up device, which converts the gas tube protector to an air gap protector in the unlikely event that the gas tube vents.

4. The surge protection shall be TII or Approved Equal.

D. Data Highway Communications (DH+, RIO)

2. Communication line surge protection shall be UL-497B Listed. The surge protection device shall be sized for voltage, current and frequency requirements listed on the PLANS and shall provide independent conductorground surge protection. Surge protection shall be installed on the incoming RIO communications for the control panel.

3. Data highway surge suppressors shall be Leviton 3803-DP, or Approved Equal.

2.10 POWER SUPPLIES
13340
A. DC Power Supply

1. Control panel DC power shall utilize solid state switching for primary control power. Standard power supplies shall be provided with automatic current limit and foldback. Power supplies shall be sized to power the equipment at maximum load with an additional 50 percent power capacity.

2. Power supply voltage shall be as required to power control panel equipment at their stated voltage and as indicated on the PLANS.

3. Powers supplies shall be Weidmuller PRO ECO 400W, Idec Slimline, SOLA, or Approved Equal.

4. Each PLC control panel shall be provided with a redundant 24 VDC power supply system. The redundant power supply shall be provided with bumpless (diode isolated) power source and contact output for power supply failure indication to the PLC.

5. Power supply redundancy module shall be Weidmuller ECO Pro, SOLA, or Approved Equal.

2.11 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES (CONTROL PANELS)
A. The local control panel(s) shall be wall mounted or free standing with extension legs as indicated on the DRAWINGS.

B. Exterior panels shall be rated Nema 4X 316 SS.

C. The access door shall have continuous hinges with neoprene gaskets and threepoint keylock handle. The cabinet shall be constructed from formed 12-gauge steel minimum. All exposed edges and welds on the enclosure shall be ground smooth.

Refer to the plans for minimum enclosure size and installation details.

D. Panel ratings shall be based on NEMA standards for the location and environment in which the panel is installed. Panel materials shall be selected for corrosive environments based on standard chemical compatibility charts. Unless otherwise indicated on the DRAWINGS, control panels shall be rated as follows:

1. Interior Non-Corrosive, NEMA 12

2. Exterior Non-Corrosive, NEMA 4

3. Outdoor and indoor Corrosive, wash down, NEMA 4X, 316 SS E. The interior shall be provided with a formed 12-gauge steel subpanel for attaching surface-mounted components. All components shall be attached with screws and the subpanel threaded. Rivets or back of panel nuts shall not be allowed. The interior shall be painted with two coats of white paint.

F. Enclosures shall be a manufactured item supplied by Hoffman, Rittal, Gaylord or Approved Equal.

2.12 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS)
A. This specification defines the electrical and mechanical characteristics and requirements for a continuous-duty single-phase, solid state, uninterruptible power system. The uninterruptible power system, hereafter referred to as the UPS, shall provide high-quality AC power for electronic equipment loads.

B. UPS shall be Line Interactive
13340
C. UPS shall be DIN rail mount
D. The UPS shall be designed in accordance with the applicable sections of the current revision of the following documents.

1. UL Standard 1778

2. FCC Part 15, Class A

3. C62.41 1991 (IEEE 587), Category A & B

4. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
E. The UPS shall be designed to operate as a double conversion on-line UPS in the following modes:

1. Normal - The critical AC load is continuously supplied with filtered power. The battery charger shall maintain a float-charge on the battery.

2. Voltage Boost/Buck - During input power source abnormalities (sags and swells), the AC output power shall be corrected by means of boost (sag correction) or buck (swell correction) compensation taps.

3. Battery - When the input power source exceeds the defined operational parameters, the critical AC load shall be supplied power by the inverter, which obtains its power from the battery.

4. Recharge - Upon restoration of utility the input power source within specified parameters, the critical AC load shall be supplied with filtered power and the battery charger shall simultaneously recharge the battery.

5. Automatic UPS Bypass Circuit

6. Automatic Restart- Upon restoration of the input power source, after a complete battery discharge, the UPS shall automatically restart and supply filtered power to the critical load. The bi-directional converter shall simultaneous recharge the battery.

7. Design Requirements
a. Voltage Configuration: 120VAC; +23%, -25% (90 to 148 VAC), single phase, 2-wire-plus-ground
b. Internal Battery: The battery shall consist of valve regulated, lead acid cells.
c. Backup Time: 20 minutes at full load with ambient temperature at 40 deg C (104 deg F).
d. Battery Recharge: The recharge time shall be 3 hours to 95% capacity after discharged into a full load.
e. Frequency: UPS shall auto sense input frequency and shall operate within 55 - 65 Hz. When the input frequency exceeds these parameters, the UPS shall operate from the battery.
f. Surge Protection: 120 VAC Nominal units shall withstand input surges without damage per criteria listed in ANSI C62.41-1991 (IEEE 58, Category A & B. 230 VAC nominal units shall withstand input surge without damage per criteria Listed in IEC 801 - 5, Level 3. g. Voltage Output Configuration:
13340
(1) Voltage Output: 103 - 132 VAC
(2) Voltage Output Regulation: +5/-5%
(3) Output Frequency Regulation: 60 Hz +/- 8%
(4) Load Power Factor Range: 0.65 lagging to 1.0 unity
(5) Overload Capability: 110% for 5 minutes; 200%
for 2 cycles
h. Inverter Configuration:
(1) Voltage: 120 VAC,
(2) Voltage Regulation: +/- 7% RMS battery voltage
range.
(3) Frequency Regulation: +/- 0.5 Hz
(4) Frequency Sync. Range: +/-5 Hz
(5) Frequency Slew Rate: 1 Hz per second
(6) Load Power Factor Range: 0.5 lagging to 1.0 unity
(7) Overload Capability:
(a) 110% for 30 seconds;
(b) 120% for 5 cycles;
(c) 150% for 1 cycle
(8) Voltage Transient Response:
(a) +/- 7% maximum for 20%-100%-20% load step
(9) Voltage Distortion:
(a) Resistive Loads: 10% before (2) minute warning; 15% after pre-alarm
(b) Switching Mode Power Supply (SMPS): 16% before 2
minute warning, 20% after pre-alarm
(10) Transient Recovery Time:
(a) To within nominal voltage within 30 milliseconds.

F. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

1. Operating: 0 deg C to +40 deg C (+ 32 deg F to + 104 deg F)

2. Storage: -15 deg C to +50 deg C (+ 5 deg F to +122 deg F)

3. Relative Humidity:
a. Operating: 0 to 95% non-condensing
b. Storage: 0 to 95% non-condensing
c. Altitude: 3000 m (10,000 ft max.) without power derating d. Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS during any mode of operation shall not exceed 45 dBA.

G. FABRICATION
13340
a. The UPS shall be forced air cooled when required. Air intake shall be through the sides of the unit and exit out the rear.
b. The UPS shall have built-in protection against undervoltage, overcurrent, and overvoltage conditions including low-energy lightning surges, introduced on the primary input power source. The 120 VAC UPS modes shall withstand input surges without damage per criteria listed in ANSI C62.41-1980; IEEE 587, Cat. A.
c. The converter shall be solid-state equipment and controls to convert AC power to regulated DC power for battery charging and convert DC power from the battery to regulated and conditioned sinewave AC power for supporting the critical load.

2. In the battery mode of operation, the bi-directional converter shall convert DC power from the battery to regulated and conditioned sinewave AC power for supporting the critical load.

H. Output Protection

1. For "Faults" indications within the UPS; including short circuits and overloads.

The UPS shall employ the following overcurrent protection methods depending upon mode of operation:
a. Normal Mode - The UPS shall employ a Fuse or circuit protector b. Battery Mode - Electronic Current Limit

2. The UPS shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 110% of full load current for 5 minutes in normal mode. A visual indicator and audible alarm shall indicate overload operation.

The bi-directional converter (Battery operation) shall be capable of supplying current and voltage for overloads exceeding 100% and up to 110% of full load current for 30 seconds. For greater currents or longer time duration, the UPS shall shut down to prevent damage to components and the connected equipment.

3. To prevent battery damage from over discharging, the UPS control logic shall automatically raise the shutdown voltage set point based on lighter loading.

4. The UPS shall provide the operator with both visual and audible status indicators. Visual indicators shall consist LED’s, to indicate utility/battery operation and inverter status.

5. This LED shall be used to provide operation mode status of the UPS. When operating from input AC power and the main On/Off switch is “on,” this LED shall illuminate green. In the absence of input AC power (battery mode operation) this LED shall flash on/off for 1.0 second, every second. a. Utility High/Low status indicator
b. Fault status indicator
c. Load/Battery Level Indicator
d. An audible alarm shall be used in conjunction with the visual indicators to indicate to the operator a change in UPS operating status. 13340

6. The UPS shall contain front panel mounted main On/Off and alarm silence/manual battery test switches. The UPS shall also contain a microcontroller based monitoring and controls for reliable operation

7. Output distribution shall be direct wire connected.

8. UPS shall be provided with Output Contacts for the following:
a. UPS On-Line (On Battery)
b. UPS Fault
c. UPS Low Battery

9. UPS shall be provided with expansion slots for the addition of I/O modules and SNMP network interface modules. The UPS shall be provided with a relay option module to provide indication of UPS status to the PLC.

10. UPS shall be Allen Bradley 1609-B1000, Or Equal

2.13 UPS Maintenance Bypass Switch
A. Provide a two source maintenance bypass switch to allow for the UPS to be moved without disrupting power.

B. Maintenance bypass switch shall be Marathon, Leibert, Tripplite or Approved Equal.

2.14 SPARE PARTS, CONSUMABLE ITEMS, AND TOOLS
A. For additional spare parts, refer to additional requirements as called for elsewhere in these SPECIFICATIONS.

B. Fuses: Provide 20 percent of each size and type used rounded to the next whole number, but no less than five of each size and type.

C. Indicating LED: Provide 10 percent of each color, size and type used rounded to the next whole number, but no less than 5 of each type. This requirement applies to annunciator light bulbs as well, if any are supplied under this Section.

D. Indicator switch cover plates, two lens covers for each type of switch and color combination shall provided. Lens covers shall not be printed.

E. Spare contact blocks 5 spare NO and NC for each type of switch contact block utilized.

F. Corrosion-Inhibiting Vapor Capsules: Two-year supply.

G. One of each type of relay.

H. One HOA Switches
I. One LED Pilot Lights with One LED of each color

2.15 MANFACTURERER SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT
A. The CSS shall install motor protective circuitry and components furnished by the pump and motor suppliers. Equipment for thermal and moisture sensing shall be installed in the local control panels as indicated and required to protect the motor.

1. The CSS shall coordinate the installation requirements with the pump and motor suppliers. The CSS shall furnish and install power supplies, relays and converters as required to properly interface the control systems with the motor supplied protective systems.
13340

2.16 FACTORY TESTING
A. Prior to shipment the control panels shall be factory tested. The manufacturer shall notify the Owner four weeks prior to testing for Owner witnessing of the test to be conducted.

B. The factory test shall not be scheduled until the factory test procedures have been approved.

C. The factory test shall verify installation, conformance with plans, wiring continuity and operation of all panel displays and control components.

D. Programmed equipment and instruments shall be exercised to verify proper range, scale, trip points and control functions.

E. All control logic be tested at the factory.

F. Certified factory test forms shall be provided prior to shipment.

2.17 FIELD SERVICE
A. The CSS shall provide for ten (10) man-days of installation coordination, start-up, and final testing of the control panels. Installation shall be certified by the manufacturer.

2.18 WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT
A. All control panel assemblies and associated control components shall be provided with a 1 year service and replacement warranty from date of project acceptance. - END OF SECTION -
13342
SECTION 13342

PUMP CONTROL PANEL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.00 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all necessary pump control panels complete, assembled, tested and ready for use including all necessary control components, wiring, interconnecting cables, all accessories, and all appurtenances as indicated herein or as required for proper operation of the system.

B. Control panels shall be provided as specified herein and indicated on the contract drawings. Control panels shall be UL-508/698A listed. Control panel supplier shall submit UL file certification as a listed panel manufacturer.

C. Where indicated, pump control panels shall be provided with all required taps, fittings, conduit entries, mounting assemblies, control wiring and alarm interlocks. Dimensions shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. Elevations and horizontal spacing shall be subject to Owners Representative approval.

D. Panels shall be fabricated, assembled, piped and wired by fully qualified workmen who are properly trained, experienced and supervised.

E. Control panels shall be provided as required to fully monitor and control each process specified.

F. All panel meters, all instruments, and all other components shall be of the most recent field-proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the shop drawings unless otherwise indicated. Like equipment shall be provided by a single manufacturer.

G. All materials and components making up the control panel shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have been in prior service except as required during factory testing. All active electronic devices shall be solidstate. All relays shall be provided with dust covers.

H. Panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be of one manufacturer.

1.01 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 16 Electrical.

B. Section 13340 Control Panels

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be provided as specified in section 26 00 00 and 40 90 01 13342

1.03 PANEL ASSEMBLY
A. Rear panel mounted equipment shall be installed with due regard to commissioning adjustments, servicing requirements and cover removal.

Components, terminal blocks and equipment items shall be mounted at 9 inches and above from the base of the control panel.

C. All fixed position components shall be mounted utilizing stainless steel screws, brackets and fasteners such that no exterior panel extrusions occur.

Backpan components shall be individually identified with a unique identifier per IEEE and ISA recommended practices.

D. Component DIN rails shall be provided for snap on mounting of terminal blocks, fuse blocks, relays, timers, and signal conditioners. DIN rail shall be zinc plated, yellow chromated steel. Twenty-five percent of additional rail space shall be provided to allow for system expansion.

E. Nameplates for panel-mounted devices shall be laminated plastic, black on white, with engraving through the black surface to form 3/16-inch-high white letters. Relays and other devices mounted inside the control panels shall be identified with permanent nonferrous tags. All tags shall match device numbers shown on contract plans.

F. Front panel components shall be arranged by function and group with a 2” minimum spacing for panel-mounted devices. Operator switches and pilot lights shall utilize a 2.5” on center minimum spacing for wire connections.

Where future provisions are necessary control operator switch and pilot light positions shall be pre-punched and plugged for easy modification and expansion. All front panel mounted components shall be provided with a neoprene gasket seal.

H. All panels shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosioninhibiting vapor capsules and shall be manufactured by Northern Instruments Model Zerust VC, Hoffman Engineering Model A-HCI, or equal.

I. Freestanding and wallmount panels shall be provided with louvers and/or forced ventilation as required to prevent temperature buildup due to operation of electrical devices mounted in or on the panel.

J. Intake louvers shall be mounted on the lower side, rear or front section of an unobstructed panel face. Louvers shall be provided with removable and washable filter grills mounted on the interior side of the louver. Forcedventilation exhaust fans, where used, shall be provided at an opposing elevated location from the intake louvers. Unless otherwise indicated, fan motors shall operate on 120-volt, 60-Hz power. For control panels located in 13342
control rooms, the total audible sound level of the fans shall be less than 45 dB(A)
K. Minimum wire bending space at terminals and minimum width of wiring gutters shall comply with the latest NEC version,
L. Future device and component mounting space shall be provided on the door, backpan, and subpanel where detailed on the Drawings. Where no detail is shown, provide a minimum of 15 percent usable future space.

M. Interior equipment provided with status and diagnostic displays, LED’s, programming pads, buttons or dials shall be mounted with the display and keypad facing front panel mounted. Shelving, brackets and associated mounting hardware shall be provided to mount the equipment in a readily accessible and viewable location within the panel.

1.04 PANEL WIRING
A. Control panel shall be wired per the latest revision of NEC, NEMA, IEEE and UL-508/698A standard wiring guidelines for electrical systems.

B. Wires shall be identified at each end utilizing the specified wire marking procedure. Wire size shall per the latest requirements of NEC or the specification, whichever is the most stringent, based on wire type and application.

C. All internal wiring shall be routed through plastic wire ways (panduit) and spiral wrapped when transitions to front panels or additional sections are required. Wire routing shall be separated and grouped by function, voltage and signal type to minimize noise and maximize maintainability.

D. Instrumentation signal cables shall be of the type used for process control with shielded pairs or triads with polyvinyl jacket and overall shield over the multiple pairs or triads. The instrumentation cable shall be rated 300 volts at 90°C or better. The size of the instrumentation cable shall be AWG No. 18 minimum, unless otherwise specified elsewhere. All instrumentation cables shall meet all the requirements of IPCEA S-61-402 and shall be UL listed.

E. Control wiring shall be AWG No. 14 THHN. Inner panel control wiring may be AWG No. 14 MTW. Main power (120-volt a-c) to the panels and inner panel utility shall be wired using color coded AWG No. 12 THHN. Wires shall be color coded in accordance with the following table:

1. Black L1 (hot)

2. White L2 (neutral)

3. Red a-c control circuits

4. Blue d-c circuits

5. Grey DC Common

6. Yellow Interlock control circuits, Foreign Voltage

7. Green Equipment ground
F. A 60 percent plastic (panduit) wireway fill shall be maintained to allow for future expansion and panel modification. A minimum 1.5-inch clearance shall be maintained in front of each wireway cover to allow for easy access to 13342
panel wiring. All interfacing between the cabinets and the field shall be accomplished at a field connection terminal strip (TB). The terminal strip shall have a dedicated field wiring side, no internal panel wiring shall be connected to terminals on the "field side" of TB. Likewise, no field wiring shall be connected to terminals on the "panel side" of the TB.

G. No more than two conductors shall be terminated at a single termination point. A common terminal block shall be provided for every two common or neutral conductors contained within the panel.

H. When required precision (1%) 250-ohm resistors shall be installed at the panel wiring side terminal strip when each incoming 4-20 mA analog signal is converted to a voltage signal (1 to 5 volt d-c) as specified.

I. Wiring run from components on a swing-out panel to other components on a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These shall be tied with nylon wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the "hinge loop" so that conductors are not strained at terminals.

J. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals and secured to the inside face of the panel using Panduit adhesive mounts with Eastman No. 910 adhesive. Wiring to rear terminals on panelmount instruments shall be run in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets run above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the instruments.

K. Wire Marking: Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on all shop drawings. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal using white numbered wire markers which shall be permanently marked heat shrink plastic.

L. In addition to the spare power termination capacity indicated on the drawings, each panel shall be provided with two spare fused AC power and DC power terminations to power future equipment items and field devices.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL
A. The control systems shall be rated for continuous operation under ambient environmental conditions of 0°C to 60°C dry bulb and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Instrumentation and control elements shall be rated for continuous operation under the ambient environmental temperature, pressure, humidity, and vibration conditions specified or normally encountered for the installed location.

B. The control panel shall be environmentally controlled with the use of exhaust fans, heaters and/or AC units as required to maintain the environmental conditions specified. The heating/cooling equipment shall be sized to maintain the temperature below a maximum of 122 degrees and above minimum of 34 degrees Fahrenheit within the control panel. 13342
C. Heating and cooling load calculations shall be provided for review and approval. Calculations shall utilize a maximum ambient temperature of 90 degrees F for indoor application and 120 degrees F for outdoor applications.

Calculations shall include watt losses for all components and solar heat gain for the area of installation.

D. Each shall be provided with a strip heater to prevent condensation. 13342
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.00 GENERAL
A. Equipment and materials shall be products of reputable, experienced manufacturers. Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All equipment shall be of industrial grade, a standard of construction, shall be of sturdy design and manufacture, and shall be capable of long, reliable, trouble-free service.

B. The control panels shall be fabricated to house PLC’s, controllers, instrumentation and communications equipment specified elsewhere and as indicated on the contract drawings. Control panels shall be fabricated and wired in accordance with this and applicable specification sections.

C. The manufacture of the control panels shall be UL recognized facility with current UL procedure files listed with UL. The final assembly shall carry a UL 508 listing. All equipment provided shall be UL Listed or Recognized for the intended service and application.

2.01 ENVIRONMENTAL
A. EXHAUST FANS

1. Axial exhaust fans shall be 120 vac, 250 cfm minimum.

2. Fan shall be low noise

3. Fan shall be suitable for mounting with a NEMA 3R top or side mounted fand shroud.

4. Fans shall be Dayton, Hoffman or Equal
B. THERMOSTAT

1. Fan Thermostats shall be Hoffman Series ATEMN Series C. HEATER

1. Radiant panel heater shall be 125 watt.

2. Heater shall be Hoffman, Rittal, “Or Equal”

2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Low Voltage 120 VAC and Less Control power and equipment disconnects shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Circuit breakers shall be the energy limiting design and shall be UL rated for 120/240 VAC/60 VDC with a minimum interrupting rating of 10 KAIC. Circuit breakers shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Disconnects shall be DIN rail mounted. Circuit breakers shall be Allen Bradley 1492-CB, Merlin Gerin Multi 9, or Equal

2.03 TERMINAL BLOCKS
A. General: Terminal blocks, fuseblocks and disconnects shall be specially designed for safety, installation ease, and ruggedness. Features shall include the following:

1. Nickel-plated terminals and stainless steel screws

2. High copper content copper-alloy
13342

3. Four-sided wire funnel guides for easy wire insertion

4. Finger-safe housings to prevent accidental contact with live circuits

5. DIN Rail mountability shall allow terminal blocks to be placed on the same channel as, relays, timers, disconnects, signal conditioners and other DIN Rail-mounted control devices

6. Self-extinguishing, polyamide 6.6 housing material with UL 94-V2 flammability rating

7. Backed out screws for fast wiring.

B. Terminal blocks shall be DIN rail mounted, compression clamp style, UL rated for 30 amps at 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals. Terminal marking shall be white marking strips, fastened securely to the molded sections and shall be provided with printed wire numbers or circuit identifications.

C. Power Distribution Fuse blocks (250 Volt and below) shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 15 amps at 300 VAC. Fuseblocks shall be provided to accept 1/4”x1 1/4” fuses. Fuseblocks shall be provided with a swing arm fuseholder for easy removal of fuses. The fuseblock shall be provided with blown fuse indication.

D. Control outputs and foreign control voltages present within the control panel shall be identified and supplied with disconnecting means. Foreign control voltages shall be supplied with pull-apart or knife edge compression clamps or disconnect plugs component terminal blocks, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Disconnect terminals shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals.

E. Ground termination blocks shall be provided for all signal grounding and shield connections. Ground terminals shall be Din rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Terminal blocks shall be highdensity type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals. Ground terminals shall be color-coded green/yellow for grounding identification.

F. Signal and control wiring fuseblocks (120 volt and below) shall be supplied with pull-apart disconnect fuse plug component terminal blocks, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Disconnect terminals shall be DIN rail mounted, compression clamp style, rated for 20 amps at 600 volts. Fuseplug shall accept 5 x 20 mm fuses and shall be provided with blown fuse indication.

Fuseblocks shall be high-density type molded plastic with barriers and box lug terminals
G. Terminal and fuseblock manufacturer shall be S & S, Allen Bradley, Weidmuller, Phoenix Contact.
13342

2.04 CONTROL RELAYS
A. Control Relays (CR) shall be “ice cube” type general purpose relays utilizing 10 amp rated contacts at the specified control voltage. Relays shall be provided as DPDT or 3PDT to meet application requirements. Relay base configurations shall be DIN rail mount and selected such that AC and DC control relays are not interchangeable, thereby preventing accidental damage to relay coils as a result of incompatible voltages. Relays shall be provided with one spare NO/NC contact. Relays shall be provided with an operational status LED providing positive status of relay energization. Relays shall be IDEC, RELECO or equal
B. Control Timers (TD/TE) shall be DIN rail mount solid state adjustable timer circuits supplied as time delay on energize or time delay on de-energize as indicated on the drawings. Timer control voltages shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall be provided with DPDT, form C contacts (a normally open and normally closed contact). Timers shall be 10-ampere, 240-volt, pin or blade style, plug-in type with dust cover, LED “on” and applicable “timeout” indication, and sockets. Timers shall have an adjustable time range and time setting with indication of the full time range and of the time setting. Time delays shall be provided with LED status indicators for energization and timer function status. Solid-state timers shall be IDEC, RELECO or equal.

C. Industrial Control Relays (ICR) shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings and for loads that exceed the normal contact inrush and constant current capacity rating for “ice cube” type relays. Relays shall be provided with convertible cartridges for NO/NC configuration and shall be stackable to a maximum of eight contacts with the addition of a top mounted expansion module. Contacts shall be 20 amp rated bifurcated spanner and nickel-silver plated. Industrial control relays shall be Allen Bradley 700, Type PK series or equal.

D. Intrinsically Safe Relays (ISR) shall be DIN rail mount provided as indicated on the contract drawings and for all loads contained in designated hazardous locations. ISR components shall be provided installed in accordance with UL and NEC requirements for component spacing and interconnection.

Intrinsically safe relays shall be selected for the Class, Division and Group category application of the hazardous equipment location. Input resistance, inductance and capacitance shall be compatible with the switching device and meet the limits for application within the defined hazardous location.

1. Motor Protective Relays shall be provided where indicated or furnished by the pump motor supplier. Motor protective relay shall be installed in accordance with the pump/motor supplier requirements.
13342
F. Moisture/Level Probe Relay (MR) shall be DIN rail mount provided as indicated on the contract drawings. The relay shall be an adjustable resistive sensing relay for liquid sensing probe applications. The sensitivity (resistance of liquid) shall be adjustable from 0.2-100 k ohms. The relay shall be provided with coarse settings and fine adjustments potentiometers. The relay shall be provided with an integral time delay function. The output circuit shall consists of a SPDT contact. The relay shall be provided with LED indication for power “ON” and Energized State. Control circuit interface shall be voltage/current compatible with the control equipment.

2.05 OPERATOR CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
A. Operator controls and indicators (switches, push-buttons, pilot lights) shall be

30.5 mm, NEMA type 3, 3R, 4, 4X rated.

1. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights shall be heavy-duty oil tight, manufactured to the requirements of NEMA ICS.

2. Unless noted otherwise, pushbuttons shall be momentary contact and shall have the number and type of contacts as indicated or as required.

One spare NO and NC contact shall be provided for each pushbutton.

4. Indicating lights shall be full voltage LED push-to-test.

5. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights shall be AllenBradley Bulletin 800T; Westinghouse Industrial Type PB or equal.

2.06 Enclosure
A. Doors shall be hinged on the same side and shall open to greater than 90 degrees. All dead front latches shall be 1/4 turn adjustable with 1/8" thick latching dog and knurled knob.

B. The enclosure shall consist of a dead front interior and hinged gasketed exterior doors. Outer enclosure shall be constructed of 12 gauge hot dipped galvanized steel. Doors shall be equipped with 316 stainless steel handles with 3-point roller bearing latches and hasps for owner padlocks.

C. Enclosures and fittings shall be polyester dry powder, electrostatically applied and baked on at 380 deg. F for no less than 20 minutes. Color shall be white for interior compartment subpanels and doors.

D. The painting process shall include five stages of metal preparation using dip tanks as follows: 1) Alkaline cleaner, 2) Clear water rinse, 3) Iron phosphate application, 4) Clear water rinse, and 5) Inhibitive rinse to seal phosphated surfaces. All bussing and wire shall be copper. The coating shall be commercially smooth, substantially free of flow lines, paint washout streaks, blisters and other defects that would impair serviceability or detract from general appearance.

E. Disconnection Enclosures shall be Saginaw, Hoffman, “Or Equal”

2.07 Power Distribution
13342
A. Main Circuit Breaker

1. Main Circuit Breaker (MCB) and Emergency Circuit Breaker (ECB) shall be provided with the number of poles and current ratings indicated on the contract drawings. Protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics.

2. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of DE-ION arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

3. Main and Generator Circuit Breaker shall be provided with a mechanical slide bar interlock or manual transfer switch preventing both breakers from being closed at the same time.

4. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on the drawings.

5. Circuit breakers shall be Eaton Series C, GE or approved equal.

B. Circuit breakers

1. Circuit breakers shall be provided with the number of poles and current ratings indicated on the contract drawings. Protective devices shall be molded case circuit breakers with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics.

3. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as indicated on the drawings.

4. Circuit breakers shall be Eaton Series C, Square D, GE or approved equal.
13342
C. Circuit Breaker Flange Handle Disconnects

1. Provide Circuit Breaker disconnect assemble and handle mechanism for flange mounting on the disconnect enclosure. Coordinate circuit breaker and enclosure disconnect mounting requirements.

2.08 Motor Monitoring
A. Current Transducer

1. Current transducer shall be CT to 4-20 mA converter to provide amperage readings to the PLC.

2. Current Transducer shall be adjustable Range 0 – 80 Amps

3. Split Core

4. 4- 20mA Output

5. Current Transducer shall be:
a. Veris HG 21
b. CR Magnetics
c. NK Technologies
B. Kilowatt Transducer

1. Kilowatt transducer shall be 3 phase, 3 or 4 wire with voltage and current inputs to match the existing site conditions. Transducer shall be DIN rail mount.

2. The Kilowatt transducer shall provide a 4-20 mA output representative of the stations power.

3. Kilowatt transducer shall be configured to meet the individual site requirements for voltage, current and phase configuration. The SI shall field verify the configuration of each site and submit accordingly.

4. Kilowatt transducer shall be provided with all required Current Transformers.

5. Kilowatt transducer shall be Crompton Instruments Paladin Series 250, API-Camille Bauer Sineax 500 series, Or Equal
C. Motor Current Transmitter

1. The motor current transmitter shall be a CT converter module with 4- 20mA output. The current sensor shall be sized at 150 % of the motor Full Load Amps (FLA).

2. Current sensor shall be adjustable to accommodate various current ranges and produce a proportional 4-20 mA output to the measured motor current.

3. Motor current transmitter shall be :
a. Veris Industries Hawkeye 721 Series
D. Phase/Power Fail Relay
13342
a. The phase fail relay shall provide adjustable voltage monitoring with LED status indication. The phase fail relay shall be DIN rail mount and fully adjustable.
b. The voltage range shall be compatible with the equipment operating voltage. Adjustable parameters shall be set to the equipment operational parameters to provide for maximum protection. c. Monitored parameters shall be adjustable with an adjustable time to trip delay from 0.1 to 25 seconds. The phase/power fail relay shall provide for the following:
1) Overvoltage
2) Undervoltage
3) Phase Sequence
4) Frequency Band
5) Phase Unbalance
E. The phase/power fail relay shall be Diversified SLU-100 series.

2.09 MOTOR CONTROL
A. Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)

1. Each full-voltage starter unit shall be have an AIC rating as indicated on the Contract Drawings. The MCP shall provide adjustable magnetic protection and be provided with pin insert to limit magnetic adjustment to a maximum of 1700% motor nameplate full load current to comply with NEC requirements. All MCP shall have a push-to-test button on the MCP.

B. Motor Starters

1. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with double-break silver alloy contacts. The starter must have straight-through wiring. Coils shall be of molded construction. All coils to be color-coded through Size 5 and permanently marked with voltage, frequency and part number. Starters shall be provided as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Starters shall be 3 pole, NEMA rated with two (2) Normally Open Auxiliary contacts.

C. Solid State Overload (Electronic Trip)

1. Provide a solid-state overload relay for protection of the motors. The overload relay shall provide high accuracy through the use of state-of-theart microelectronic packaging technology. The overload relay shall be modular in design, be an integral part of a family of relays to provide a choice of levels of protection, be designed to directly replace existing electromechanical overload relays, and be listed under UL Standard 508.

2. The overload relay shall have the following features:
a. Self-powered
b. Class 10 or 20 fixed tripping characteristics
c. Manual or automatic reset
13342
d. Phase loss protection. The relay shall trip in 2 seconds or less under phase loss condition when applied to a fully loaded motor e. Visible trip indication
f. Provide one NO and one NC isolated auxiliary contact g. Test button that operates the normally closed contact h. Test trip function that trips both the NO and NC contacts i. A current adjustment range of 3.2:1 or greater
j. Ambient temperature compensated
k. Ground fault protection. Relay shall trip at 50% of full load ampere setting
l. Jam/Stall protection. Relay shall trip at 400% of full load ampere setting, after inrush.

2.10 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
A. REQUIREMENTS

1. The VFD shall be capable of operating with a single phase input of 240 VAC and provide for a three phase 240 VAC output. The drive shall be sized accordingly to support the single to three phase operation.

B. MANUFACTURER

1. ABB, Danfoss, Eaton,
C. EQUIPMENT

1. The VFD system, in order to meet the requirements of these specifications, shall consist of:
a. Line reactor, converter section, output inverter, load reactor/filter, and control logic section. All components listed including reactors shall be integral to the VFD compartment, factory wired and tested as a complete system.
b. Input circuit breaker will be located within the motor control section that is supplying power to the VFD as indicated on the plans.

2. Maximum input voltage unbalance shall be 0.5% as defined in NEMA MG1.14.35.2.

3. VFD system shall maintain a 0.95 minimum true power factor throughout the entire speed range.

4. The VFD system shall be designed to operate the Motor at a distance of up to 100 feet. The VFD supplier shall furnish all equipment and make the necessary adjustments to the VFD system to operate the motor reliably at the indicated distance.
13342
D. COMPONENTS

1. General:
a. IGBT Drive.
b. Minimum of 7 preset speeds.
c. Voltage or Current input signal control.
d. Ground fault protection.

2. Operator interface.

3. Drive/door mounted.
a. Hand held operation.
b. LCD Display.
c. Scalable units of measure.

4. Minimum integral protection furnished with the drive:
a. Under and overvoltage protection.
b. Output phase-to-phase short circuit.
c. Output phase to ground.
d. I2T motor overload protection.
e. Drive thermal protection.

5. Control inputs/outputs:
a. Minimum of four programmable discrete dry contact outputs. 1) Drive running.
2) Drive failed.
3) Drive Ready
4) Auxiliary Output (Programmable)
b. Minimum of two programmable analog isolated 4-20 mA output. 1) Drive output speed.
2) Drive output amps.
13342
c. Minimum of eight programmable inputs
d. Drive Start/Stop Input Source A
e. Drive Start/Stop Input Source B
f. Speed Source A or B Select
g. Drive Shutdown/Stop
h. Drive Reset
i. Auxiliary Input
j. Drive Hand Control (Local Panel Operator Speed Select)

6. Minimum of two analog 4-20 mA analog inputs
a. Speed Source A Control
b. Speed Source B Control

7. Input specifications, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
a. Single Phase 240 VAC
b. Frequency: 60 Hz.
c. Power ride through: 15 msec.

8. Output specifications:
a. Three Phase 240 VAC
b. Voltage: Fully programmable from 0 to nominal input voltage. c. Frequency range: 0-400 Hz.
d. Frequency resolution: 0.01 Hz.
e. Continuous current: 100% of rated current.
f. Intermittent Current: 150% of rated current for 60 seconds. g. Current trip: 200% of rated current.

9. Drive adjustments
a. Accel/Decel Time: 0.0-3600 Seconds in 0.1 second Increments. b. Accel/Decel Type: Linear or S-ramp.
13342
c. Minimum frequency: 0 to 120 Hz.
d. Maximum frequency: 40 to 400 Hz.
e. Stop mode: Coast/ramp/DC Brake to Stop.
f. Current Limit: 20 to 150%.
g. Motor overload: 20 to 115%.
h. DC Boost: 0-25% of input voltage.
i. Adjustable Start Delay
j. Audible Noise
k. Adjustable carrier for quiet operation.

10. Ambient operating temperatures
a. NEMA 1 enclosure: 0-50°C.
b. NEMA 12 enclosure: 0-40°C.

11. Drive Options
a. Provide the following options/modifications to the VFD. All special features shall be factory mounted and wired within the VFD enclosure unless otherwise specified.
b. 3% input line reactor.

12. Manufacturer coordination requirements:
a. It is the responsibility of the Manufacturer to coordinate the drive with the motor and the installed cable length to ensure that no damage can occur to the motor as a result of standing waves, high carrier frequency, high levels of dv/dt, etc.

13. Surge protection
13342
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.00 GENERAL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all installation materials, labor, wiring, cabling, and terminations, for the complete installation and operation of the control panels.

B. Craftsmen skilled in the particular trade shall perform assembly, wire and fabrication in a workmanlike manner. Work shall be performed in accordance with the Plans, Specifications, manufacturers' recommendations, and the best practice of the trade. Completed work shall present a neat and finished appearance.

C. Qualified, experienced personnel who are technically skilled in their trades, are thoroughly instructed, and are competently supervised shall do all work, including installation, connection, calibration, testing and adjustment. The resulting complete installation shall reflect professional quality work, employing industrial standards and methods. Any and all defective material or inferior workmanship shall be corrected immediately to the Satisfaction of the Owners Representative at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.01 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY PUMP MANUFACTURER
A. Coordinate with pump supplier all requirements for motor protective relay (MPR) circuitry and the installation of pump manufacturer supplied materials to maintain the specified warranty.

B. Install and wire protective circuit components and materials supplied by the pump manufacturer. Provide wiring and installation methods in accordance with the pump manufacturers requirements.

3.02 PROGRAMMING AND ADJUSTMENT
A. The motor protection circuity shall be adjusted based on the actual Motor FLA. Program, configure and adjust the following:

1. MCP/TM Instantaneous Setting

2. Motor Overload

3. Main Breaker LSIG where provided

4. Motor Protective Circuit

5. Phase Fail Relay
B. The VFD shall be programmed and configured to operate as indicated and based on actual load conditions. At a minimum the following shall be configured.

1. Remote Control Source Selection

2. Local Control Via Key Pad Operation

3. Accel. And Decel Times

4. Minimum Speed Adjustment based on pumping

5. Program all I/O points and configure as required for proper monitoring and control from the PLC or RTU.
13342

3.03 WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT
A. All control panel assemblies and associated control components shall be provided with a 1 year service and replacement warranty from date of project acceptance.
- END OF SECTION -
13350
SECTION 13350

PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The CSS shall furnish and install a PLC control system for the process, instrumentation and control systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. PLC control system shall be furnished complete in accordance with the Specification requirements.

C. PLC and SCADA programming shall be provided the CSS

1.02 REQUIREMENTS
A. General: This Section covers PLC based programmable control systems, complete. The Control System Supplier (CSS) shall furnish, install, test, calibrate, configure, and place into operation Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC’s), Microcontroller Units (MCU), and PLC communications hardware as specified herein.

B. The CSS shall coordinate the services to provide programming in accordance with the specifications and the Owner’s PLC standards.

C. The CSS shall furnish all necessary interconnecting cables, all accessories, and all appurtenances as indicated herein or as required for proper operation of the system. All major components of the system shall be of the same manufacturer.

D. Programmable control systems are a part of the instrumentation and controls system. In addition to the requirements in this Section, the supplier of the programmable control systems shall meet all the applicable requirements of installation covered in the following:

1. Section 13300, Instrumentation and Controls

2. Section 13320, Quality Control

3. Section 13340 Control Panels

4. Section 13370 Applications Programming
E. The CSS shall furnish, install, and wire PLC modules, communications modules, processors, and I/O modules in the control panels as indicated. 13350
F. The CSS shall configure, test, and start-up all hardware, and communications interface components as indicated herein or as required for proper operation of the system.

G. The CSS shall schedule and coordinate PLC and SCADA communications and configuration requirements with the Owner.

H. The CSS shall configure the hardware to provide SCADA access monitoring and control via Allen Bradley, Ethernet IP, and Modbus RTU/TCP to existing Modbus communications with remote locations and auxiliary equipment. All existing communications shall be retained and included within the Allen Bradley PLC program application.

I. The CSS shall schedule and coordinate communications and configuration requirements Owner.

J. The CSS shall provide the services of a PLC field technician for start-up, point testing, loop testing, operational testing, commissioning and final acceptance of the PLC hardware and software systems.

K. The input and output requirements for the PLC’s are contained in the wiring diagrams, Input/Output List/Schedules, and associated drawings. The CSS shall prepare a consolidated project wide PLC Input/Output wiring list for all I/O represented in the various documents.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all Sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.

B. The CSS shall provide hardware and software compatible with equipment, systems and services specified in the following sections:

1. Division 13, Instrumentation and Control

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be supplied in conformance with Sections 13300 and the following:

1. PLC Input/Output List
a. List shall include all I/O on a PLC per PLC basis with all I/O points assigned to a specific module input or output. The List shall include:
(1) Tagname and Number
(2) Description
(3) Function
13350
(4) Module Rack, Slot, and Channel
(5) Voltage
(6) Type
(7) Equipment Designator

2. PLC Power Supply Loading Calculations

1.05 REFERENCED STANDARDS
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):

1. C62.90.2, trial-use standard withstand capability of relay systems to radiated electromagnetic interference from transceivers.

2. C62.41, IEEE recommended practice on surge voltages in low-voltage AC power circuits.

3. C62.45, IEEE guide on surge testing for equipment connected to lowvoltage AC power circuits.

B. Electronic Industries Association (EIA):

1. TIA-232-E, interface between data terminal equipment and data circuitterminating equipment employing serial binary data interchange.

2. 422-A, electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits.

C. International organization for standardization (ISO):

1. ISO 9001, quality systems-model for quality assurance in design, development, production, installation, and servicing.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. ICS 1, general standards for industrial control and systems.

2. ICS 4, terminal blocks for industrial use.

3. ICS 6, enclosures for industrial controls and systems.

4. LS1, low voltage surge protection devices.

5. Publication No.250, enclosures for electrical equipment (1000 V maximum).

E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. National Electrical Code (NEC).

F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL 1283, standard for safety-electromagnetic interference filters. 13350

2. UL 1449, standard for transient voltage surge suppressors.

1.06 COORDINATION
A. The CSS shall coordinate all interconnection requirements to existing equipment with the Owner.

B. The CSS shall coordinate the PLC wiring and Input/Output assignments with the Owner. The Owner shall approve the I/O arrangement prior to fabrication and wiring of the PLC cabinets by the CSS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL
A. The PLC Control System shall be Allen Bradley ControlLogix. “No Equal” B. The PLC system shall operate in ambient conditions of 32 to 140°F temperature and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning.

C. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment, the PLC components (I/O modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of one component does not affect equipment of all trains. I/O modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required otherwise for safety reasons.

D. The PLC program module shall dictate control outputs to a known and safe state prior to running of control program, under PLC fault conditions, and PLC runtime errors.

E. Access to the PLC program, downloading, uploading and diagnostic functions shall have incorporated password protection or key lock operation.

F. PLC system shall be designed with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference.

G. The controller shall be grounded to the panel ground bus with a separate ground conductor sized per the manufacturers grounding requirements the minimum ground connection shall be #12 awg.

2.02 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
A. Construction: The PLC central processing unit (CPU) shall be of solid-state design. All CPU operating logic shall be contained on plug-in modules for quick replacement. Chassis wired logic is not acceptable. The controller shall be capable of operating in a hostile industrial environment (i.e., heat, electrical transients, RFI, vibration, etc.) without fans, air conditioning, or electrical filtering (up to 60 degrees C and 95 percent humidity). 13350
B. The PLC shall be furnished as a complete assembly with I/O (input/output) modules and peripheral equipment suitable for the interface with the PLC equipment, components, and field devices. The PLC design shall incorporate:

1. The PLC chassis shall contain all I/O modules, communications equipment, and power supplies required to provide the specified functions. PLC chassis shall be sized to house the required PLC modules plus an additional four slots for future expansion capability.

2. PLC Power Supply: The PLC power supplies shall be sized to provide power at the maximum total module load plus an additional 50 percent for future expansion. The PLC power supply shall provide the following operational characteristics:
a. 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 15 percent continuously.
b. 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 30 percent maximum 30 seconds c. 120 VAC RMS plus or minus 100 percent maximum milliseconds. d. Line spikes at 1000V ac (5000 micro-seconds duration; 0.05 percent maximum duty cycle).
e. Power Supply Shall be ControlLogix Series 1756-PB Series

3. Central Processor: The central processor shall contain all firmware logic, relays, timers, counters, number storage registers, shift registers, sequencers, arithmetic capability, and comparators necessary to perform the specified control functions. It shall be capable of interfacing sufficient discrete inputs, analog inputs, discrete outputs, and analog outputs to meet the specified requirements plus an additional 25 percent excess capacity.

4. The power supply shall contain circuitry to provide orderly shutdown in the event incoming power does not meet specifications. If this occurs, the processor shall cease operation, forcing all outputs off. The processor shall have a key type memory protect switch to prevent unauthorized program changes. The central processor shall be 32-bit, minimum
a. Memory: The programmable controller memory be backed up by an internal power source.
b. The PLC shall be supplied with sufficient memory to implement the specified control function plus a reserve capacity of 25 percent of the total provided. This reserve capacity shall be totally free from any system use. Memory size shall be 40 MB
c. The PLC shall be provided with a 2 GB Flash Memory module for program storage and memory back-up.
13350
d. The PLC shall provide internal fault analysis with a fail-safe mode and a dry contact output for remote location alarming, and a local indicator on the PLC frame in the event of a fault in the PLC. e. The PLC shall be support programming in IEC 61131 language using Allen Bradley Software. It shall be easily reprogrammed with a portable programming unit.
f. Communications Ports: The PLC system shall be equipped with an Ethernet interface ports.
g. The PLC processor shall be Allen Bradley ControlLogix 1756- L85E

5. Input/Output Modules: All I/O housings and I/O modules shall be of rugged construction with modules in place. Sufficient input and sufficient output modules shall be provided with the PLC to implement the specified control functions plus a reserve capacity of 25 percent of the total provided.
a. Discrete Input Modules: Defined as contact closure inputs from devices external to the programmable logic controller module.

Input modules shall be shielded from short time constant noise and 60-Hz pickup. Individual inputs shall be optically isolated for low energy common mode transients to 1500 volts peak from user's wiring or other I/O Modules. The modules shall have LED lights to indicate a discrete input.
(1) DC Input modules shall be supplied with a maximum of 16 or 32 points per module. Input voltage rating shall be
provided as indicated on the contract drawings. Discrete input module shall be AB ControlLogix 1756-IB32.
(2) AC Input modules shall be supplied with a maximum of 16 points per module. Input voltage rating shall be provided as indicated on the contract drawings. Discrete input module shall be AB ControlLogix 1756-IA16.
b. Discrete Output Modules: Defined as contact closure outputs for ON/OFF operation of devices external to the programmable logic controller module. The output modules shall be fused at with blown fuse indicator lights. The output modules shall be optically isolated from inductively generated, normal mode and low energy, common mode transients to 1500 volt peak. All output modules shall have LED lights to indicate output has been cycled ON by the controller.
(1) Grouped relay outputs shall be utilized for AC/DC switching and control applications. Output contact rating shall be 2 amps. Interposing relays shall be provided when controlled 13350
equipment current exceeds the contact output rating. Output module shall be supplied with a maximum of 16 points per module. Voltage shall be supplied as indicated on the
contract drawings. Relay output module shall be AB
ControlLogix 1756-OW16.
c. Analog Input Modules: Defined as analog inputs for 1 to 5 VDC or 4 to 20 mA dc signals, where an analog to digital conversion is performed and the digital result is entered into the processor.

New inputs shall be provided for every scan. Analog inputs shall be supplied with a minimum resolution of 14 bits. Each analog input shall be isolated from common. Analog input modules shall be 8 channel AB ControlLogix Series 1756-IF16.
d. Analog Output Modules: Defined as analog output for 1 to 5 VDC or 4 20 mA dc signals, where a digital to analog conversion is performed and the analog result is produced on every scan.

Analog output resolution shall be 14 bit minimum. Each analog output shall be capable of driving into a 1500 ohm load. Analog Output modules shall be 8 channel AB ControlLogix Series 1756- OF6C.

6. Distributed Input/Output Communications: The PLC shall communicate with remote chassis utilizing a Ethernet I/O control network. Ethernet module shall be Allen Bradley ControlLogix EN2TR.

C. Communications:

1. Ethernet Remote Input/Output (ERIO) – The PLC system shall be provided with a redundant ERIO network for rack mount I/O communications with the main processor CPU. The communication module shall be 1756-EN2TR

2. Ethernet: The PLC shall be provided with an Ethernet communications module port for SCADA Local Area Network access.

D. The PLC system components shall be AB ControlLogix Series.

2.03 CABLING AND CONNECTORS
A. Cables and connectors shall be supplied by the PLC manufacturer and fabricated for the required interface connection. Cables shall be fabricated at the required length, unspliced with factory installed terminations at both ends.

B. Trunk, bus, drop and tap off cables and conductors shall be factory certified for use with the specified communication and interface media requirements.

C. Termination, Data segment and Tee boxes shall be certified by the manufacturer and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
13350
D. Connectors and terminators shall be provided with the correct connection interface without the use of additional adapters or fittings. Terminators shall be installed by the factory at the appropriate cable ends.

E. All terminations shall be provided with screw type terminal connectors.

F. Common Bus Bar connectors shall be utilized for ground and common connections for system power and grounding.

G. The PLC system supplier shall furnish all communications connectors, adapters, terminating resistors as required to provide a complete communication cabling system. The CSS shall coordinate installation and terminate the Ethernet IP, Profibus, Modbus TCP, Modbus Serial RTU and DIO communications cables as required to interface with all supplied equipment.

2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. The CSS shall provide, in addition to the specified wired spares, the following packaged spare parts:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL
A. The CSS shall furnish all configuration labor, communications wiring, cabling, terminations, equipment, modules, converters, and interface components to provide for a complete and operational PLC control system.

B. The PLC inputs/outputs shall implement the control functions and I/O specified within Section 13370, existing process control strategies as modified per section 13370, shown on the drawings, indicated in the I/O list, and specified under applicable specification sections.

C. PLC control systems shall be configured to operate independent of SCADA workstation. The PLC shall be configured to operate failsafe in the event of a PLC failure.

D. Modules shall be arranged such that a single module failure does not result in the shutdown of a complete system or station with the plant. Where only a single type module is utilized in a PLC rack, such as AI or AO modules, a second module shall be provided to split the AI and AO into multiple channels. The minimum number of AI or AO modules per PLC shall be two.

E. PLC to MCC interface shall be DC Input and Relay Out (24 VDC Source).

F. All unused module inputs and outputs shall be wired to terminal blocks.

G. Provide 25 Percent Spare I/O for each type and voltage. Add modules as required.
13350

3.02 PLC APPLICATION PROGRAMMING
A. PLC Programming shall be provided utilizing Rockwell Studio 5000 development software
B. Programming shall be provided as Function Block Style.

1. Function Blocks shall be provided as follows:
a. Alarm Block
b. Instrument Block
c. Motor
d. Motor with VFD
e. Valve
f. Chemical Feed Pump
g. Well Pump
h. Power Monitor
i. Equipment Status Block
j. Additional Blocks as required
C. Programming Application Requirements

1. Reference Appendix A for existing PLC application programming functionality.

2. The existing PLC register sets shall be provided in Allen Bradley communications Protocol compatible with the existing Wonderware SCADA system.

3. The existing PLC Application program functionality shall be duplicated within the Allen Bradly ControlLogix PLC with the following revisions:
a. The existing WTP PLC SCADAPAK and Filter Control Panel SCADAPAK application programs shall be combined into a single ControlLogix application program.
b. Existing register sets for SCADA and Remote applications shall be recreated to support the Allen Bradley communications protocol.
c. The
d. Although not referenced in the existing control strategies, new I/O and control functions have been added over time to the program application, but not documented. A copy of the ISAGRAF
programming files is available for review.
13350
e. The CSS shall verify existing operation and allow for the programming of these functions with-in the Allen Bradley program. This functionality in includes:
(1) VFD monitoring and control of 4 Pumps
(2) Chemical Feed Pump Control for 4 Pumps via
Modbus/TCP.
(3) 8 Status Monitoring Points
(4) 4 Analog Inputs
(5) 2 Analog Outputs

3.03 FACTORY TESTING
A. Reference Section 13320 for additional factory testing requirements.

B. Factory testing shall be conducted with the Communications Systems, PLC’s, and SCADA.

C. The CSS shall provide the services of a factory trained PLC technician to provide the following:

1. Setup, configure and wire all control panels and SCADA workstations.

2. Set-up, configure and verify all Ethernet and Fiber Optic communications modules.

D. The CSS shall provide the services of a factory trained PLC technician to provide for:

1. Point Testing of all I/O systems with the PLC diagnostic graphic displays.

2. Analog testing of all I/O systems with signal generator to vary the signal from 0 – 100 percent at 10 percent intervals.

3. Test communications interface between PLC’s, PLC to SCADA and SCADA to SCADA communications.

4. Assist with functional testing as required to verify all communications, I/O functionality, and hardware operation.

E. The CSS shall provide all necessary cables, connectors, simulators, and testing equipment required to perform a complete system test.

F. Test equipment shall be provided to test and independently vary up four analog input values simultaneously via 4-20 mA signal.

3.04 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTING
A. Reference Section 13320 for site and field testing requirements 13350
B. The CSS shall provide On-Site PLC and SCADA programming services during testing. Remote access to the system will not be allowed.

3.05 WARRANTY AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT
A. All PLC hardware and software shall be provided with a 1 year replacement warranty from date of PROJECT acceptance
- END OF SECTION -
13370
SECTION 13370

APPLICATIONS PROGRAMMING
PART 1 - PROCESS CONTROL NARRATIVE

1.01 CHEMICAL FEED MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. GENERAL

1. The chlorine system monitoring and control system consists of following monitoring and control equipment.
a. Chlorine Injection Pump #1 (CFP-2111)
b. Chloring Injection Pump #2 (CFP-2121)
c. Chemical Storage Area Containment Leak Detection (LSHH-2103) d. Chemical Storage Tank #1 Level Transmitter (LIT-2101) e. Chemical Storage Tank #2 Level Transmitter (LIT-2102) f. Existing Effluent Flow Transmitter (FIT-XXXX)
g. Existing Effluent Chlorine Residual Analyzer (AIT-XXXXA) h. Existing Effluent Chlorine Residual Analyzer (AIT-XXXXB) B. STORAGE TANK LEVEL MONITORING

1. Each chemical storage tank will be provided with an Ultrasonic Level Transmitter for monitoring the tank level. The PLC will monitor the tank storage in both FT and Gallons to allow for chemical level and chemical usage monitoring.

2. The level signal will be utilized to provide for the following status alarm conditions:
a. High High Tank Level – Overflow Warning Alarm
b. High Tank Level – Tank Full Status
c. Low Level Alarm
d. Low Low Level Alarm – Stop Chemical Feed Pump(s)
e. Tank Level Rate of Change Alarm – Potential Leak Condition

Lakeport City CouncilJanuary 6, 2026

Lakeport City Council
January 6, 2026